Home

PDF user manual for CopperEdge 150

1.
2. Ethernet 1 Port RJ 45 Analog Modem Port RJ 11 Serial Port COM2 RJ 45 Serial Port COM1 RJ 45 Ethernet 2 Port RJ 45 Not supported in this release System Control Module 3 32 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Ethernet Port Connect a Category 5 STP cable with RJ 45 connectors at both ends between the Net 1 connector and any available port 10BASE T or 100BASE T of a network facility such as a hub The Net 2 connector for Ethernet 2 is not supported in this re lease 1 Tx Data 2 Tx Data 3 Rx Data 6 Rx Data Ethernet Port Pinouts Craft and Diagnostic Serial Ports Both the Craft and Diagnostic ports are 16C550 PC Compatible serial ports with RJ 45 connectors Unlike the SCM 1 and SCM 2 boards you can concurrently use the Craft and Modem ports on the SCM 3 board Request To Send RTS Data Terminal Ready DTH Transmitted Data TXD Ground GND Ground GND Receive Data Ante Data Set Ready DSR Clear To Send CTS ANMORODY Straight through Pinouts for the Craft and Diagnostic Ports If you are using an access server connect a Category 5 STP roll
3. DIAGNOSTIC craFt M Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 DS1 WAN Module Receive Tip line RTIP Receive Ring line RRING Transmit Tip line Te Transmit Ring line TRING ak N Quad T1 Pinouts Each T1 line has an LED that indicates the condition of the line or the type of traffic on the line including alarm signals and normal operating signals The LEDs have three colors indicat ing different states DS1 WAN Module Quad T1 LEDs Color Description Green Normal operation The line has been synchronized with the network and shows no local or far end alarms Yellow A far end failure condition The LED stays yellow until the con dition is cleared Red A near end failure condition including either loss of signal or loss of frames The LED stays red until the condition is cleared 36 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Pre Power Check Before you apply power to the CE150 for the first time take a few minutes to check the physical integrity of the installed unit e Check that the power wires match the right leads If you are uncertain use the voltmeter to test the circuitry e Check that all plug in modules are properly aligned and seated in their connectors Check all modules to ensure that their extraction levers are lying flat parallel to the pl
4. 139 HDIA Netmodel Data and Voice Groups 0 05 141 HDIA Netmodel Data and Voice Groups with Netmasks 142 HDIA Netmodel Configuring Subnets for Data and Voice Groups 147 HDIA Netmodel Configuring IP Addresses and Netmasks 150 HDIA Netmodel Configuring the IP Address on the CR408 153 HDIA Netmodel Restarting the IAD 0 0000 e ee eee 154 HDIA Netmodel Querying the CR408 00005 155 HDIA Netmodel Addressing the Second DSL Port 156 Cross Connect Netmodel and Point to Point Protocol 160 IP Netmodelies c i iid haan eA ie ae as Cea el he ae 161 Cross Connect Netmodel VPIs and VCIs 005 162 Cross Connect Netmodel Destination Pll 165 IP Netmodel Default Route 000002 169 System Control Module LEDs 00000 cece eee eee 173 DS3 WAN Module LEDs 0 00 cece eens 175 DS1 WAN Module LEDs 0 0 0 c cee ene 175 DSL Subscriber Side Loopbacks 00 0 cee eae 191 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide xvii IDSL Loop with Multiple Network Elements 192 DS1 Loopback Modes 0 0 0 cece eee eee 193 DS3 Loopback Modes 20 0 0 cece eee eee 194 SDSL Loop Test Functionality 00 0c eee eae eee 196 CE150 with Five Simultaneous Netmodels 0005 225 CE150 with Up
5. vr IAD HDIA 8 DSLAM Phones 6 IP Addr 10 0 21 2 ke ud Voice IP Addr 10 0 21 1 Gateway HDIA Netmodel Restarting the IAD 154 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 15 Perform a Get on the board in the IAD cpe 1 4 13 and confirm that it is an IAD capable of supporting both data and voice The software version should be the latest version The file name should always be CPE5_T BIN CRAFT gt get cmcpeboard cpe 1 4 13 Group cmCPEBoardTable Instance CPE 1 4 13 Index CPE 1 4 13 ObjectClass CPE SDSL OperState Enabled HwType CPE SDSL HwVersion R 1 1 SwVersion 30 79 PromVersion 3 0 70 Role Active UpTime 0 day 3 hour 6 min 1 0 sec 2000 02 15 21 37 40 NumPorts 1 FileName CPE5_T BIN FileDate Feb 14 2000 11 46 31 ConfigChange 0 Command None SerialNumber 0 60 58 1 43 12 VendorDescription CR408 SDSL IAD 8 Port GroupMap 3a 40 39 38 91 92 93 94 9b ManagementOptions 1 The following diagram shows the addressing on both the data host and the voice IAD as well as the default router for data and the voice gateway It also shows the PII of the first DSL port and the IAD on the DSL port HDIA Data Group 10 0 20 0 HDIA Voice Group 10 0 21 0 IP Addr 10 0 20 2 IP Addr 10 0 20 1 Default Router 1 D PII cpe 1 4 13 F 7 Host PII 1 4 13 IAD E 8 eo o l DSLAM Phones EE IP Addr 10 0 21 2 a vais Gateway IP Addr 10
6. CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 100 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype frf5 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 5 1 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype q922 CRAFT gt set cmsubiface 1 5 1 15 destpii 1 2 1 100 FRF 8 Translation and Transparent Forwarding Modes This translation forwarding mode is for Q 922 frames being sent to ATM VCs on an ATM network where they terminate The CE150 decides to use translation mode or transparent mode based on the encapsulations set on the DSL VC and WAN VC In the Cross Connect netmodel DSL VC encapsulation is im plied by the DSL port encapsulation For instance if the two encapsulations are the same or if the WAN VC encapsulation is None Transparent mode is used If they differ the Translation mode is used Since DSL encapsu lation applies to an entire DSL port all DSL VCs that require translation must use the same encapsulation DSL encapsula tion is not relevant or used on DSL VCs that are not translated i e whose cross connected WAN VC does not specify a trans lation To configure two data VCs on one DSL port and map them to two WAN VCs where one has an encapsulation type of RFC 1483 and the other has an encapsulation type of None enter the following commands CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 1 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype rfc1483 destpii 1 4 1 19 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 2 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype none destpii 1 4 1 20 CRAFT
7. 3 When the upgrade is complete set the SDSL Module Data Rate to any supported rate Downloading software to a CopperRocket typically takes about two minutes to complete Appendix D Upgrading System Software 261 Upgrading Multiple CPEs To upgrade or otherwise download software to multiple CPEs it is generally more efficient to designate DSL physical ports that are eligible for bulk CPE download with cmEndPointConfig and then use the cmMaintCmd group to execute a BulkDownload on all eligible CPEs at the same time Note that any necessary speed adjustments are performed au tomatically and the procedure described in Upgrading an Indi vidual CPE is not necessary See the CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide for in formation on bulk downloading software to multiple CPEs CPE Upgrades from an External Server To upgrade the software on connected IMUX CPEs or VoDSL IADs perform the following steps 1 Upgrade the software in the CE150 flash Restart the CE150 unit System Restart From the CPE subdirectory of the Release directory on the Copper Mountain Support FTP site get the following files from the subdirectory and transfer them to the host machine to be used as your remote file server Be sure that the server IP address is reachable from the CE150 s route table cpe5_b bgz code for CopperRocket 202 IMUX SDSL cpe5_h bgz code for CopperRocket 212 IMUX IDSL cpe5_t bgz code for CopperRocket 408 IAD
8. Chapter 1 Introducing the CopperEdge 150 Concept of Operation The following illustration shows a typical deployment of the el ements of the Copper Mountain DSL system At the subscriber site the CopperRocket also referred to as the Customer Premise Equipment or CPE connects to the sub scriber s LAN PC or other device with 1OBASE T Ethernet The CE150 receives data from each DSL link subscriber line at a central location in the office building It adds packet header information to identify each of its connected subscribers and aggregates the subscriber lines for transmission over the net work Public Network ety Access a wan Ports Wiring Closet Subscribers 48 VDC or 120 VAC w Network E iber 1 gt re gt E Subscriber Router CSU Quad DS1 FR CopperRocket rs DSU etc DS3 FR DS3 ATM i CE 150 o LAN Ethernet 4 gt Neti LAN WAN lt Net 2 Craft G Subscriber n gt ae CopperRocket I ar PSTN Diagnostics DSL Modem f lt 4 Status Configuration Data Flow CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Management Tools Software to configure and manage the system consists of the CopperCraft command line user interface Remote monitor ing and control through Telnet is also available A graphic user interface is available through the Element Man ager software component of the CopperView DSL Access Man a
9. Expert help with your Copper Mountain equipment and soft ware is available through our Customer Service Center CSC Toll free telephone support is available Monday through Friday from 6 a m to 6 p m Pacific time at 888 61 1 4CMN 888 61 1 4266 Optional service agreements are also available for those requir ing extended support 24 hour seven day and other premium services Contact your Copper Mountain sales representative for details For assistance or information via e mail contact support coppermountain com Technical information about DSL and Copper Mountain prod ucts and technology is also available at our web site at http www coppermountain com Chapter 1 Introducing the CopperEdge 150 11 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Chapter 2 Installation This chapter describes the physical installation of the CE150 and provides information needed to establish its various phys ical connections The CE150 should only be installed by professionally trained personnel in restricted access equipment rooms to prevent ac cidental injury to non qualified personnel or damage to the unit Complete information about the physical installation and turn up is in the CopperEdge Installer s Guide Chapter 2 Installation Site Preparation Before installing the CE150 read this section thoroughly Environmental Conditions The only environmental conditions that may restrict use of the CE
10. Packets Full gt IP WAN VC Interface Interface Filter Interface Filter t Passed lt Fwd oe I oN l or sat lt poss packet SN To WAN VO NX OER Forward to next hop i eee VY Y i 4 i f l i l I l l l CE System Filter CE IP Applications SNMP Telnet etc IP Filtering and Packet Flow in the CopperEdge DSLAM Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 93 Viewing Filters Every source of IP packets can be identified by its PII Each DSL port network port and every virtual circuit aggregated into a high speed digital facility can be referenced by its PII Each PII can be configured with a separate independent set of IP filters Each filter in turn consists of a specific set of criteria against which incoming packets are compared If the incoming packet matches the criteria specified by the filter the packet is sub jected to the action Pass Block or Chain specified by that fil ter When a packet arrives it is checked against the filters in the list in order The first filter which matches the packet deter mines which action will be taken An action code is also pro grammed into the filter defining whether the matched packet will be passed or blocked or if the filter will simply be combined with another chained to further specify the applicable range of packet values
11. CRAFT gt set cmcpeboard cpe pii command restart In this case the PII is the permanent interface identifier of the CE150 DSL port to which the specified CPE is connected Module Soft Restart You can also perform a soft restart on the CE150 System Con trol Module any of the DSL modules or a DS3 Frame module but not to Buffer Control modules to V 35 WAN modules or DS3 ATM modules If you suspect a software fault within a spe cific module it may be possible to recover by restarting only the specific module In some cases this may be a less drastic solu tion than restarting the entire chassis That is it might affect fewer subscribers as in restarting only a single DSL module Also restarting a single module generally takes less time than a complete reboot To restart a specific module enter the following command CRAFT gt set cmboard pii command restart In this case the PII consists only of the shelf and slot number For example a DSL module in slot 5 would be specified as 1 5 N O T E A Restart command directed to a module that does not support individual module restart may return a Set Successful message but in fact the command will be ignored 208 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Line Card Restart Hardware Restart If for some reason you are unable to restart a DSL module us ing the normal software restart option set cmboard a hard ware restart is available through th
12. For maximum security a packet which matches no filters is au tomatically blocked However an interface for which no filters have been configured passes all packets N O T E Since IP packets can also be addressed to the CE150 itself system security may be enhanced by establishing a list of filters applicable to the CE150 To configure filters that apply to the overall system use the CE150 s virtual PII 1 0 0 0 As a further security measure and to counteract an inherent vulnerability in Internet compliant systems the cmFilter table for the CE150 includes a static filter that will immediately discard any ICMP Redirect messages destined for the CE150 As we have seen each interface can have its own set of filters In certain cases this list could be a long one If you are using CopperView EMS to control the CE150 then you can display the entire contents of the filter table Otherwise you can re trieve them in batches using the Getall command CRAFT gt getall cmfilter 1 4 7 To view filters singly begin by retrieving the first filter in the list CRAFT gt get cmfilter 1 4 7 1 Then to view succeeding filters for the same interface simply use the Getnext command CRAFT gt getnext cmfilter 94 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Specifying Activating and Deleting Filters Specifying the filters in the list deleting them or deleting an entire list are accomplished using the cmFilter
13. Information included in the event File name Board PIl Reason code Descriptive text Cleared by BootFileSucceed Trap cmBootFileError ConfigReadFailed Major Sent by the System Control Module when an error is encountered while reading the Config file Information included in the event File name Reason Cleared by ConfigReadSucceed Trap cmConfigFileReadFailed ConfigWriteFailed Major Sent by the System Control Module when an error is encountered while writing the Config file Information included in the event File name Reason Cleared by ConfigWriteSucceed Trap cmConfigFileWriteFailed CpePlugAndPlayFailure Minor Sent by the System Control Module when a CPE Plug and Play update fails Information included in the event Status string Cleared by CpePlugAndPlayClear Trap cmCpePlugAndPlayFailure 238 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Type Severity DLCIStateDisabled Minor Description Sent by the System Control Module when a Frame Relay PVC becomes disabled Information included in the event IF index DLCI State Port name Port PII Group name Cleared by DLCIStateEnabled Trap frDLCIStatusChange DS1LineStatusAlarm Major Sent by a Quad T1 Wan module or a T1 line module when a line status changes to an error status Information included in the event Value of the DS1 line status Time at last line status change IF index
14. Trap cmCpePlugAndPlayClear 242 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Type Severity DLCIStateEnabled Notification Description Sent by the System Control Module when a Frame Relay PVC becomes enabled Information included in the event IF index DLCI State Port name Port PII Group name Cleared by DLCIStateDisabled Trap frDLCIStatusChange DS1LineStatusClear Notification Sent by a Quad T1 Wan module or a T1 line module when line status changes to a no error status Information included in the event Value of DS1 line status Time at last line status change IF index of DS1 line Port name Port PII Group name Cleared by DS1LineStatusAlarm Trap dsx1LineStatusChange DS3LineStatusClear Notification Sent by a DS3 module when line status changes to a no error status Information included in the event Value of DS3 line status Time at last line status change IF index of DS3 line Port name Port PII Group name Cleared by DS3LineStatusAlarm Trap dsx3LineStatusChange FanFaultClear Notification Sent by the System Control Module when a Fan fault is cleared Information included in the event None Cleared by FanFault Trap cmFanFailureClear IDSLTimingLossClear Notification Sent by an IDSL line module when the network timing is reac quired Information included in the event Board PII Configured timing mode Cleared by IDSLTimingLossAlarm Trap
15. f Paste the Config file that you copied in step c ftp gt put config tgz or put config txt 200 Port set okay 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection 226 Transfer complete 3218 bytes sent in 0 17 seconds lt 18 93 Kbytes sec 9 At this point the ce200bu directory on the CE150 contains all of the files needed for your upgrade 10 Return to the system root directory ftp gt ed 250 Changed directory to P Rename the Directory CE150 the New Software From the CE150 root directory rename the newly rebuilt ce200bu directory to the default name for the CE150 software ce200 ftp gt rename ce200bu ce200 350 Accepted source filename Ready for destination name 354 Rename done Restart the CE150 to Implement the New Software 1 Exit the FTP session 256 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide ftp gt bye 2 Use Telnet or the serial Craft interface to connect to the CE150 3 Log in to the CE150 using admin for the login name and password 4 At the prompt restart the system CRAFT gt set cmsystem command restart Set Successful It may take several minutes for the system to restart During this time the command line interface will not accept commands A good indicator that enough time has elapsed for the restart sequence to complete is when connection to the CE150 is lost 5 When the system has completed its restart sequence log into the CE150 using admin for the login name and pa
16. networking are also included A ADSL Asymmetrical DSL DSL scheme in which upstream and downstream data rates are different typically with the downstream channel running much faster than the upstream channel address A character string used as a unique identifier usually of a specific location user machine or logical name agent An active object with a specific pur pose See SNMP Agent AIS Alarm Indication Signal used in DS1 and DS3 status messages alarm An event category that requires an operator s attention ARP Address Resolution Protocol A protocol within the TCP IP suite that maps IP addresses to Ethernet addresses TCP IP requires ARP for use with Ethernet ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode A typi cally high speed T3 method of wide area data transfer in which the information is orga nized into cells Asynchronous in the sense that there may not be any periodicity in the recurrence of information cells originating with a specific end point or user B BER Bit Error Rate also Block Error Rate boot bootstrap The process of starting a computer or a routine the first few instruc tions are sufficient to bring the rest of it s nec essary components into memory BootP server An external device that provides bootstrap data through the Bootstrap Protocol bps bits per second Measurement unit used to specify the rate or speed of data communica tions Buffer Control Module A module used with
17. 0 00 c cee eee 242 Event Notifications 00 00 c ce ees 245 Appendix D Upgrading System Software 0000 cece eens 249 Software Upgrade Overview 0000 cece eee ees 250 ETREMO S cag ace aaea a a hats a a incite a A E E Saray 251 Upgrade the CE150 Software nananana anaana 252 Prepare the New Software on the Local Machine 252 Save the Current Config File on the CE150 252 Upgrade the Software on the CE150 0005 253 Rename the Current and Backup Directories 253 Upload New Files 0 0 254 Rename the Directory CE150 the New Software 256 Restart the CE150 to Implement the New Software 256 View the Compressed Configuration File 260 Upgrade the CPE Software 0 0c cece cece eae 261 Upgrading an Individual CPE 0 0 0 0 c eee eee 261 Upgrading Multiple CPES 0 00 c eee eee 262 CPE Upgrades from an External Server 0 00005 262 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide xv Appendix E Appendix F xvi CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide List of Illustrations Status Configuration Data Flow 0 0 eee eae 2 Concept of Operation 0 0 0 eee 3 DSL Cable Connectors and Pinouts on the Back of the CE150 27 System Control Module 0000 eee eee eee 28 System Control Module 3
18. Appendix C Event and Alarm Reference 245 Type FallingThresholdAlert Severity Notification Description Sent by the System Control Module when a performance value falls below its threshold Information included in the event Index Threshold variable Sampling method Actual value Threshold value to compare against Port name Port PII Group name Cleared by None Trap cmFallingAlarm LoginFailed Notification Sent by the System Control Module when an attempted opera tor login fails the authentication is invalid or incorrect Information included in the event Operator IP Telnet sessions only Cleared by None Trap cmLoginError LoginSucceeded Notification Sent by the System Control Module when an attempted opera tor login succeeds the authentication is valid Information included in the event Operator IP Telnet sessions only Cleared by None Trap cmLoginOK Logout Notification Sent by the System Control Module when an operator logs out Information included in the event Operator IP Reason Cleared by None Trap cmLogout LoopStatusChange Notification Sent by the System Control Module at the start and end of a loopback test Information included in the event Status of loopback test Unique identifier for this test PII of interface being tested Type of test being performed Person or entity running the test If Status Done the terminatio
19. Buffer Control Modules e BCM 1 i960CF 33 MHz processor 4 Kbytes of internal instruction cache 1 Kbyte of internal data cache direct mapped write through 1 Kbyte internal SRAM gt Can be used with SCM 1 SCM 2 or SCM 3 e BCM 2 Clock doubled i960HD 33 66 MHz processor 16 Kbytes of internal instruction cache four way set associative 8 Kbytes of internal data cache four way set associa tive 2 Kbytes internal RAM Can only be used with SCM 3 Y Line Modules e SDSL 30X module 24 physical ports multi speed 1 568 Mbps 1 040 Mbps and 784 416 320 208 and 160 Kbps 2B1Q e ADSL G lite module 24 physical ports multi speed 64 Kbps to 2 336 Mbps e ADSL G dmt module 24 physical ports multi speed 64 Kbps to 6 144 Mbps e TIl Line Module 12 physical ports 1 544 Mbps 50 bps e Input Output Impedance at all DSL ports Balanced 135 Q WAN Modules Two port Universal Serial 1 O EIA 449 CCITT V 36 X 21 e One port DS3 45 Mbps Frame Relay dual Tx Rx 75 Ohm Coaxial e One port DS3 45 Mbps ATM dual Tx Rx 75 Ohm Coaxial e Four port DS1 T1 PMC 100 Ohm unshielded twisted pair using modular RJ 48C connectors e Up to 2048 WAN VCs can be supported per CE150 Chapter 1 Introducing the CopperEdge 150 7 Software Features DSL Link Protocols Internet RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over Frame Based User to Network Interface FUNI DSL ports also suppor
20. CIR parameters Frame Relay PVCs 129 clear alarms manually 185 clearing alarms 185 cmlface 228 ColdStart event notification 245 command string 48 command structure 48 commands Alarms 49 Elog 49 Find 51 Getall 51 LCRestart 49 209 SCMRestart 49 210 committed information rate 127 community names Private 55 Public 55 community string SNMP 55 config file copying through FTP 256 saving 252 config tgz unzip 260 view 260 ConfigReadFailed alarm 238 configuration backup to remote machine 110 ConfigWriteFailed alarm 238 ConfigWriteSucceed alarm clearing notification 242 congestion management frame relay 127 connector pinouts DSL cable 26 27 connectors Amphenol 16 BNC 17 35 DSL cable 26 EIA TIA 232 Serial Interface 6 29 IEC 320 power 23 Net 1 33 Net 2 33 RF45 29 RJ 11 17 RJ 21 138 RJ 21X 26 RJ 45 6 16 32 RJ 48C 7 36 SMB 17 35 Copper Mountain Proprietary MIB 9 Copper Mountain support FTP site 10 CopperBayModule class 178 CopperCraft user interface 3 CopperEdge physical dimensions 5 CopperView DSL Access Management System 9 CopperView Element Manager 44 274 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide CopperVPN IP multiplexing protocol 8 CPE errors 200 CPE IDSL class 180 CpePlugAndPlayFailure alarm 238 CPE SDSL class 179 CR class 179 CR201 10x class 179 CR201 30x class 179 CR201 IDSL class 179 CR201 SDSL class 179
21. CRAFT gt geta cmcpeiad Index CurrentIpAddr CurrentCAIpAddr SavedIpAddr SavedCAIpAddr NumVoicePorts NumConnections Command TOSByte LogAction LogType LogLevel LogDuration TotalMsgsLogged TracelMask Trace2Mask Instance CPE 1 13 2 CPE 1 13 2 10 10 15 10 10 1 1 10 1055 1 0 10 5 4 S 8 16 None 10 DeleteDebug 4 0 1 2 3 30 0 0 0 All existing messages have been deleted from the cmCpeLog Table CRAFT gt geta cmcpelog No more instances Set the LogAction object to None CRAFT gt set cmcpeiad cpe 1 5 2 logaction none Set Successful Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 207 Restart Options As mentioned elsewhere the CE150 is designed to provide un interrupted service 24 hours a day Resetting or restarting the system or any of its modules is service affecting and should only be done when warranted by a failure that cannot be re solved any other way Nevertheless situations may arise that can only be resolved by resetting a subscriber CPE a module in the CE150 or by re booting the CE150 itself CPE Soft Restart If you suspect that a particular subscriber CPE is experiencing a software fault it may be possible to recover by restarting the unit from the CE150 When this command is issued the CPE should restart and retrain on the DSL port and reload its soft ware Normal data transmission to and from the CPE will be in terrupted while the restart sequence completes To restart a CPE enter the following command
22. Craft serial port 6 9 16 44 SCM 1 and SCM 2 29 SCM 3 33 DB9 male serial ports 6 DB9 serial cable 17 DC Power module 5 default route 57 Diagnostic event notification 245 Diagnostic port 6 16 SCM 1 and SCM 2 29 SCM 3 33 DLCIStateDisabled alarm 239 DS1 Quad T1 WAN module features 7 LEDs 175 DS1LineStatusAlarm 239 DS3 ATM WAN module 7 DS3 Frame Relay WAN module 7 DS3 WAN module LEDs 175 DS3ATMPort class 179 DS3ATM WAN class 179 DS3FRPort class 179 DS3FR WAN class 178 DS3LineStatusAlarm 239 DSL cable 17 connector 16 DSL cable connector pinouts 26 27 DSL cable connectors 26 DSL hardware specifications 5 DSL link connections 26 DSL modules ADSL Gdmt 7 ADSL Glite 7 input output impedence 7 replace 214 SDSL 7 DSLcable twisted pair 138 DSLLink class 179 EIA 19 inch rack 5 EIA 23 inch rack 5 EIA TIA 232 Serial Interface connector 29 EIA TIA 232 Serial Interface connectors 6 EIA232 NUL Modem cable 16 EIA 2332D Console port 9 EIA 449 CCITT V 36 WAN module 7 Elog command 49 EndPointConflictAlarm 239 ESD precautions 19 211 static strap 17 Ethernet connections 14 Ethernet cable 138 Ethernet connections 2 Ethernet ports 100Base T 6 10Base T 6 SCM 1 and SCM 2 29 SCM 3 33 Ethernet VWAN over 122 EthernetLink class 179 EthernetPort class 179 Event log 9 180 188 event notifications 177 atmfVccChange 245 AttributeChanged 245 BoardRestart 245 ColdStar
23. I 10BaseT IMUX CPE dsl IMUX A 0 Packet Forwarding 5 Zz Multilink Bundle Single Link CPE Single Link CPE DSL Multilink IMUX Concept Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 99 Configuring an IMUX Bundle In general the procedure for setting up an IMUX bundle and configuring it is the same as for an individual DSL port but there are a few special considerations When choosing which DSL ports to put into an IMUX bundle note that they can be on the same DSL Module or on different ones but all ports in the bundle must be on the same CE150 l Using cmHDSLModem set the rates at which you want each of the ports in the bundle to operate For best multilink performance set the two lines to the same speed For example if you want approximately 2000 Kbps throughput it is better to set both lines at 1040 Kbps for a total of 2080 than it is to set one at 1568 Kbps and the other at 416 Kbps for a total of 1984 CRAFT gt set cmhdsl 1 5 1 datarate 1040 Set Successful CRAFT gt set cmhdsl 1 5 2 datarate 1040 Set Successful Using cmBundle create the bundle and enter the PIIs of the DSL ports on the CE150 that you want to assign to the bundle You can enter all of the ports in the bundle with one command or you can enter one and the others later or you can create the bundle and add no ports initially CRAFT gt set cmbundl
24. IfIndex 1 4 1 0 Name Port Name GroupName Group Name AdditionallInfo Port Information NetModel CopperVPN IpAddr 0 0 0 0 NetMask 0 0 0 0 MacAddr EEvit river rey EE BurnedInMacAddr 0 60 58 1 1 2c FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPII 1 2 1 23 CMCPCompatible Yes EncapsulationType rfcl483 FwdMode CopperVPN Pix 4 Service Class D 2 Identify the WAN VC on which to aggregate these DSL links by specifying its NetModel and EncapsulationType objects CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 23 netmodel coppervpn encapsulationtype rfc1490 Set Successful If the WAN interface is ATM use RFC 1483 instead of RFC1490 CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 4 1 23 Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 2 1 23 PII de2el 23 IfIndex laa le 23 Name Port Name GroupName Group Name AdditionallInfo Port Info NetModel CopperVPN IpAddr 0 0 0 0 NetMask 0 0 0 0 MacAddr A ETETE FE BurnedInMacAddr EEEE T TE EEEE FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPII 0 0 0 0 CMCPCompatible No EncapsulationType rfc1490 FwdMode CopperVPNauto Pix 4 Service Class D 70 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 3 Ifno IP address is specified for the VC s FarEndAddr it is 0 0 0 0 the system will use inverse ARP to get the upstream IP address and FwdMode will display CoppervPNauto If you set FarEndAddr the static setting overrides the inverse ARP function The FwdMode object displays coppervpn and outbound p
25. Module Port Status All SDSL and ADSL G dmt or G lite modules have a cluster of 24 LED indicators each of which corresponds to one of its DSL ports Ifa port has been correctly wired and configured the CPE at the far end of the DSL link will train on the port and the associated LED will turn green If the indicator is off or if it continually al ternates between off and on there is a fault with the port link or CPE T1 DSL Line Module Port Status The T1 DSL line module has a cluster of 12 LED indicators each of which corresponds to one of its DSL ports Each LED has three colors that indicate the following states e Off Reset state power down state or administratively down Admin Down e Green Normal operation synchronized with the network no local or far end alarms administratively up Admin Up e Yellow Far end failure with no near end failure administratively up Admin Up e Red Near end failure such as loss of signal loss of frame or receiving AIS with or without a far end failure administratively up Admin Up 176 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Events and Alarms The CE150 is designed to be in continuous operation 24 hours a day During operation various events will occur operators will log in and out configuration files will be modified and saved the status of DSL or network links will change and oc casional failures or other operational anomalies may occur
26. N O T E These code files identified by the bgz file extension are contained within a compressed archive The CopperEdge will automatically expand the files when installing them on the CPE so do not take any specific action except as specified below 4 When the system has fully initialized and all connected CPEs have trained log into the CE150 and configure the cmFile group as follows FSAddr The IP Address of the file server FSUsername The User Name used to log in to the file server FSPass The Password used to log in to the file server 262 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide FSDir The directory path to be traversed to reach the file archives you transferred in step 3 5 Once the CPE code files have been placed on the remote server and the cmFile group has been configured to locate them follow the procedure in Upgrading an Individual CPE on page 261 in this release Bulk Upgrade is not supported for IAD or IMUX CPE When you issue the upgrade command the CE150 will identify the CPE as a type whose code is stored on the remote server The files will then be copied to the CE150 expanded and downloaded to the specified CPE For IMUX CPEs you only need to enter the PII of one of the DSL physical interfaces that comprise the IMUX link Appendix D Upgrading System Software 263 264 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Appendix E CPE Inside Wiring Inside wiring for
27. Name GroupName AdditionalInfo NetModel IpAddr NetMask MacAddr BurnedInMacAddr FarEndAddr DestPII 1 2 1 0 cmIfaceTable Vaile we dad 12d D ww ww IP 192 181 255 255 0 80 50 0 80 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pi Pp les ure LOR 1235 0 1 b3 ca 1 b3 ca Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 63 CMCPCompatible No EncapsulationType rfcl483 FwdMode Full IP Pix 2 ServiceClass None 2 The CE150 retrieves the MAC address from the CPE automatically each time a DSL link is established 3 Remember also that all CE150 ports Ethernet WAN or DSL are referenced with a PII For example PII 1 2 1 refers to the connector Port 1 on the front of a DS3 WAN module 4 Hosts connected to the CPE LAN must be configured with IP addresses on the subnet defined by the DSL port s IP address and netmask 5 When you have completed the Initial Configuration of the CE150 and its interfaces save the configuration data to a file CRAFT gt set cmsystem command save 6 The file is saved on the appropriate volume P as ce200 system config tgz or config txt For more information see Saving Values on page 108 7 Use the ping command to verify connectivity CRAFT gt ping 192 181 113 102 8 Log out of the Command Line Interface by entering exit quit OF logout at the prompt 9 Ifyou fail to log out the system will perform an auto logout after approximately 15 minutes same as Telnet Policy
28. Pix 533 ServiceClass None HDIA Data Group 10 0 20 0 vost Il IAD P IP efau E HIDIS Router 4 IAD DSLAM Hosts j te P E HDIA Voice Group 10 0 21 0 ee rF Phones 88 IAD ee Voice HDIA s 88 JAD Gateway Phones ee DSLAM HDIA Netmodel Configuring Subnets for Data and Voice Groups Chapter 6 Voice over DSL 147 3 4 Set the VC for data on the WAN port with a vpi range 0 to 15 and a vci range 0 to 511 But reserve the vpi 0 and vci 511 combination for ATM loopback testing CRAFT gt set cmatmvcl 1 2 1 20 rowstatus create vpi 0 vci 200 adminstatus up When you perform a Get on the VC to check your work you will see this table CRAFT gt get cmatmvcl 1 2 1 20 Group cmAtmVclTable Instance 1 2 1 20 PII 1 2 1 20 Vpi 0 Vei 200 AdminStatus Up OperStatus Up LastChange 0 day 0 hour 0 min 0 0 sec AalType Aald Aal5CpcsTransmitSduS 1600 Aal5CpcsReceiveSduSi 1600 RowStatus Active TransmitTrafficDescr 1 OAMState adminDown 0 OAMAdminState disabled OAMAutoLBState disabled OAMManualLBCmd none OAMManualLBCmdStatus none OAMLBInterval 5 OAMLBTimeOut 15 OAMTxAISCells 0 OAMRxRDICells 0 OAMRxAISCells 0 OAMTxRDICells 0 OAMTxLBRequestCells 0 OAMRxLBResponseCells 0 OAMRxLBRequestCells 0 OAMTxLBResponseCells 0 OAMRxUnsupportedCell 0 OAMTxDiscards 0 OAMRxDiscards 0 Op
29. Sent by a DSL line module when a link is not trained Information included in the event Port PII Current data rate Cleared by RateFallbackAlarm Trap cmRateFallbackClear 244 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Event Notifications Type Severity Description atmfVccChange Minor The attributes of the ATM WAN VC have been modified Information included in the event IP of the VC VPI of the VC VCI of the VC Cleared by None Trap atmfVccChange AttributeChanged Notification Sent by the System Control Module when a Set command completes successfully a group instance or object has changed value There is one event per attribute changed Information included in the event Operator name Operator IP Operator context String with Group Instance Object Value Cleared by None Trap cmAttributeChange BoardRestart Notification Sent by any module before a software initiated reset due to the reason supplied Information included in the event Reason code Descriptive text Cleared by None Trap cmBoardRestart ColdStart Notification Sent by the System Control Module when it powers up Information included in the event None Cleared by None Trap coldStart Diagnostic Notification Sent by any module when a miscellaneous unexpected event occurs that the operator should know about Information included in the event Text Cleared by None Trap cmDiagnostic
30. The follow ing diagram illustrates the DSL loopback tests supported on the CE150 SCM CPE BER SCM DSL ModulePort Packet Loopback CopperEdge Loopback DSLAM d CPE D E gt est lt i _ Origin DSL System Mod Control Module SCM CR Ethernet Packet Loopback BER is Bit Error Rate for SDSL and Block Error Rate for IDSL DSL Subscriber Side Loopbacks EOC Loopbacks The EOC Loopback is used for troubleshooting IDSL links Us ing a small portion of the ISDN band called the Embedded Op erations Channel EOC is helpful in isolating IDSL line problems by allowing you to test the various segments between the CE150 and the CPE that comprise an IDSL loop Using the EOC each network element that is each segment or hop re ports its presence and is counted by the CE150 With the num ber of elements number of hops between the CE150 and the CPE known specific network elements can then be placed into loopback mode by addressing the test command to the device that is one two three or more elements downstream from the CE150 The following diagram illustrates the concept Note that the endpoint CPE is always referred to as Hop O or Element O regardless of how many intervening elements may be present Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 191 The IDSL Module includes a CPE monitor that detects the pres ence or absence of a CPE through the EOC and a sta
31. Type AtmVccUp Severity Notification Description Sent by the System Control Module when an ATM WAN VC OperState changes to Up or enabled Information included in the event PII of the VC VPI of the VC VCI of the VC Operational status of the VC Cause of the operational status Cleared by AtmVccDown Trap Enterprise BoardUp Notification Sent by the System Control Module when a new module is detected in the system Information included in the event Index Cleared by BoardDown Trap cmBoardUp BootFileSucceed Notification Sent when a file download request to a module is successfully carried out Information included in the event File name Board PII Reason code Descriptive text Cleared by BootFileFail Trap cmBootFileOK ConfigReadSucceed Notification Sent by the System Control Module when the Config file is suc cessfully read Information included in the event File name Cleared by ConfigReadFailed Trap cmConfigFileReadOk ConfigWriteSucceed Notification Sent by the System Control Module when the config file is suc cessfully written Information included in the event File name Cleared by ConfigWriteFailed Trap cmConfigFileWriteOk CpePlugAndPlayClear Notification Sent by the System Control Module when a CPE Plug and Play failure has been cleared Information included in the event Status string Cleared by CpePlugAndPlayFailure
32. a QO O20 NEAR END CONTROL EE pu o uy CO erar i STATUS NETWORK MODEM DIAGNOSTIC CRAFT C BNC Transmit Connector BNC Receive Connector DS3 WAN Module Three LED indicators are located above the Transmit BNC con nector At power up all three LEDs will illuminate briefly as a functional test Each LED has a specific color to indicate its state DS3 WAN Module LEDs Indicator Color Description Module Green Normal operation The line has been synchronized with the network and shows no local or far end alarms Far End Yellow A far end failure condition The LED stays yellow until the condition is cleared Near End Red A near end failure condition including either loss of signal or loss of frames The LED stays red until the condition is cleared Chapter 2 Installation 35 DS1 WAN Module Quad T1 The DS1 WAN module has four Quad T1 ports Four unshielded twisted pair cables rated at 100 ohms with RJ 48C modular jacks are provided to complete the connection between the module and the DS3 access device Status LED Port 1 Status LED Port 2 Status LED Port 3 Status LED Port 4 Tit T112 T13 T4 0000 diii De QT1 FRAME oe ON CX JO OC ca CRAFT S i STATUS NETWORK MODEM CONTROL MODULE
33. and uses the MAC Address in the DHCP response as the unicast MAC address Therefore only the correct DHCP client will be able to receive the response Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 87 OAM Fault Management for ATM WAN Links The OAM fault management function on the CE150 allows sys tem administrators to monitor basic conditions for transmitting and receiving on end to end ATM WAN links made up of many segments It also allows them to locate a break on one of the segments Transmitting Receiving Fault Messages When a fault occurs on upstream or downstream segments OAM fault management software installed on switching or rout ing devices on the segments sends out Alarm Indication Signal AIS messages The messages travel to devices such as DSLAMs and routers at opposite ends of the link In response the DSLAM and routers send out Remote Defect Indication RDI messages The diagrams below show two possible scenarios first a fault on both the upstream and downstream parts of a connection second a fault on the upstream part of a connection Node A ATM Connection End Point RDI gt 1 m AIS lt AIS me RDI Node B Node C Node D ATM Connection End Point A Break on the Upstream and Downstream Connections In the diagram above the devices at Node B and Node C sense the fault between them The device at Node B sends an AIS mes sage to the device at the endpo
34. cmIDSLBoardTimingLoss Appendix C Event and Alarm Reference 243 Type LinkUp Severity Notification Description Sent by the System Control Module when a DSL link Frame Relay Link or ATM link transitions to enabled from the disabled state Information included in the event Port index Port name Port PII Group name Cleared by LinkDown Trap linkUp LoginAllowed Notification Sent by the System Control Module when a successful login ends a login suspension for a particular operator Information included in the event Operator IP Reason Cleared by LoginSuspended Trap cmLoginsAvailable LoginAvailable Notification Sent by the System Control Module when a login session ends and causes an existing LoginsSaturated condition to clear Information included in the event Operator IP Reason Cleared by LoginSaturated Trap cmLoginsAvailable MaintSucceeded Notification Sent by the System Control Module when a maintenance com mand succeeds Information included in the event Maintenance command attempted Status of command attempted Reason code Status string Cleared by MaintFailed Trap cmMaintCmdStatusChange PowerSupplyClear Notification Sent by the System Control Module when a Power Supply fault clears Information included in the event None Cleared by PowerSupplyFault Trap cmPowerSupplyFailure RateFallbackClear Notification
35. configured objects in the cmDHCPTable and sends the response back to the DSL PII that it arrived on For hosts on the premise LAN The CE150 relays the DHCP requests to an upstream DHCP server The CE150 must know the IP address of the upstream DHCP server you enter this address in the cmDHCPTable The CE150 must also have an IP address assigned to itself which the upstream DHCP server will use to route the DHCP responses back to the CE150 For non CMCP CPEs and hosts on the premise LAN e The CE150 responds to DHCP requests from non CMCP CPEs for which there is an entry in the cmDHCPTable e However the CE150 cannot differentiate between DHCP requests coming from non CMCP CPEs or hosts on the premise LAN It sends the same response for both Therefore for non CMCP CPEs configure the CE150 as a Relay Agent instead of as a DHCP Server Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 81 To configure the CE150 to act as a DHCP Server for a port or VC In cmDHCPTable enter the upstream DHCP server s IP address in the ServerIPAddr object and set the Function object to DH CPRespond You can leave the CircuitID object at the default the system name and the PII of the port or VC CRAFT gt set cmdhcp 1 4 1 0 function dhcprespond serveripaddr 204 20 20 30 Set Successful CRAFT gt get cmdhcp 1 4 1 0 Group cmDHCPTable Instance 1 4 1 0 PII 1 4 1 0 RowStatus Active IpAddress 10 1 2 3 NetMask 255
36. non CE150 application While it may appear to be in text format the config file cannot be reliably revised or updated with a text editor If the file should become corrupted routing information may be adversely affected with unintended effects on service Backing Up the Saved Config File To configure a backup of the config tgz or config txt file one or preferably two file servers primary and secondary need to be set up with FTP servers to receive the configuration file from the CE150 The backed up file is always an uncompressed text file con fig txt Using the cmMaintCmd table and the configbackup command configure the CE150 for config backup Use the following com mand example as a model for your own configuration Full configuration of cmMaintCmd requires setting a fairly lengthy list of parameters To reduce the required complexity of any single command you can issue multiple Set commands provided you begin by specifying the ConfigBackup command and creating the appropriate row in the cmMaintCmad table CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configbackup rowstatus createandwait CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configbackup primaryipaddr 206 71 190 4 CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configbackup secondaryipaddr 206 71 190 5 CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configbackup directory ce200config sys1 110 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configbackup basefilename sysdeltabu CRAFT gt set
37. the chain ac tion described below is used to invoke multiple filtering crite ria for the same packet for example to specify a range of values Chaining Filters The Chain action combines two or more sequential filters in a list Only when a packet matches all filters in the chain will the action in the last filter in the chain be taken Thus to block packets with source ports between 120 and 130 you would combine two filters Match source_port gt 119 action CHAIN Match source_port lt 131 action BLOCK Specifying Filters Remember the first filter that matches the packet determines which action will be taken So not only the selection criteria but the order of their presentation is crucial to an effective fil tering scheme To specify a complete packet filter issue a Set command that includes all of the configurable objects in the cmFilter group including the instance with its two index objects For example Index PII for this filter FilterNumber Filter Number for this filter Function Sets status of the current filter or filter list Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 97 SrcMask Source Subnet Mask Address SrcAdrs Source IP Address DstMask Destination Subnet Mask address DstAdrs Destination IP Address IpProtocol Filter Protocol Identifier SrcPortCompare one equal less greater not equal SECPOLT Source port DstPortCompare one equal less greater not equal DstPort Destination Por
38. tions channel often used to mean any multi plexed packet stream aggregated into a virtual circuit VCC Virtual Channel Connection A concate nation of ATM VCLs See VCL VCI Virtual Channel Identifier Numeric 16 bit field in an ATM cell header that identifies the virtual channel the cell is to take VCL Virtual Channel Link A discrete end to end ATM connection that encompasses both directions of the data exchange Analogous to the Frame Relay PVC Appendix F Glossary 271 VP Virtual Path A unidirectional ATM path consisting of a logical group or bundle of VCs VPI Virtual Path Identifier A 8 bit field in a cell header designating the virtual path to be taken by the cell VPL Virtual Path Link The full path between the point at which a VPI is assigned to a Cell and the point at which the VPI is translated or removed i e between the starting line and fin ish line of the path VWAN Virtual Wide Area Network A network ing model that makes use of the IRB Inte grated Router Bridge capability of compatible routers to allow transparent connectivity of LAN ports over wide area Frame Relay links W WAN Wide Area Network WANs cover extended geographical areas in contrast to LANs WANs generally use links provided by the public switched telephone network to con nect distant sites 272 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Symbols 173 176 242 243 244 245 Numerics 100
39. used to denote a data rate A rate of 1 Mbps is 1 x 10 bits per second MIB Management Information Base A set of variables forming a database contained in an SNMP managed node on a network SNMP managers can fetch store information from to this database MIO Multiplexed Input Output A term applied to CE150 network interfaces multilink A technique in which data to or from a single endpoint is divided into multiple streams and transported over multiple physi cal links effectively multiplying the transmis sion rate See IMUX N node A point where connection may be achieved into a network In practical terms a node is usually the site of a switch or router O octet An eight bit data byte An IP address is comprised of four octets each ranging in num ber from O to 255 operational CE150 A CE150 that is powered up and passing data user or management traf fic P PDU Protocol Data Unit The standard abbre viation used to refer to SNMP protocol packets PES DS3 P bit Errored Seconds One second of time in which one or more P bit coding viola tions frame defects or incoming alarm signals occur PII Permanent Interface Identifier A charac ter string that provides a means of relating a physical interface location to its corresponding network identifiers IP address MAC address etc PIIs are formatted as c ss pp uuuu Where c is the chassis shelf number ss is the slot num ber on the CE150 wher
40. 0 00 cece eee 208 Module Soft Restart 00 00 c eee eee 208 Line Card Restart Hardware Restart 209 SCM 3 Reset Switch 0 00 e eee eee 209 System Configuration 0 000 cee eee 210 System Soft Restart 0 0000 cece eee eee 210 Using SCMRestart 0 00 c eee eee 210 Removing or Replacing Modules 00 0200 eee ee eae 211 System Control Module 02000 cece eee eee 211 Buffer Control Modules 00 000 cee eee eens 213 DSL Line Modules 0 000 e eee eee eens 214 AC or DC Power Modules 00000e cece eee eae 214 Copper Mountain Service and Support 2 000000ee 216 Overview of Data Encapsulation 0 005 217 DSL Port Encapsulations 0 00000 cece eee eee 218 Frame Relay WAN VC Encapsulations 2 00 000 218 ATM WAN VC Encapsulations 00000 eee eee eee 219 Netmodels Encapsulations and Translations 220 DSL Port Encapsulations 2000 cee eee eee eee 220 Dual Netmodel 0 a eal A a ees 221 DSL VC Encapsulations 0 20 cece eee eee eee 221 WAN Port Encapsulations 0 0000 ee 222 WAN VC Encapsulations 0 000 cece eee eee 222 Ethernet Port Encapsulations 0000 e eae eee 222 Translations 45 a AS a Se YR eh ee Sa ES See el 222 xiv CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide DSL
41. 0 21 1 HDIA Netmodel Querying the CR408 Chapter 6 Voice over DSL 155 16 Set the addressing for the second DSL port and the second IAD The subnets for the data and voice groups have been set on the WAN port Data and voice VCsalso have been configured on the WAN port The second IAD is going to support four hosts as shown in the following diagram Its subnet mask must be set at 255 255 255 252 30 The first of the four addresses can be 10 0 20 4 it cannot be 10 0 20 3 1 Host JAD _ Pll 1 4 13 4 E IAD IP Addr 10 0 20 4 Hosts a HDIA Data Group 10 0 20 0 IP Addr 10 0 20 2 Net mask 32 pg WIP Addr 10 0 20 0 Net mask 26 Defaul Pll 1 2 1 20 efault HDIA IP Addr 10 0 20 1 Router VC 528 Net mask 30 DSLAM Pll 1 4 14 L 4 VC 528 8 0 ee IAD Phones 88 e 8 Phones 889 AD HDIA Voice Group 10 0 21 0 IP Addr 10 0 21 2 Net mask 32 i F WH IP Addr 10 0 21 0 ee Net mask 26 B hpa fm Pl 1 2 1 21 Voice MiP Addr 10 0 2133 IP Addr 10 0 21 1 Gateway Net mask 32 DSLAM PII 1 4 14 b VC 22 HDIA Netmodel Addressing the Second DSL Port 156 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Chapter 7 ADSL G lite and G dmt This chapter describes the procedures used to plan and config ure networks for data over ADSL modules both G lite and full rate G dmt It discusses the configuration
42. 00 80 50 70 0d 5c 192 168 1 3 CE150 Proxy ARP Chapter 5 Routing Forwarding Managing Links 123 Configuring WAN VCs Virtual Circuits either Frame Relay or ATM used only as des tinations of policy IP routes do not need to be elaborately con figured For those VCs simply specify the Frame Relay Data Link Circuit Identifier DLCI or ATM virtual circuit number as sociated with the circuit in the destPii of the DSL links Activate the circuit as described below In this mode the CE150 has no knowledge of IP addresses at the far end of the VC As a result the CE150 is fully indepen dent of the far end IP numbering scheme In fact two different VCs can have duplicate overlapping IP addresses impossible with full IP routing and the CE150 will not be affected If you wish you can give IP addresses to the VCs The CE150 treats each VC as a separate point to point unnumbered IP link Unnumbered IP links are ones with no IP subnet number Each end of an unnumbered IP link may have an IP address and if both are present the two addresses can be on different subnets However the preferred way to configure an unnumbered IP link is to assign it a FarEndAddr but not an IP address The FarEndAddr tells the CE150 what the IP address of the device at the far end of the point to point link is The WAN port at the near CE150 end of the link typically has no use for an IP ad dress See the configuration below Group cmifaceTab
43. 000 cece eee eee 32 DS3 WAN Module 0 000 cece eens 35 DS1 WAN Module 0 0 0 36 System Control Module LEDs 0000 c eee eee nee eee 39 Example of a Set Command 0000 eee eee eee 48 IP Network Model 0 000 e cece eee eee ee 63 VWAN Network Model 0000 0 cee eee eee eee eee 65 CopperVPN Network Model 0000 cee eee eee eee 69 VC VC Payload Fowarding Model 000e cea eae 73 Configuring Data and Voice VCs 0 0 0 ee eee 78 DHCP Functionality inthe CE150 00000 c eee 79 The CE150 as a DHCP Server 0 c cee nes 82 The CE150 as a DHCP Relay Agent 0200 ee eeee 83 The CE150 as aDHCP Server 0 0 c eee ees 85 The CE150 as a DHCP Forwarding Agent 00000 86 A Break on the Upstream and Downstream Connections 88 A Fault on the Upstream Connection 0000 eee eee 89 Lookback Request No Response 00 0 eee eee eee eee 89 IP Filtering and Packet Flow in the CopperEdge DSLAM 93 DSL Multilink IMUX Concept 0000 0c eee eee ee 99 CE150 Proxy ARP 0000 cee ete 123 Throughput Management Variables 0 000000 eae 128 Front Panel of the CR408 0 0 cen 138 Back Panel of the CR408 0 c cee eee eee 138 HDIA Netmodel Data and Voice Networks 045 139 HDIA Netmodel IP Addresses and Netmasks
44. 1 88 is the IP address of the router interface to which packets for unknown destinations are routed The mask of the default route is always 0 0 0 0 If no default route is configured packets addressed to unknown destinations are discarded Configure other entries in the IpRoute table as necessary For distant destinations you may need to insert additional routing table entries In fact any other IP Route information beyond the default must be configured as static routes as there is no provision for dynamic route assignment in the CE150 If additional routes are needed add them to the ipRoute table as described in the previous section Using the CopperCraft interface first view the existing route table beginning with the default 0 0 0 0 route CRAFT gt get iproute 0 0 0 0 Group ipRoute Instance 0 0 0 0 Dest IfIndex Metricl Metric2 Metric3 Metric4 NextHop Type 0 0 0 0 2 0 1 192 176 1 88 Direct 58 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 10 11 12 Protot netmgmt Age 64 Mask 0 0 0 0 Metric5 1 Info 0 0 The ipRouteTable is indexed by the destination IP address A route entry requires at least a destination address and a Next Hop address The Next Hop address specifies where to send a packet with the specified destination address For more details on ipRoute group and its objects including valid responses and ranges for each see the reference listing
45. 2390 8 RFC 768 User Datagram 8 RFC 791 IP 8 RFC 792 Internet Control Message 8 RFC 826 Ethernet Address Resolution 8 71 617 Annex D 8 VWAN multiplexing 8 proxy management CPE 9 Public community name 55 Q Q 922 DSL link protocol 8 Q 922 1490 DSL link protocol 8 Q 933 Annex A LMI protocol 8 Quad T1 port pinouts 36 Quad T1 ports 36 QuadT1 WAN class 179 rack mounting 20 racks EIA 19 inch 5 EIA 23 inch 5 Radius authentication 9 RateFallbackAlarm 241 Read Community login prompt 55 redundancy power 9 RedundancyChanged alarm 241 RedundancyConflict alarm 241 replace Buffer Control Module 213 replace DSL module 214 replace System Control Module 211 replace System Control WAN Module 211 required system hardware 14 required tools and materials 17 RFC 1058 Gateway and Hosting Protocol 8 RFC 1157 SNMP Protocol 8 RFC 1213 MIB Il 9 RFC 1315 Frame Relay MIB 9 RFC 1483 DSL link protocol 8 RFC 1483 network protocol 8 RFC 1490 DSL link protocol 8 RFC 1490 network protocol 8 RFC 1573 DS3 ES MIB 9 RFC 1973 PPP network protocol 8 Index 277 RFC 2225 network protocol 8 RFC 2390 network protocol 8 RFC 768 User Datagram protocol 8 RFC 791 Internet Protocol 8 RFC 792 Internet Control Message Protocol 8 RFC 826 Ethernet Address Resolution Protocol 8 RG316 U cable 17 RG 59 U cable 17 RG59 U coaxial cables 35 RisingThresholdAlert event notification 247 RJ 11 cable 265 RJ 11
46. 255 255 255 DefaultRoute 204 20 20 10 DNSServer 204 20 20 20 Function DHCPRespond ServerIPAddr 204 20 20 30 CircuitID CMTN 1 4 1 0 Netmodel IP ACPE CMCP or non CMCP sends a DHCP request N Link to DSL PII CopperEdge CPE j4 1 4 1 0 4 DSLAM I 7 ae ee v l PAddress 10 1 2 3 The CE responds with the IP address from the cmDHCPTable sending it back to the CPE The CE150 as a DHCP Server The CE150 as a DHCP Relay Agent The CE150 relays DHCP requests from CPEs both CMCP and non CMCP and hosts on the premise LAN to an upstream DHCP server To configure the CE 150 to act as a DHCP Relay Agent for a port or VC In cmDHCPTable enter the upstream DHCP server s IP address and set the Function object to DHCPRelay You can leave the CircuitID object at the default the system name and the PII of the port or VC CRAFT gt set cmdhcp 1 4 1 0 function dhcprelay serveripaddr 204 20 20 30 Set Successful CRAFT gt get cmdhcp 1 4 1 0 Group cmDHCPTable Instance 1 4 1 0 PII 1 4 1 0 82 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide RowStatus Active IpAddress 10 1 2 3 NetMask S255 2554259 3255 DefaultRoute 204 20 20 10 DNSServer 204 20 20 20 Function DHCPRelay ServerIPAddr 204 20 20 30 CircuitID CMTN 1 4 1 0 The CE150 performs the following functions when it receives a DHCP request 1 The CE150 inserts the IP address of the DSL P
47. 4 13 to zero CRAFT gt set cmcpeiad cpe 1 4 13 command savedipaddrerase When you perform a Get you will see the following CRAFT gt get cmcpeiad cpe 1 4 13 Group cmCpeIADTable Instance CPE 1 4 13 Index CPE 1 4 13 CurrentIpAddr 10 0 45 2 CurrentCAIpAddr 10 0 45 1 SavedIpAddr 0 0 0 0 SavedCAIpAddr 0 0 0 0 NumVoicePorts 8 NumConnections 8 Command None TOSByte 0 LogAction None LogType ALL 0 LogLevel INFO 0 LogDuration 30 TotalMsgsLogged 0 TracelMask 0 Trace2Mask 0 14 Restart the IAD When the IAD reboots it asks the CE150 for a new IP address and new IP address for its voice gateway To restart or retrain use cmCpeBoard command restart To retrain use iffable adminstatus down adminstatus up Failure to restart retrain means the IAD to use its old addresses CRAFT gt set iftable 1 4 13 adminstatus down CRAFT gt set iftable 1 4 13 adminstatus up When you perform a Get you will see this table CRAFT gt get cmcpeiad cpe 1 4 13 Group cmCpeIADTable Instance CPE 1 4 13 Index CPE 1 4 13 CurrentIpAddr 10 0 21 2 CurrentCAIpAddr 10 0 21 1 SavedIpAddr 1020 21 2 SavedCAIpAddr 10 0 21 1 NumVoicePorts 8 NumConnections 8 Command None TOSByte 0 LogAction None LogType ALL 0 LogLevel INFO 0 LogDuration 30 TotalMsgsLogged 0 TracelMask 0 Trace2Mask 0 IAD With New Saved IP Addresses in NVRAM Now on Subnet 10 0 21 0
48. 66 188 netmodel vwan encapsulationtype rfc1490 Chapter 3 Initial Configuration 57 In this example of an interface configured for VWAN configure and activate the Frame Relay virtual circuit as described on page 65 Note that full provisioning of a Frame Relay or ATM WAN link may require additional configuration depending on the type of digital facility used connected upstream equipment etc See the discussions in Chapter 4 and the information on MIB groups related to WAN link provisioning in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Verify the physical connection of the CE150 network interface Ethernet WAN or DSL and ensure that any third party equipment router CSU DSU etc is configured to communicate with the CE150 Configure the CE150 s default IP route In most cases the routes to connected networks that are followed by outgoing message packets are automatically defined by the IP addresses and subnet masks of the interfaces For any messages that do not have an assigned routing the default IP route specified as 0 0 0 0 establishes the next hop address This default route is mapped to its next hop through the port on the CE150 used for upstream packet based communication Typically this will be one of the WAN ports but could be the Ethernet port if that interface is used for network access For example CRAFT gt set iproute 0 0 0 0 nexthop 192 176 1 88 where 192 176
49. 76 BurnedInMacAddr 0 60 58 1 0 76 FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPii 1 2 1 43 CMCPCompatible Yes 102 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide EncapsulationType rfcl483 FwdMode IP Policy Pix 3 Service Class A In the example above class of service on port 24 on the board occupying the slot 5 has been set to A the highest class To change the class of service on any of the other ports use cml face and change the defaults one at a time Class of service only comes into play when the CPU on the CE150 becomes congested At that point packets from ports with higher classes of service have a greater chance of being processed and passed on to the WAN interface The higher the class of service and the greater the weight of the higher class the greater the chance of being processed Priority Queuing Preference for delay sensitive packets transmitted over the DSL port from the CE150 to the subscriber interface is provided through the Priority Queuing function This configuration group applies only to DSL VCs that are created on the CE150 using the Cross Connect netmodel All of the other netmodels HDIA IP VWAN and CopperVPN automatically give these kinds of packets priority in the downstream direction over DSL links But in the Cross Connect netmodel after you have set up the Permanent Virtual Circuits you have to use cmSublface to set each DSL VC for priority queuing High for real time packets such as
50. 76 PPP HDLC Forwarding Modes 20 00 00000 77 High Density Internet Access HDIA Netmodel 78 Configuring the CE150 for DHCP Functionality 79 Upstream DHCP Processing 0 200e eee tenes 81 IP Netmodel 0000 cee eens 81 The CE150 as a DHCP Server 0 000e eee 81 The CE150 as a DHCP Relay Agent 82 Pass Through Mode 2000 ce eee eee ees 83 Cross Connect HDIA VWAN and CopperVPN Netmodels 84 The CE150 as a DHCP Server 0 000e eee 84 The CE150 as a DHCP Forwarding Agent 85 Pass Through Mode 2200 cee eee eens 86 Downstream DHCP Processing 0 20eeeeaeeee 86 IP Netmodel 0 i padia nai bakni ees 86 Cross Connect and VWAN Netmodels aaua auauna aaaea 87 ADIA Netmodel ir iea ninta a aa ae E AA A 87 CopperVPN Netmodel 0 00 cee eee eee eee 87 OAM Fault Management for ATM WAN Links 5 88 Transmitting Receiving Fault Messages 2 0 88 Transmitting and Receiving Loopback Messages 89 Configuring the OAM Function 0 0000 eee eee eee 90 Configuring the OAM Loopback Function 085 91 Automatic Loopback Requests 00 0 e eee eee 91 Manual Loopback Requests 00 eee eee eae 92 Interface Filters ii aaa yeaa hacer due dere eae PAE E a Wes 93 IPSFiltennGsrs oe oe eed
51. ATM AA AA 03 IP packet pad AALS trailer variable FRF 5 Q 922 VC payload pad AALS trailer Optional lor2 variable Cisco Adrs Ctl PPP FR 03 PPP PID PPP information AALS trailer lor2 variable PPP 2364 ppp pip PPP information pad AALS trailer NULL lor2 variable ase re FE FE 03 CF PPP information pad JAAS trailer Appendix A Overview of Data Encapsulation 219 Netmodels Encapsulations and Translations It is important to distinguish between port encapsulations and VC encapsulations The following sections describe DSL port encapsulations DSL VC encapsulations WAN port encapsula tions and WAN VC encapsulations Known inconsistencies ap pear at the end DSL Port Encapsulations For DSL ports the port encapsulation defines whether the DSL port is a single logical interface or it supports multiple VCs En capsulations of HDLC or PPP HDLC are a single logical inter face and cannot support VCs All other encapsulations support multiple VCs on a DSL port DSL physical ports support the following encapsulations Note that in the cross connect Netmodel w Q 922 ATM or RFC1973 DSL VCs defined with cmSublIfaceTable entries as sume an encapsulation implied by the port encapsulation DSL Physical Port Encapsulations DSL Port EI Netmodels Implied DSL VC Encapsulation eee eich Encapsulation None cmSublface not None The interface is not yet a
52. Because the catalog of certified products is continually growing check with your Copper Mountain sales representative for an up to the minute list of compatible CPE products CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Hardware Features Specifications All specifications are subject to change without notice New modules are being added all the time In addition special re leases occur supplemental documentation describes those modules and their releases This documentation is later incor porated in the standard operating guides DSL Platform e Flexible modular design supports current and future DSL interfaces transmission and backbone network technolo gies e Seven slot chassis up to two DSL modules maximum of 48 physical ports in any combination of SDSL ADSL G dmt or G lite or T1 per CE150 shelf Physical Dimensions e Size 6 97 inches H x 19 inches W x 10 75 inches D 17 7 centimeters x 48 3 centimeters x 27 3 centimeters e Weight approximate with full circuit module complement 33 Ibs 14 85 kg e Rack mounting options EIA 19 inches 48 3 centimeters or 23 inches 58 4 centimeters e Wall mounting option Input Power One of the following options e AC Power module gt 120 VAC 5A 60 Hz A Blank Deflection Shield must be installed in slot 6 The AC Power Module must be installed in slot 7 e DC Power module 48VDC 8A A blank face panel must be installed in slot 6 or 7
53. CRAFT gt set frcircuit 1 2 1 101 throughput n1 committedburst n2 excessburst n3 Where n1 is the Throughput value in bits per second n2 is the size of the maximum committed burst in bits n3 is the size of the ExcessBurst credit in bits For more information about throughput management and the tools available to monitor congestion on your Frame Relay links see frCircuitTable in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Chapter 5 Routing Forwarding Managing Links 129 Configuring DS3 ATM The CE150 provides concentration of DSL links originating at the Customer Premises onto DS3 ATM trunks If you have con figured ATM for other types of equipment you will likely notice that the ATM MIB used here comprises only a small subset of the full MIB Since the CE150 is an ATM host and not a switch configuration is relatively simple In fact only the atmInterface ConfTable was extracted from the ATM MIB Two tables were also added to the proprietary cm MIB cmAtmVclTable and cmDS3Atm to support the CE150 s implementation of ATM The current release will support up to 976 ATM VCs and up to 16 Virtual Paths per DS3 ATM module The CE150 software supports RFC 1483 encapsulated bridge and IP traffic PPP over ATM and an implementation of FRF 8 and FRF 5 The DS3 ATM Module has the same loopback options LineLoop InwardLoop NoLoopback and performance param eters through the dsx3 MIB objects as the DS3 F
54. Copper Mountain s CopperRocket xDSL family of CPEs consists of a standard single pair telephone facility to which the DSL line is connected and to which the CPE itself connects with a standard 2 or 4 conductor RJ 11 RJ 14 ca ble A diagram is included on the next page for your reference If you are using a third party CPE manufactured by someone other than Copper Mountain Networks check the manufactur er s documentation for any special requirements Appendix E CPE Inside Wiring 265 Inside Wiring for xDSL CPE with Copper Mountain Networks COE Punch Down Block Customer Premises or Demarc Inside Wire 24 AWG or 26 AWG Standard wall plate with RJ 11 Jack Inside Wiring Specifications Pinouts Pin 1 Yellow Pin 2 Green Pin 3 Red Pin 4 Black Connect CPE using standard RJ 11 RJ 14 telephone cable included with the CPE Only Pins 2 and Pin 3 are used connection is straight through with no crossover Unit automatically adjusts for Tip and Ring on these pins Recommend inside wire 24 AWG or 26 AWG standard telephone wire CAT 3 and CAT 5 UTP can also be used 266 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Appendix F Glossary This glossary is provided as an aid to recognizing some of the specialized terms used in this manual that relate to the Copper Mountain DSL system the CE150 and the Copper View EMS Selected telephony and data communications terms commonly used in DSL
55. Events can be sent by any resource in the system They are logged in memory locally on the CE150 system and are also translated into SNMP Trap PDUs to be sent to external SNMP managers Here are the three groups of events on the Copper Edge e Alarms Events that indicate the occurrence of an alarm condition alarms will affect the status of the alarm panel in general an alarm will remain in effect until cleared either automatically or manually e Alarm Clearing Notifications Events that clear a particular alarm if one exists ifno corresponding alarm condition exists for such an event to clear it is treated as a normal notification e Event Notifications Events such as warnings and informational messages that neither trigger nor clear an alarm For a list of Alarms Alarm Clearing Notifications and Event No tifications that may occur on your CopperEdge system see Ap pendix C Event Contents Each event contains a set of data that is common to all events plus a set of data possibly empty that is specific to the partic ular event The common data is used to identify the type of event the resource reporting the event and the severity of the event The event specific data is included to provide more de tails about the particular event The common data contained in every event consists of the following objects from the cmTrapE ventTable SeqNum Type ObjectClass ClassId Severity and TimeTag Chapter 8
56. IDS jie tae ceuls ohm ted ved ee eeGleaw sa sends 96 Sorting in the Filter Table 2 0 00 cece eee 98 Access Request Packet Data 2 000 cece eee eee 105 Access Accept Packet Data 0 0 00 e eee eee 105 Comparison of Base Addresses and Ranges of Addresses 144 Comparison of IP Addresses and Net Masks in Binary Format 145 Multilink Bundle Error Messages 000 c eee eee eee 198 CPE Training Error MessageS 00 ccc eee ee eee 200 DSL Physical Port Encapsulations 0000000 eae 220 DSL VC22 Encapsulations 00 00 cece eee 221 WAN VC Encapsulations 00 0c cee eee eee 222 DSL Cross Connect Encapsulations 20000 eae 223 DSL Port VC Encapsulations 00 000 cee eee eee 223 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide xix Revision History Rev Rev Date Summary of Changes 01 February 2001 Limited Availability release 02 May 2001 General Availability release System Software and Applicability This document applies to CopperEdge 200 systems delivered under Hardware Software Release 4 0 Document Conventions The following conventions are used throughout this document this font Indicates user input such as configuration com mands This font Indicates output from the CopperCraft command line interface or other sources This font Emphasizes new terms or the names of other sec t
57. IP Policy Policy routing is a forwarding process that ignores the destina tion IP address in packets Instead packets are sent to the des tination PII specified by the configuration of the packet s source PII the DSL interface If no destPII is specified the link is Full IP routed Policy routing allows you to enhance security between DSL links since traffic arriving on one DSL link cannot be routed out to another DSL link nor to any other IP address no matter what its contents The one exception to the Policy Routing scheme occurs when a premise host sends a packet to the CE150 s IP address In that case the host is talking to the CE150 rather than through it The CE150 receives and processes the packet but it is not pol icy routed Such a setup allows a host on a LAN served by a CPE to ping the DSL interface 116 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide N O T E In the IP networking model packets from the WAN interface or any non DSL interface are always full IP routed i e the system sends the packet to a DSL link or elsewhere based on its destination IP address Only packets arriving on DSL links can be policy routed Chapter 5 Routing Forwarding Managing Links 117 Configuring Full IP DSL Links You configure DSL links for Full IP routing as described in the previous chapter In brief assign the DSL interface an IP ad dress optional subnet mask and leave the DestPii object set to ze
58. If the status is not already Up set it to Up CRAFT gt set cmiftable 1 2 1 adminstatus up Configure the ATM VC for AdminStatus using the object group cmAtmVcl If the status is not already Up set it to Up CRAFT gt set cmatmvcl 1 2 1 101 adminstatus up Configure the ATM WAN port for OAM AdminState using the object group cmAtmIfExt If the status is not already Enabled set it to Enabled CRAFT gt set cmatmifext 1 2 1 oamadminstate enabled Configure the ATM VCL for OAMAdminState using the object group cmAtmVcl If the state is not already Enabled set it to Enabled CRAFT gt set cmatmvcl 1 2 1 101 oamadminstate enabled Check your work in the cmAtmVcl group CRAFT gt get cmatmvcl 1 2 1 101 Group cmAtmVclTable Instance 1 2 1 101 PII 1 2 1 101 Vpi 2 Vei 11 AdminStatus Up OperStatus Up LastChange 12 day 1 hour 44 min 54 0 sec 2000 09 28 14 44 46 AalType Aald5 Aal5CpcsTransmitSduS 1600 Aal5CpcsReceiveSduSi 1600 RowStatus Active TransmitTrafficDescr 2 OAMState normal 0 OAMAdminState enabled OAMAutoLBState disabled OAMManualLBCmd none OAMManualLBCmdStatus none OAMLBInterval 17 OAMLBTimeOut 18 OAMTxAISCells 0 OAMRxXRDICells 0 OAMRxAISCells 0 OAMTxRDICells 0 OAMTxLBRequestCells 0 OAMRxLBResponseCells 0 OAMRxLBRequestCells 0 OAMTxLBResponseCells 0 OAMRxUnsupportedCell 0 OAMTxDiscards 0 OAMRxDiscards 0 With this configurati
59. OAMRxRDICells 0 OAMRxAISCells 0 OAMTxRDICells 0 OAMTxLBRequestCells 0 OAMRxLBResponseCells 0 OAMRxLBRequestCells 0 OAMTxLBResponseCells 0 OAMRxUnsupportedCell 0 OAMTxDiscards 0 OAMRxDiscards 0 2 Set the NetModel and the EncapsulationType for the WAN VC The NetModel must be Cross Connect The EncapsulationType must be None CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 130 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype none Perform a Get on the VC and you will see this table CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 2 1 130 Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 2 1 130 PII 1 2 1 130 IfIndex 1 221 130 Name we GroupName oun AdditionallInfo oun NetModel Cross Connect IpAddr 0 0 0 0 NetMask 0 0 0 0 MacAddr ff ff ff ff ff ff BurnedInMacAddr FE ft PEEL fe SEE FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPII 0 0 0 0 CMCPCompatible No EncapsulationType None FwdMode VC VC payload Pix 274 ServiceClass None Chapter 7 ADSL G lite and G dmt 163 3 Set the VC on the DSL port Use a PII such as 1 4 1 23 and specify a VPI and VCI They must match the ones on the CPE Typically they are O and 32 Documentation for CPEs will give defaults indicate if they can be changed and show when multiple VCs are possible The number of the VC must be in the range of 16 to 23 CRAFT gt set cmatmvcl 1 4 1 23 vpi 0 vci 32 adminstatus up Perform a Get on the VC and you will see this table CRAFT gt get cma
60. PURCHASED NO REPRESENTATION OR OTHER AFFIRMATION OF FACT WHETHER MADE BY COPPER MOUNTAIN OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE A WARRANTY FOR ANY PURPOSE OR GIVE RISE TO ANY LIABILITY OF COPPER MOUNTAIN The laws in some localities do no allow limitations on the warranty period so the above exclusions or limitations may not be applicable This warranty provides specific legal rights You may have oth er rights with respect to this product depending on local laws Software License Agreement Use of this Product is subject to the Software License Grant contained in the purchase agreement used to originally purchase this Product from Copper Mountain Except as expressly permitted by applicable law Customer or any third party to which the software may be licensed as permitted under the original purchase agreement may not alter modify adapt or translate create any derivative works based on the software reverse engineer decompile disas semble or otherwise attempt to derive the human readable source code for the software licensed with this Product k k k k Should you have questions regarding the above Product warranty or Software License Grant please contact Copper Mountain Networks Contracts Department at 858 410 7277 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide iii Batteries Safety Notices The CE150 is equipped with a lithium battery to maintain certain system parameters that you set in the installation and co
61. SCM DSLModuleEOC test lets you command any of the preced ing network elements into loopback mode By looping back from successive hops you should be able to isolate the link seg ment where the problem is occurring For details on configuring a CE150 for EOC loopback testing see the cmLoop MIB de scription in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCrajft Reference and MIB Definitions manual 192 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide DS1 Loopbacks For DS1 boards you must configure loopbacks through the dsx1Config group See the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Refer ence and MIB Definitions manual Five types of loopbacks are possible for DS1 boards inward loops near end payload loops near end line loops far end line loops and far end payload loops For the inward loop test the far end line loop test and the far end payload loop test the CopperEdge must generate test packets using a generator on its System Control Module For the near end line loop test and the near end payload loop test a remote device must generate the test packets and send them to the CopperEdge Far End Payload Loop Remote Device CopperEdge DSLAM Far End Line Loop Near End Line Loop InwardLoop System Control Module Near End Payload Loop DS1 Loopback Modes After setting the loopback tests for DS1 boards with the dsx1ConfigTable group of objects you are ready to send the test packets and then read the results of the tests us
62. SCMRestart In certain relatively rare cases a system failure could be ac companied or caused by an out of control buffers state If you have tried unsuccessfully to soft restart the Control Module as described above set cmboard 1 2 command restart and the system set cmsystem command restart there is one other alternative recovery procedure SCMRestart The SCMRestart command does not require any control buffers to be available To run this command enter CRAFT gt scmrestart Note that the entire word must be entered but it isn t case sen sitive You must have Provisioning or greater privileges to exe cute this command 210 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Removing or Replacing Modules This section describes the procedures for installing or replacing the System Control Module Buffer Module WAN modules DSL modules and Power Supply modules C A U T It ON All CE150 modules contain static sensitive devices If you must remove or handle modules for any reason observe standard ESD precautions such as using ground straps for personnel and equipment and storing removed modules in anti static bags If you are unsure of the necessary precautions contact Copper Mountain Technical Support for assistance System Control Module Replacement of a System Control WAN Module is service af fecting with consequent interruption of service for all subscrib ers served by this CE150 Except i
63. SDSL ADSL G dmt or G lite or T1 is service affecting to the ports served by that module Except in cases of emergency system down we rec ommend that you replace any modules during a scheduled maintenance period at off peak hours Unlike the other mod ules however you can reliably replace DSL line modules with out powering down the CE150 N O T E Before you remove a module that will not be replaced by another module of the same type change the netmodel to None for all VCs ports and IMUX bundles associated with that module To replace a DSL line module 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the module to be replaced 2 Lift the module extraction levers to gently separate the module from its connector inside the CE150 When the module is free remove it from the CE150 and transfer it to a suitable anti static container 3 Remove the new module from its anti static bag and insert it into the empty slot in the CE150 4 Gently but firmly seat the module into its connector inside the CE150 If the module does not readily mate to the connector do not force it back the module out and try again 5 When the module is seated in the connector ensure that the extraction levers are lying flat module inserted position and use your fingers to screw in the two retainer screws Finger tighten only do not over torque 6 After the new DSL module has been installed you must reconfigure
64. Second specify the LMI scheme if any VCs now can be specified and activated Initial Configuration Adding a PVC To create a Frame Relay link you must use two similarly named MIB groups frDlcmi from the Frame Relay MIB and cmFrDIcmi the Copper Mountain MIB Both groups configure links on the physical port and thus apply to all of the Frame Relay virtual circuits that you may subsequently assign to that port For example to enable a link on a WAN port with no LMI CRAFT gt set cmfrdlcmi 1 2 1 adminstate enable To provide a link with LMI use the State object in the standard frDlcmi group to specify the LMI formatting scheme Available options are ansiT1 617 D ansiT1 617 Annex D Imirev1 LMI Revision 1 Q 9 33 Annex A and noLmiConfigured For exam ple CRAFT gt set frdlcemi 1 2 1 state ansit1 617 d N O T E Always disable the link using cmfrdlcmi Admin dis before changing the LMI state or any other link attributes Modifying link attributes is service affecting When you enable LMI on a WAN port remember to configure your Frame Relay router as DCE LMI Once you have enabled a link as described above individual WAN PVCs can be configured Do this using the frCircuit group to specify and activate the circuit numbers For Frame Relay VCs you can use any DLCI from 16 to 991 To establish a VC DLCI 32 port 1 in the example CRAFT gt set frcircuit 1 2 1 32 state active Note that the index in this
65. Seed Ad ee Seed 184 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide xiii Appendix A Alarm Severity 0 0000 c cece eee eee 184 Alarm Clearing 0 2 2 0 ccc c eee eee 185 Example Alarms and Events 000 e eee eee eee 186 Elog Display seen eel en eel ea eis ghee 186 cmTrapEvent Display 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee 186 Save Configuration Failure 00000 c eee eee 188 Terminate an Operator Session 000c cece eee eens 189 DHGP Problems iiics netar i estes e E EE eG ee eee S 190 Loopbacks oyua saa eet Poe cane Gea padi taeed Ss Hand 191 EOC Loopbacks sisis arannira na ia eee eee 191 DSt LOOpPDACKS in antiandaledun fetadgen d vnedts mae Whee iad ele 193 DS3 LOOpDAaCKS arnet oh teeta aA e Stee eae ee ean eae G 194 Evaluating SDSL Loops 0 0000 c eee eee 195 Built in Performance Monitors 0 0 0 e eee eee 197 IMUX Configuration Issues 0000 eee 198 Problems Configuring Multilink Bundles 198 Problems during CPE Training 202000 ea eeee 200 Diagnose POM a scasieyou Pega A AE ronald aya vipa oa 201 DYSIOG ase ctee a Bias he a sate aa wheel dam Alsat eect a a hag Mec ata 202 Configuring the Syslog Server 00 0 cece e eee 202 Syslog Client Configuration 0 0 0 0 cee eee 203 CPE Message Log Table 00 0c cece e eee eee 204 Restart Options 0 0 00 cee eee 208 CPE Soft Restart
66. The DC Power Module must be installed in slot 6 or 7 Operating Environment e Temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C e Humidity 10 to 80 non condensing e Altitude to 10 000 feet Chapter 1 Introducing the CopperEdge 150 5 System Control Modules SCM 1 and SCM 2 gt gt UUU U u Intel Pentium processor P54C Up to 200 MHz internal clock 66 MHz front side bus FSB Up to 512 Kbytes of secondary cache L2 cache 32 Mbytes DRAM 66 MHz 8 MBytes of on board flash memory One 10Base T 100Base TX Ethernet port with an RJ 45 connector Two DB9 male serial ports Craft and Diagnostic with EIA TIA 232 Serial Interface connectors 33 600 Kbps analog modem with error correction and data compression support SCM 3 UULU U U Intel Pentium III processor EMC2 500 MHz internal clock 100 MHz front side bus FSB 256 Kbytes of secondary cache L2 cache 128 Mbytes DRAM 100 MHz 64 MBytes of on board flash memory through a Com pactFlash type 1 module Two 10Base T 100Base TX Ethernet ports with RJ 45 connectors the second port is not supported in this release Two 16C550 PC Compatible serial ports Craft and Diagnostic with RJ 45 connectors 33 600 Kbps analog modem with error correction and data compression support Pinhole reset switch For optimal system performance we recommend you use the Buffer Control Module 2 with the SCM 3 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide
67. The filter ID values for the CopperEdge Privilege attributes can be found on the previous page The Radius Reply Message attribute may be configured with a text string up to 128 characters to serve as an error message in case an attempted login is denied Access Reject This string accompanies the Access_Reject packet and is entered in the CopperEdge Event Log 106 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 3 The Radius Reply Message attribute may also contain a second 128 character maximun text string for use if you want the server to ask the user for additional information or to repeat the previous login attempt The CopperEdge Radius client will respond to one Access_Challenge by resending the same UserName and Password If the server does not accept it the login fails The string goes with the Access_Challenge packet It appears in the CopperEdge Event Log 4 Finally the Radius server must use the same shared secret AuthKey string when configuring the both Primary and Secondary SCM clients We recommend that you use the same AuthKey system wide but like a good password it should be short lived unpredictable and changed at irregular intervals Configuring CopperEdge for Radius Servers When the Radius server is configured and ready to communi cate and its database has been provisioned with the user data base the CopperEdge cmRadius MIB group can be configured 1 With cmRadius in its default state A
68. Troubleshooting 177 Resource Identification The resource that reported the event can be uniquely identified using two fields ObjectClass and ClassId Each resource in the system belongs to a specific object class such as Board or Port The specific resource within the class can be identified using the ClassID which is the PII of the resource The class identifies the type of resource reporting the event and the ClassID identifies the specific resource in that class For ex ample in a BoardDown event the ObjectClass might be Sys temControlModule and the ClassId would be 1 2 0 0 This event indicates the SCM in the second slot has gone down Object Classes The following object classes are used to represent all of the re sources in the CE150 system System Classes These classes apply to the system as a whole e System e Operator Shelf Classes These classes identify the different shelves in a system e Shelf e CE200Shelf e CE150Shelf Board Classes These classes identify the different boards that can be installed in a system e Board e SystemControlModule CopperBayModule e SDSL10xModule 1 e SDSL10xModule e SDSL30xModule e SDSL30xModule 24 e IDSLModule 24 e BufferControlModule e V 35 WAN e DS3FR WAN 178 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Port Classes DS3ATM WAN QuadT1 WAN G liteModule 24 T1Module 12 SystemControlModule3 ADSLMultiModeModule 24A These classes identify the diffe
69. WAN port with a voice gateway type ID and a voice gateway IP address The voice gateway IP address must be on the same subnet as the IAD IP addresses CRAFT gt set cminterfaceoptions 1 2 1 21 voicegatewaytypeid 4 voicegatewayipaddr 10 0 21 1 When you perform a Get on the VC to check your work you will see this table Do not try to set JitterSpeedTradeOff CRAFT gt get cminterfaceoptions 1 2 1 21 Group Instance PII VoiceGatewayType VoiceGatewaylIpAddr MaxVoiceChannels JitterSpeedTradeoff JitterControlStatus RowStatus VoiceGatewayTypeld I 21 21 cmInterfaceOptionsTable LT ZA 2 TollBridge 10 072151 259 None Uncontrolled Active 4 Chapter 6 Voice over DSL 149 7 Set the VC for data on the first DSL port 1 4 13 Do not specify a number for the VC The software uses the default of VC 528 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 13 netmodel hdia ipaddr 10 0 20 2 netmask 255 255 255 255 destpii 1 2 1 20 encapsulationtype rfc1483 The current netmask means only one host can be attached to the IAD To attach four hosts use a 255 255 255 252 netmask The following diagram shows addressing for data and voice VCs on the first DSL port 1 Host eo 8 60 Phones ee IAD HDIA Data Group 10 0 20 0 HDIA Voice Group 10 0 21 0 IP Addr 10 0 20 1 Default IP Addr 10 0 20 2 IP Addr 10 0 20 0 Router Net mask 32 J my Net mask 26 Pll 1 4 13 PII 1 2 1 20 VC 528 es I
70. alternatively from the VC to the DSL ports The IP netmodel should work without a default IP route however since the CE150 acts as a router for the traffic going between the DSL ports VCs and the WAN ports VCs CRAFT gt set iproute 0 0 0 0 nexthop 192 168 20 1 type direct Perform a Get and look at the table CRAFT gt get iproute 0 0 0 0 Group ipRouteTable Instance 0 0 0 0 ae HOST 1 HOST 2 10 10 1 3 Dest 0 0 0 0 IfIndex Le 2oke 80 Metricl 1 Metric2 1 Metric3 1 Metric4 1 NextHop 192 168 20 2 Type Direct Proto netmgmt Age 755624 Mask 0 0 0 0 Metric5 1 Info 0 0 10 10 11 do SORE a gt 192 168 20 2 N i p Full men ROULE CPE Telco Bridge Router z VPI 0 VPI 1 VCl 32 VCl 32 IP Netmodel Default Route Chapter 7 ADSL G lite and G dmt 169 170 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Chapter 8 Troubleshooting This chapter describes features of the CE150 that can aid in evaluating system performance and in diagnosing and recover ing from trouble Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 171 CE150 Diagnostic Features The CE150 includes features to help you to diagnose problems in case something should go wrong Should a malfunction oc cur these features can help you to pinpoint the device causing the problem and indicate possible avenues for recovery Diagnostic features include e Visual indicators front panel LEDs e T
71. and the red Near End and yellow Far End LEDs are off If there is a local failure such as loss of signal or frame errors at the CE150 or within the DS3 module the NEAR END LED turns red to indicate the failure If a failure occurs on the link or with upstream equipment or when diagnostic testing is in progress the FAR END LED turns yellow When a software download is in progress the FAR END LED blinks Quad T1 Frame WAN Module Indicators The DS1 WAN module has four LED indicators that indicate the condition of the T1 line or the type of traffic on the T1 line in cluding alarm signals and normal operating signals T1 1 T1 2 T1 3 T1 4 QT1 FRAME 0000 OOOO an MODULE DS1 WAN Module LEDs The LEDs are to the left of the connectors in the same order as the connectors for example the left LED is for port T1 1 and the right LED is for port T1 4 Each LED has three colors that indicate different states e Green Normal operation The line has been synchronized with the network and shows no local or far end alarms Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 175 e Yellow A far end failure condition on the link or with upstream equipment The LED stays yellow until the condition is cleared e Red A near end failure condition such as a loss of signal or frame errors at the CE150 or within the Quad T1 Frame Module itself The LED stays red until the condition is cleared SDSL and ADSL G dmt or G lite
72. case includes the complete PII entry that is the interface location 1 3 1 and the PVC number 32 126 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide To disable PVC 32 on port 1 CRAFT gt set freircuit 1 2 1 32 state inactive To delete PVC 32 CRAFT gt set frceircuit 1 2 1 32 state invalid N O T E Before a PVC can be deleted its link must be disabled through cmFrDicmi An active circuit on an enabled link cannot be deleted Configure the Frame Relay DCE to Connect with the CE150 The CE150 behaves as a Frame Relay UNI DTE User Network Interface Data Terminal Equipment Therefore the CE150 must connect to a Frame Relay UNI DCE Data Communica tions Equipment interface such as a Frame Relay switch The DCE provides clocking for the CE150 WAN interface Throughput Management For any Frame Relay link PVC only a finite amount of data can be accommodated between any two points in time If the network becomes congested connected devices at one or both ends of a PVC are automatically notified by the network that the volume of transmitted data will be temporarily retarded until the congestion is alleviated To ensure a continuous and orderly flow of data even during these periods of congestion Frame Re lay relies on the concept of a Committed Information Rate CIR The CE150 supports three configurable command objects relat ed to Committed Information Rate all through the frCircuit group used to con
73. cmmaintcmd configbackup username anonymous CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configbackup recurrence 168 CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configbackup start 99 04 01 03 20 CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configbackup rowstatus active In the above example the CE150 has both primary and second ary file servers for its FTP transaction which is set to recur weekly recurrence 168 hours at 0320 hours 3 20 a m If you set the recurrence at O and the start time at O or any time in the past the command will run immediately upon activation of the row In arecurring configuration backup you would specify the time of the first occurrence and an interval for subsequent file up loads When configured the CE150 will send the current con figuration saved in its flash A recurring backup will only be attempted if this is the first attempt since powerup or if the con fig file saved in flash has changed since the previous backup If a fresh backup is needed the CE150 attempts to transfer the config to the primary file server If the transfer succeeds the CE150 logs an informational event and sends an SNMP trap If the transfer to the primary fails the CE150 will also log and trap the event and will then attempt to save the config to the secondary server If the transfer to the secondary server fails the CE150 will log the event as a minor alarm and send the ap plicable trap For more information about the maintenance commands see the de
74. default the system name and the PII of the port or VC CRAFT gt set cmdhcp 1 4 1 0 function dhcpforward serveripaddr 204 20 20 30 Set Successful CRAFT gt get cmdhcp 1 4 1 0 Group Instance PII RowStatus IpAddress NetMask DefaultRoute DNSServer Function ServerIPAddr CircuitID The CE150 performs the following functions when it receives a cmDHCPTable 1 4 1 0 DHCP request l For a CMCP CPE the CE150 modifies the DHCP request by inserting the CircuitID from the cmDHCPtTable into the Relay Agent Information and Client Identifier fields in the DHCP request message For a non CMCP CPE or a host on the premise LAN the CE150 modifies the DHCP request by inserting the CircuitID only into the Relay Agent Information field Lata Active LOL 243 255 255 255 255 204 20 20 10 204 20 20 30 DHCPForward 0 0 0 0 CMTN 1 4 1 0 Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 2 The CE150 forwards the request to the upstream WAN VC or router which is responsible for responding to or relaying the request to the upstream DHCP server Netmodel Cross Connect VWAN HDIA or CopperVPN ACPE CMCP or non CMCP The CE forwards the DHCP The router sends the DHCP request or premise LAN Host sends a request to an upstream router to an upstream DHCP Server DHCP request SS a N r pe ke i i RE PN SpE Link to DSL pil 4 CopperEdge Upstream Pa re DHCP qe gt 1 4 1 0 jp DSLAM 7 Router Serv
75. exceed the commitment it necessarily is at greater risk of causing or encountering congestion on the link Frames that fall within the BE range are automatically marked with the discard eligible DE bit which means that if the network becomes congested the frame will simply be dropped Data with in the commitment time interval that exceed the value of BE will be discarded regardless of whether the link is congested or not The following illustration adopted from the CCITT standard on congestion management shows the relationship between the three variables within the commitment interval T Per CCITT 1 370 y Access facility Rate 4 f WU Bcmax be d f d 4 Data Volume be Bits bcmax P 1stF rame 2nd Frame 3rd Frame 4th Frame 5th Frame 6th Frame Committed Committed Committed Discard Discard Discarded Eligible Eligible Time gt T Throughput Management Variables CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide A definition for the commitment interval has been established by CCITT and adopted by ANSI The actual value will depend on the settings of CIR bcMax and be For details on calculating T refer to the Throughput object in the frCircuitTable in the Cop perEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Note that while the values of bcMax and BE remain constant over time the values of CIR and Access Rate appear as slopes
76. failures resulting from misuse negligence accident improper storage installation or testing unusual electrical stress fire lightning other environmental haz ards unauthorized attempts at repair operation inconsistent with published electrical and envi ronmental specifications or if the Product was maintained in a manner other than described in this document or if the serial number or other identifications markings have been altered removed or rendered illegible Expendable components such as batteries or cabling external to the unit are not covered by this warranty For specific terms and conditions of the product warranty and Copper Mountain s obligations there to please refer to the warranty section of your purchase agreement In order to exercise your rights to repairs under this warranty you must first contact Copper Moun tain at 888 267 7374 for calls made from U S locations only or 858 410 7100 for all calls made from outside the U S to obtain authorization including tracking number and instructions for re turn of the product s EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN AND IN THE APPLICABLE PUR CHASE AGREEMENT COPPER MOUNTAIN MAKES NO WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS IM PLIED OR STATUTORY AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL SUCH WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS
77. for the ipRoute group in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Save the interface configuration to the CE150 s flash memory CRAFT gt set cmsystem command save Verify that the configuration information has been saved CRAFT gt get cmsystem configsynch Group cmSystem ConfigSynch Saved The CE150 responds with the cmSystem configuration The CommandStatus object should display Succeeded If Command Status shows InProgress repeat the get emsystem command if Command Status shows Failed contact Technical Application Support Chapter 3 Initial Configuration 59 60 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration This chapter describes procedures for establishing DSL and network interfaces and performing other configuration tasks Important tasks include e Establishing subscriber DSL links that is configuring the Interface Table entries for each of the CE150 s connected DSL ports e Configuring the upstream WAN side links and setting up any additional parameters as needed for your specific operation The term DSL module is generally used throughout this chapter to mean any supported DSL module SDSL ADSL G lite or G dmt or T1 If there is a difference in the way one or the other types of DSL modules behave or what they require it will be ex plicitly specified Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 61 Configuring DSL Links fo
78. from top to bottom If the ports are on Quad T1 boards their numbers are 1 to 4 from top to bottom Slot 3 always should have a Sys tem Control Module in it slot 1 always should have a Buffer Control Module in it The CE150 system will not function with out a System Control Module in slot 2 and a Buffer Module in slot 31 The PII system of identifying the interfaces on a CE150 works in this way e APII such as 1 3 1 identifies the CE150 in chassis 1 the System Control module in slot 3 and port 1 the Ethernet port e A PII such as 1 2 1 24 identifies the CE150 chassis 1 the WAN module in slot 2 port 1 and virtual circuit 24 it could be either Frame Relay ATM or Quad T1 Chapter 3 Initial Configuration 47 e A PII such as 1 4 24 identifies the CE150 chassis 1 the DSL module in slot 4 and port 24 it could be SDSL ADSL or T1 If you are using an SNMP manager to configure the CE150 you can use a slightly different PII format In such a case you probably will enter the identifier without periods to separate the segments and you probably will fill parts of the fields with leading zeros For example a PII of 1 2 1 24 entered at the CopperCraft CLI will be come a PII of 102010024 entered in an SNMP manager SNMP Command Structure Command strings for SNMP object groups must have certain el ements in them which must appear in a certain order If ele ments are missing or if they are out of order the CE150 wil
79. hosts HDSL High rate Digital Subscriber Line Orig inally referred to DSL links at T1 1 544 Mbps and E1 2 048 Mbps rates This use of the term is becoming less common however as DSL rates have generally increased host A processor computer that provides services such as database access or computa tion to other devices In commands used to configure a CE150 host may refer to an exter nal file server or work station or to the CE150 itself depending upon the operational organi zation of the site IAD Integrated Access Device A special type of CPE that provides dual circuits accommo dating digitized on one circuit and regular data on the other On the upstream side both cir cuits communicate with a CE150 over an SDSL line On the downstream for voice POTS lines interface with the IAD for data an Ether net line interfaces with the IAD IDSL DSL service in which the data rates are those used in ISDN services 64 128 or 144 Kbps IDSL services typically allow longer loops between the CPE and COE and may allow use of existing ISDN CPE in the DSL sys tem IMUX An acronym for Inverse Multiplexing a technique by which data from a single source is separated into multiple streams for trans mission over multiple physical links effectively multiplying the throughput available to an individual subscriber interface A point of demarcation may be physical or logical between two devices where the electrical sign
80. may cause the CE150 to reset 30 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Analog Modem Port Connect the telephone cord with RJ 11 connectors on each end between the telephone outlet and the modem port on the CE150 Note the four LEDs adjacent to the modem port The pair on top are green when the modem is training The pair on the bottom are green when the modem is receiving and trans mitting The Craft and Modem ports share the same circuitry and can not be operated simultaneously The Craft port takes prece dence if the two are in operation at the same time the Craft port will function and the Modem port will not The modem is set to automatically answer on the second ring However it will take longer to answer when it is trying to recon nect after a disconnection it cannot answer on the second ring because it is still busy disconnecting from the previous session Chapter 2 Installation 31 System Control Module 3 The System Control Module 3 differs from the System Control Module 1 and System Control Module 2 in that it has a second Ethernet port Also the Diagnostic and Craft ports are RJ 45 not DB9 connectors Link Integrity Status LED Transmit Receive Data LED Pinhole Reset Switch Status LEDs RECEIVE TRANSMIT NET 1 NET 2 DIAG _ CRAFT MODEM Sa osso MopuLE DS3 FRAME ONON SES BE eve ct a MON HON NEAR END Conner OOO STATUS peng
81. messages to be logged by changing the link s administrative state to Down and then back to Up This forces a resend of the DHCP request causing messages to be logged CRAFT gt set iftable 1 5 2 admin down Set Successful CRAFT gt set iftable 1 5 2 admin up Set Successful 9 Check the IAD table and note that the TotalMsgsLogged object has changed from 0 to 5 CRAFT gt geta cmcpeiad Index CurrentIpAddr SavedCAIpAddr NumVoicePorts TOSByte LogAction LogDuration TotalMsgsLogged Instance CPE 1 13 2 CPE 1 13 2 1051 0 1 5 aE o pria K s Ee E 1 8 10 StartDebug 30 5 To see more details CurrentCAIpAddr SavedIpAddr NumConnections Command LogType LogLevel TracelMask Trace2Mask 10 10 1 1 1O 1 05 E 16 None 4 0 14 2 3 0 0 CRAFT gt get cmcpeiad cpe 1 5 2 Group Instance Index CurrentIpAddr CurrentCAIpAddr SavedIpAddr SavedCAIpAddr NumVoicePorts NumConnections Command TOSByte LogAction LogType LogLevel cmCpeIADTable LogDuration TotalMsgsLogged TracelMask Trace2Mask CPE PT 5 2 ja fo PRRERM FUR UN 16 None 10 StartDebug DHCP 4 INFO 0 HRROR 1 DETATL 2 OTHER 3 30 5 0 0 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 205 10 Index MsgNbr MsgType TimeStamp Display the message entries in the log table CRAFT gt geta cmcpelog Message Instance CPE 1 13 2 1 CPE Sending DHCP reques Instance CPE 1 13 2 2 2 CPE Got Instance CPE 1
82. mode events are displayed on the screen as they occur You can also capture the information by logging your Telnet session and saving it for later analysis To exit the elog function press Esc CRAFT gt elog 2000 12 03 09 36 32 LoginFail cmActiveSessionTable IpAddress 10 254 8 202 cmTrapEventTable Text admin FTP cmTrapEventTable Type LoginFailed cmTrapEventTable ObjectClass Operator cmTrapEventTable ClassId 1 2 0 0 cmTrapEventTable SeqNum 67 cmTrapEventTable TimeTag 2000 12 03 09 36 32 cmTrapEventTable Severity Information 2000 12 03 09 37 42 LoginSucceed cmActiveSessionTable IpAddress 10 64 20 190 cmTrapEventTable Text ce200 Telnet cmTrapEventTable Type LoginSucceeded cmTrapEventTable ObjectClass Operator cmTrapEventTable ClassId 1 2 0 0 cmTrapEventTable SeqNum 68 180 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide cmTrapEventTable cmTrapEventTable TimeTag Severity 2000 12 03 09737742 Information Event log information can also be viewed through the cmTrapE vent group described in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Ref erence and MIB Definitions manual CRAFT gt geta cmtrapevent SeqNum ProbableCause Instance 65 65 Type Severity LoginFailed ObjectClass TimeTag Operator ClassId Text 2 0 0 0 254 8 202 0 Information 2000 12 03 05 36 28 admin Instance 66 66 LoginFailed Operator 2 0 0 0 Information 20
83. not sup port virtual circuits it must still be configured in order to function properly in the VWAN networking model If the CE150 Ethernet port has not yet been configured explic itly assign its networking model and encapsulation type If the Ethernet port will be used for system management you will also need to specify its IP address and mask For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 3 1 ipaddr 192 168 1 1 netmask 255 255 255 253 netmodel vwan encapsulationtype none Set Successful CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 3 1 The response will display all objects in the cmlface group for the specified instance the Ethernet interface Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 3 1 0 PIT Se eee IfIndex aT LAAG Name EthernetPort GroupName Garfield AdditionallInfo Brighton AP Office NetModel VWAN TpAddr 192 168 1 1 NetMask 2557255125540 MacAddr 0 80 96 54 CE l BurnedInMacAddr Ot a6 4 54 clase FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPii 0 0 0 0 CMCPCompatible No EncapsulationType None FwdMode VWAN bridge Pix 1 ServiceClass D VWAN over Ethernet functions as a nailed up point to point link to a single router and there can be no other device on the LAN Note that the Ethernet port when configured for VWAN operates in promiscuous mode Thus you cannot specify an IP address for the router Rather the CE150 learns the MAC ad dress of the router from the received packet stream Note also that the forwarding mode
84. of DSL and WAN in terfaces using different netmodels along with the setup and configuration of CPEs in router or in bridge mode The procedures include setting up virtual circuits on both the WAN and DSL interfaces of the CE150 with VPIs and VCIs They do not include setting up virtual circuits on Telco routers on the WAN side of the network or on CPE routers on the DSL side of the network Chapter 7 ADSL G lite and G dmt 157 Overview of G dmt and G lite Both the G dmt and G lite modules have 24 ports For G lite on the downstream each of the 24 ports supports multiples of 32 Kbps all the way from 64 Kbps to 2 336 Mbps On the up stream each of the ports supports multiples of 32 Kbps from 32 Kbps to 512 Kbps For G dmt on the downstream each of the 24 ports supports multiples of 32 Kbps all the way from 32 Kbps to 6 144 Mbps On the upstream each of the ports supports multiples of 32 Kbps from 32 Kbps to 640 Kbps Configuration of the ports can be done either by the Copper View EM or by the CopperCraft command line interface Using the cmAdsIModem group you can set parameters for upstream and downstream signal to noise margins and upstream and downstream receive and transmit rates CPEs Supporting G dmt and G lite Both the G dmt and G lite modules are compatible with a vari ety of CPEs including models from Alcatel Lucent Motorola 3Com Intel Cisco FlowPoint Cayman Efficient and Westell The G dmt and G lit
85. of eight addresses must be assigned to base numbers on the subnet divisible by eight The following chart lists all of the base addresses on the subnet for each of the different ranges Comparison of Base Addresses and Ranges of Addresses Number of BEUC 23 List of Base Addresses all integers and 0 128 all even integers and 0 64 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 96 100 104 108 112 116 120 124 128 132 136 140 144 148 152 156 160 164 168 172 176 180 184 188 192 196 200 204 208 212 216 220 224 228 232 236 240 244 248 252 32 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160 168 176 184 192 200 208 216 224 232 240 248 16 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 8 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 4 0 64 128 192 144 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide The numbers in the chart also can be generated by applying the following rule an IP address cannot have any ones where the subnet mask has zeros For example the address 10 0 21 6 cannot be assigned a subnet mask of 255 255 255 252 or 30 because the number 6 in binary format is 0000 0110 and the number 252 in binary format is 1111 1100 The following table compares the numbers 1 32 in binary for mat with six different net masks in binary format It shows what ranges can be as
86. of the DS1 line Port name Port PII Group name Cleared by DS1LineStatusClear Trap dsx1LineStatusChange DS3LineStatusAlarm Major Sent by a DS3 module when a line status changes to an error status Information included in the event Value of the DS3 line status Time at the last line status change IF index of the DS3 line Port name Port PII Group name Cleared by DS3LineStatusClear Trap dsx3LineStatusChange EndPointConflictAlarm Minor Sent by System Control Module if there is a bundle configure conflict the end points of the IMUX bundles are improperly configured or connected Information included in the event PII of port that just trained EndPoint ID reported by port Logical IMUX PII Status string Cleared by Manually Trap cmEndPointConflictAlarm FanFault Major Sent by the System Control Module when a Fan fault is detected Information included in the event None Cleared by FanFaultClear Trap cmFanFailure Appendix C Event and Alarm Reference 239 Type IDSLTimingLossAlarm Severity Major Description Sent by an IDSL line module when the network timing is lost Information included in the event Board PII Configured timing mode Cleared by IDSLTimingLossClear Trap cmIDSLBoardTimingLoss LinkDown Minor Sent by the System Control Module when a DSL link Frame Relay link or ATM link transitions to disabled from the enabled state Infor
87. operational events The mere presence of data in the Syslog should not be construed as indicative of trouble with the system and should not trigger a service call Configuring the Syslog Server To implement Syslog capability on your system you must first identify and configure a suitable UNIX machine as your Syslog file server If you need more information on how to do this con sult the on line UNIX manual e man syslog Provides an overall description of the function and lists the available options and modifiers e man syslogd Describes the syslog daemon and lists its available options e man syslog conf Provides server configuration details When your Syslog server is operating and accessible to the net work client machines can be configured as described in the subsequent section 202 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Once you have begun collecting information in the Syslog man aging the records becomes a significant consideration By de fault most UNIX machines will purge or truncate log files at preset intervals It is important that your server s flushing in terval be set at a large enough value to allow a meaningful body of data to be gathered We recommend at least one week Syslog Client Configuration Four objects in the cmFile MIB group SysLogAddr SysLogPort SysLogFacility and SysLogPriority control the Syslog capabili ty on the CopperEdge unit When configuring the Copper
88. or other link related hardware Statistics related to SDSL loops and statistics related to LAN and WAN links are collected as part of the routine operation of the system You can configure the threshold points at which the various indicators trigger an alert As part of a regular program of system maintenance these statistics can help to provide early warning of link related problems Statistics on system performance can also be collected for se lected time intervals using the Bulk Statistics feature of the cm MaintCmd group described in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 197 IMUX Configuration Issues For setting up IMUX bundles and placing ports in bundles the CE150 offers a number of features to help identify and isolate configuration and or wiring errors Two types of warnings may be received e Error messages These messages provide an immediate indication that some configuration rule has been violated For example if an operator using cmBundle tries to assign a port that has already been configured with a netmodel or a filter to a bundle e TrapEvent and TrapAlarm Tables These tables indicate an improper step in a procedure For example an alarm occurs when a CPE that is not IMUX capable trains on a bundled DSL port such that the CE150 cannot change its status to Active ready to receive and transmit data Problems Configuring Multilink Bundles
89. or sent as a unicast packet based on the DHCP broadcast flag 86 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Cross Connect and VWAN Netmodels The downstream DHCP responses are simply forwarded to the appropriate DSL PIIs based on the provisioning configured in the CE150 No additional processing is required HDIA Netmodel If the received DHCP response is a broadcast IP packet this packet is sent to the DSL PII within whose range the assigned client IP address in the DHCP response message falls The re sponse is sent as a broadcast IP message and the DHCP client identifies its response based on the MAC Address in the DHCP response which was previously sent in the DHCP request If the received DHCP response is an IP unicast packet the CE150 sends this packet to the DSL PII within whose range the assigned client IP address in the DHCP response falls The re sponse is sent as a unicast packet and uses the MAC Address in the DHCP response as the unicast MAC address Therefore only the correct DHCP client will be able to receive the re sponse CopperVPN Netmodel If the received DHCP response is a broadcast IP packet it is flooded to all members of the CopperVPN group as a broadcast and the DHCP client identifies its response based on the MAC Address in the DHCP response If the received DHCP response is an IP unicast packet the CE150 replicates this packet to all DSL PIIs in the CopperVPN group as a unicast packet
90. over cable with RJ 45 connectors at both ends between the COM port on the server and the Craft port on the CE150 If you are using a local terminal or computer attach a Category 5 STP cable with RJ 45 connectors at both ends between the COM port on the local terminal or computer and the Craft port on the CE150 Refer to the following table for the pinouts Chapter 2 Installation 33 Cable Pinouts for the Craft and Diagnostic Ports B X Signal RJ 45 Connector Connector 1 Data Carrier Detect in from DCE Not used 2 Receive Data RXD 6 3 Transmit Data TXD 3 4 Data Terminal Ready DTR 2 5 Ground 4and 5 6 Data Set Ready DSR 7 7 Ready or Request to Send RTS 1 8 Clear to Send CTS 8 9 Ring Indicator Not used The Diagnostic port is intended to facilitate factory processes If there is a problem with your system however your Copper Mountain Technical Support engineer may ask you to connect the Diagnostic port to the serial port of a local computer to aid in troubleshooting N O T E We recommend that you do not connect the Diagnostic port except as directed by Technical Support If you restart a computer with one of its serial ports connected to the Diagnostic port the CE may reset Analog Modem Port Using a standard telephone cord RJ11 connectors connect the modem port on the CE150 System Control Module to a dial up phone line The port uses 8 data bits 1 stop bit a
91. over the Ethernet port you may have performance degradation on one link or all of the links Also restriction to a single virtual bridge group in VWAN over Ethernet may present a security problem on your network Any DSL link can also be policy routed to a specific host on an Ethernet LAN through the CE150 Network Ethernet port as follows First if the CE150 Ethernet port has not yet been configured assign its IP addres Second set its networking model and en capsulation type parameters For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 3 1 ipaddr 192 168 1 1 netmask 255 255 255 0 netmodel ip encapsulationtype none Set Successful CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 3 1 The response will display all objects in the cmIface group for the specific instance the Ethernet interface Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 3 1 PII S E IfIndex A EAS Name EthernetPort AdditionallInfo System Master NetModel IP TpAddr 192 168 1 1 NetMask 2 1255 25 5 5 255 0 MacAddr W805 56 354 r daso BurnedInMacAddr O80 s0654 clese7 FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPii 0 0 0 0 CMCPCompatible No EncapsulationType None FwdMode EULATE Pix 1 As shown the CE150 Ethernet port is configured as full IP To configure the DSL port for policy routing configure its IP ad dress and netmask destination PII the System Control Module Ethernet port 1 2 1 and far end address the IP address of the Ethernet host machine For example CRAFT gt set cm
92. priority to traffic on VC 22 over traffic on other VCs on the same DSL port Chapter 6 Voice over DSL 143 Planning Multiple Hosts on HDIA Hosts IP Addresses per Range 32 1 Host 31 2 Hosts 30 4 Hosts 29 8 Hosts 28 16 Hosts 27 32 Hosts 26 64 Hosts in the Subnet for the Ranges Although the HDIA network model allows you to place multiple hosts on a data VC and assign them at different points through out the subnet theoretically you have 256 options since the numbers O and 255 are not reserved you cannot choose any number at random Restrictions exist First all consecutive addresses on a single port or IAD must be long to a range that is a power of 2 The smallest range is 1 ad dress The next larger can have two addresses for two hosts the next larger can have four etc A customer wanting three con secutive addresses for hosts must be assigned a range of four addresses One will go unused A customer wanting five ad dresses must be assigned a range of eight addresses Three will go unused Different ranges of course can exist on the same subnet Second different ranges 2 4 8 16 etc must be assigned to certain base numbers on the subnet For example a range of two addresses must be assigned to even base numbers on the subnet that is only numbers divisible by two A range of four addresses must be assigned to base numbers on the subnet di visible by four and a range
93. rfcl1483 FwdMode VWAN Point to Point Pix 72 Service Class D 3 The MAC address listed for the DSL port in VWAN mode is actually the address of the connected router at the far end of the WAN link The CE150 still displays the Mac Address of the CPE however as the BurnedInMacAdadr object 4 Enable the WAN interface for Frame Relay CRAFT gt set cmfrdlcmi 1 2 1 adminstate enabled Set Successful CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 5 The example here is a simplified one that does not specify LMI To provide a link with LMI use the State object in the standard frDlcmi group to specify the LMI formatting scheme For more information on Frame Relay configuration including LMI see Chapter 6 6 Activate the virtual circuit CRAFT gt set freircuit 1 2 1 27 state active Set Successful 7 Repeat step 1 for each port to be included in the Virtual Bridge group 8 Optional Configure the Virtual Bridge to block broadcast packets such as IPX to the wide area network CRAFT gt set cmvbridge 1 2 1 27 option ip special Set Successful 9 For more about cmVbridge see the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual 10 When you have completed the initial configuration of the CE150 and its interfaces save the configuration data CRAFT gt set cmsystem command save 11 The file is saved on the appropriate volume P as ce200 system config tgz or config txt For more i
94. routers called Integrated Router Bridge or IRB Routers without this capability may not be suitable for use in VWAN applications The VWAN netmodel allows you to link a single DSL line to a single virtual bridge WAN VC or Ethernet in point to point mode or aggregate many DSL links into a single virtual bridge provided they all have the same DestPII that is provided they are served by a common circuit WAN VC or Ethernet on a com mon WAN or Ethernet interface linked to a common bridge group on a distant IRB router Each CE150 can support as many virtual bridge groups as it can virtual circuits each connecting to a different far end terminal point Each bridge group in such a case must be associated with one DLCI or ATM Virtual Link number or with the Ethernet port Portland Atlanta Division Headquarters Remote Site LAN Corr ioon Wiring Closet WAN Corporate Headquarters IRB Capable Router mel DSL Link 4 Frame Relay PVC_ f Bridge Public es COrPnRRIoIOn Router Function Group 1 Network a DSL Link n E Sub zj E Interface CE150 PVC Bridge Virtual Interface Corporate LAN VWAN Network Model Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 65 When many DSL links comprise a virtual bridge group the cml face FwdMode object is VWAN BRIDGED When only
95. single CopperEdge chassis The PII format is completely described elsewhere but briefly a PII is a sequence of one to four decimal numbers separated by periods The four numbers are the chassis slot port and cir cuit ID of the interface For example 1 3 1 99 is the PII for chassis 1 slot 3 port 1 virtual circuit ID 99 While a PII some times resembles an IP address PIIs are totally different and should not be confused with IP addresses CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide cmlface Objects Each cmlface entry contains several objects Three of the ob jects Name GroupName and AdditionalInfo are configurable identification for operator convenience You can assign arbi trary strings to the interface Name and AdditionalInfo objects Also you can create interface groups and optionally assign each interface to a single group These objects have no effect on how the CE150 processes user data They are for customized interface identification only All other cmlIface objects configure or display various aspects of how the CE150 processes and forwards user data Not all ob jects are meaningful in all contexts A typical cmIface entry for a DSL port might look similar to this example CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 4 1 Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 4 1 0 PII 1 4 1 0 IfIndex 1 4 1 0 Name we GroupName Sonn AdditionallInfo u NetModel Cross Connect IpAddr 0 0 0 0 NetMask 0 0 0 0 MacAddr SP st
96. the CE150 that manages the transfer of data between the proprietary interface to the DSL Modules and between the PC interface and the System Control Module C CCV C bit Coding Violation Error for C bit Parity and SYNTRAN DS3 applications CE CopperEdge The generic term that refers to all of the Copper Mountain DSLAM class of equipment See also DSLAM Appendix F Glossary 267 CE150 CE200 CopperEdge 150 and Copper Edge 200 are high density multi speed DSL systems fast packet access concentrators which allow network service providers to offer high speed local access to the Internet and to private enterprise networks CES C bit Errored Seconds A second with one or more CCVs one or more Out of Frame defects or a detected incoming AIS Clear An event CE generated or manual that causes alarm indications visual and audible to disappear See also Event CLI Craft Command Line Interface See Copper CMCP Copper Mountain Compatible Protocol COE Central Office Equipment Communica tions apparatus that normally resides in a telco central office or with a Network Service Pro vider The CopperEdge 200 is one type of COE cold boot The process of restarting a com puter system as if it were powered off then back on Also called cold start complex Consists of a System Control Mod ule SCM a Buffer Control Module BCM and optionally one or two WAN modules See also Primary complex and Secondary
97. 0 will reboot and reload its entire code base Re start is service affecting with consequent temporary interrup tion of service for all subscribers connected to this CE150 Except in cases of emergency restarts should only be attempt ed during scheduled maintenance periods at off peak times To restart the system using any of the available control inter faces CRAFT gt set cmsystem command restart To restart the system if you have Security or System privileges CRAFT gt scmrestart Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 109 Configuring Backup Even with a modest number of connected subscribers the saved file containing the CE150 configuration data can be ex tensive Copper Mountain recommends that you periodically back up the file to a remote machine for reference such as when the System Control Module is replaced or emergency use With an on line file server available to act as receiver the CE150 Version 2 0 and later can be commanded to back up its current saved configuration on demand or it can be con figured to automatically send a Config file backup at specified recurring intervals Using the cnMaintCmd table and its Con figBackup command you can specify the exact time to perform the backup and how often if ever you wish it to recur N O T E If you back up or otherwise gain access to a config tgz or config txt file you can view the file with a text editor but do not try to edit it with any offline
98. 00 12 03 07 36 30 10 254 8 202 admin Instance 67 67 LoginFailed Operator 2 0 0 0 Information 2000 12 03 09 36 32 10 254 8 202 admin Instance 68 68 LoginSucceeded Operator 2 0 0 0 Information 2000 12 03 09 37 42 10 64 20 190 ce200 Or CRAFT gt get cmtrapevent 67 Group cmTrapEventTable Instance 67 SeqNum 67 Type lLoginFailed ObjectClass Operator ClassId 1 2 0 0 ProbableCause 0 Severity Information TimeTag 2000 12 03 09 36 32 Text 10 254 8 202 admin FTP Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 181 Alarm Log Alarm messages are written to the event log and also to a sep arate alarm table that is updated every time the alarm status changes Once an alarm condition is cleared it is dropped from the table Like the Event Log two different methods are available for view ing information about current alarms To view the Alarm Table in real time connect to the system either directly or through Telnet and enter the command alarms A list of all current un cleared alarms will be displayed To exit the Alarm Table press Esc CRAFT gt alarms KKKKKKKKK PortMisprovisioned 2000 12 02 11 49 53 id 25 MINOR IDSLPort 1 11 4 0 PortMisprovisioned 2000 12 02 11 49 55 id 27 MINOR IDSLPort 1 11 14 0 PortMisprovisioned 2000 12 02 11 50 29 id 33 MINOR SDSLPort 1 10 14 0 PortMisprovisioned 2000 12 02 11 50 29 id 33 MINOR SDSLPort 1 10 14 0 The second method is to view Alarm table information through th
99. 1 004 115 Configuring CE150 Network Interfaces 0 0000000e 116 Full IP vs Policy Routed Links 22000200 e caus 116 Configuring Full IP DSL Links 0 00 0c eee eee 118 Configuring Policy Routed DSL Links 00005 119 IP Policy Over WAN 2000 0c eee eee teens 119 IP Policy Over Ethernet 0 0000 c eee eee eee 120 Configuring Ports for VWAN Over Ethernet 122 Proxy ARP eraai otn ee a p oe bee br ae ed 123 Configuring WAN VCs 000 cece tees 124 Configuring DS3 Frame Relay 0 0 0c eee eee eee 126 Initial Configuration 1 0 0 0 auauua 126 Adding a PVC r arnei k anena sia ya tees 126 Configure the Frame Relay DCE to Connect with the CE150 127 Throughput Management 0 00 cee ee 127 Throughput si tasaa tad ased ia nad ee bs Pewee ais 127 Setting CIR Parameters for Frame Relay PVCs 129 Configuring DS3 ATM 1 2 0 0 000 cece eee 130 Configuring ATM VCsS 0 00 c eee eee 130 Configuring ATM VCs for Quality of Service 131 Configuring Quad T1 Frame Relay 0 0 0 0 e eee eee 132 Performance Monitoring 0 0 e eee eee eee 133 IP Monitoring with IfTable group 000 c eee eee eee 133 VC Monitoring with frCircuitTable 000000 eee 133 Monitoring Frame Relay Errors with frErrTable 133 Disabling Deprovisioning an Interfac
100. 1 1999 08 18 19 21 12 LinkUp ifTable Index 1 2 1 0 cmNameTable IfName m cmNameTable PII 1 2 1 0 cmGroupTable Name cmTrapEventTable Type LinkUp cmTrapEventTable ObjectClass FrameRelayLink cmTrapEventTable ClassId 1 2 1 0 cmTrapEventTable SeqNum 249 cmTrapEventTable TimeTag 1999 08 18 P9322 cmTrapEventTable Severity Information cmTrapEvent Display This example shows how the events are displayed using the cmTrapEventLogTable You can view the events using the cmTrapEvent group with the following command CRAFT gt get cmtrapevent sequence_number The table is sorted by sequence number In the cmTrapEvent output the event specific fields are collapsed into a single field called Text The contents of each event specific field is listed in order and separated by commas Here is the output of the LinkDown event for a Frame Relay Link on port 1 2 1 CRAFT gt get cmtrapevent 56 Group cmTrapEventTable Instance 56 Type lLinkDown SeqNum 56 ObjectClass FrameRelayLink ClassId 1 2 1 0 ProbableCause 0 Severity MinorAlarm TimeTag 1999 08 18 17 38 38 Text SL A Ogee ee iy ee 186 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Here is the output of the LinkUp event for the Frame Relay Link on port 1 2 1 CRAFT gt get cmtrapevent 249 Instance Type LinkUp SeqNum 249 ObjectClass FrameRelayLink ClassId 1 2 1 0 ProbableCause 0 Severity Informat
101. 13 2 3 3 CPE ipaddr 10 10 1 5 Instance CPE 1 13 2 4 4 CPE iad Instance CPE 1 13 2 5 5 CPE 213 2 1 DHCP 587565 Peles ied DHCP 587575 a DHCP Reply 3 2 DHCP 587575 A e hdia_enable is DHCP 587575 Pps ae DHCP 587575 caipaddr 10 10 1 1 No more instances You can see that five new message entries have been added to the log table The Geta command does not always show the entire message so perform a Get to see more details for some of the entries CRAFT gt get cmcpelog cpe 1 5 2 1 Group cmCpeLogTable Instance CPE 1 5 2 1 Index CPE 1 3 2 MsgNbr 1 MsgType DHCP TimeStamp 587565 Message Sending DHCP request CRAFT gt get cmcpelog cpe 1 5 2 4 Group cmCpeLogTable Instance CPE 1 5 2 4 Index CPE 1 5 2 MsgNbr 4 MsgType DHCP TimeStamp 587575 Message iad_hdia_enable is 1 To stop logging messages Turn off the message logging feature CRAFT gt set cmcpeiad cpe 1 5 2 logaction stopdebug Set Successful The log table still displays the messages that were already logged table However any new messages will not be added to the log To delete entries from the message log Set the LogAction object to delete the entries CRAFT gt set cmcpeiad cpe 1 13 2 logaction deletedebug Set Successful 206 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide The TotalMsgsLogged object has been reset to O
102. 150 are temperature humidity and altitude Required Services Temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Humidity 10 to 80 non condensing Altitude to 10 000 feet Typically the Telco will run the service cables to the edge of the Central Office cage Then the Telco or another installer will in stall the proper patch panels at the edge of the cage Before you install the CE150 ensure that the following services are or will be in place Telco connection DS3 ATM Frame Relay service DS1 service LAN access A telephone line for dial up access A regulated source of 48 VDC or 120 VAC Mains power Required Equipment System Hardware The following hardware items are the minimum required for a full function DSL access link This minimum configuration will support 1 to 24 DSL ports One CE150 chassis One System Control Module WAN Module with a 10 100 Base T Ethernet WAN connection One 24 port DSL module SDSL or ADSL G Lite or G dmt or one 12 port T1 module The CE150 chassis can accommodate up to two DSL modules SDSL ADSL or T1 in any combination One Buffer Control Module One Power Module For NEBS compliance you must and one blank panel or filler panel One Fan Tray Assembly CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Your CE150 System Control Module may optionally include one of the following WAN connections e DS1 Quad port T1 Frame WAN e DS 3 ATM WAN e DS 3 Frame WAN Buffer Contr
103. 4 13 Index CPE 1 4 13 CurrentIpAddr 0 0 0 0 CurrentCAIpAddr 0 0 0 0 SavedIpAddr 0 0 0 0 SavedCAIpAddr 0 0 0 0 NumVoicePorts 0 NumConnections 0 Command None TOSByte 0 LogAction None LogType ALL 0 LogLevel INFO 0 LogDuration 30 TotalMsgsLogged 0 TracelMask 0 Trace2Mask 0 If the IP addresses are already set and they are different from the ones set in steps 5 to 9 go to step 13 CRAFT gt get cmcpeiad cpe 1 4 13 Group cmCpeIADTable Instance CPE 1 4 13 Index CPE 1 4 13 CurrentIpAddr 10 0 45 2 CurrentCAIpAddr 10 0 45 1 SavedIpAddr 10 0 45 2 SavedCAIpAddr 10 0 45 1 NumVoicePorts 8 NumConnections 8 Command None TOSByte 0 LogAction None LogType ALL 0 LogLevel INFO 0 LogDuration 30 TotalMsgsLogged 0 TracelMask 0 Trace2Mask 0 ee 8 ee eo Phones AD Without Saved IP Addresses in NVRAM Not on Subnet 10 0 21 0 F 7 IAD HDIA DSLAM IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Voice IP Addr 10 0 21 1 Gateway ee 8 oe ee Phones IAD With Saved IP Addresses in NVRAM Not on Subnet 10 0 21 0 F AD HD A DSLAM IP Addr 10 0 45 2 m Voice IP adar 10 0 21 1 Gateway HDIA Netmodel Configuring the IP Address on the CR408 Chapter 6 Voice over DSL 153 13 If the IP addresses are already set and are different from the ones set in steps 5 9 set either of the two saved addresses on the IAD CPE 1
104. 50 sends that IP address to both the non CMCP CPEs and their hosts Therefore configure the CE150 to either Relay or Forward these requests to an upstream DHCP server which can assign different IP addresses for both 2 Both the Relay Agent Information and Client Identifier are inserted in the request 3 Only the Relay Agent Information is inserted in the request The following sections describe the CE150 s DHCP functional ity both upstream and downstream 80 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Upstream DHCP Processing In the upstream direction the CE150 can function as a DHCP Server Relay Agent or Forwarding Agent for a DSL PII depend ing on the netmodel You use the cmDHCPTable to configure DHCP functionality for the DSL PII If there is no entry in the cmDHCPTable for the DSL PII the CE150 s default mode is to pass the DHCP request to the upstream router or DHCP server without inserting the Relay Agent Information or Client Identifier in the message See Chapter 3 of the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual for information about the cmDHCPT able IP Netmodel When the netmodel is IP you can configure the CE150 to act as a DHCP Server or as a DHCP Relay Agent for a DSL port or VC The CE150 as a DHCP Server For CMCP CPEs The CE150 responds to DHCP requests from CMCP CPEs for which there is an entry in the cmDHCPTable e The CE150 generates a response based on the
105. 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 N C N C d 5 2 a WOU MMH BWNHE DSL Cable Connectors and Pinouts on the Back of the CE150 Chapter 2 Installation 27 Front Panel Connections This section describes connections for the System Control Mod ules SCM 1 SCM 2 and SCM 3 and WAN modules System Control Module 1 and System Control Module 2 The System Control Module 1 and System Control Module 2 have the Ethernet Diagnostic and Craft ports for the CE150 Modem Ethernet Training Craft Port Port LEDs Status Modem Diagnostic Craft Port LEDs Port Port Status LED RECEIVE TEANTA DS 3 FRAME MODULE SYSTEM e LOCAL OOOO SEE hail ils oc coeds MODULE STATUS NETWORK MODEM DIAGNOSTIC CRAFT C Modem Transmit Receive Data LEDs Ethernet Transmit Receive Data LEDs System Control Module 28 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Ethernet Port Connect a Category 5 STP cable with RJ 45 connectors at both ends between the Ethernet Port connector and any available port LOBASE T or 1OOBASE T of a network facility such as a hub 1 Tx Data 2 Tx Data 3 Rx Data 6 Rx Data Eth
106. AFT gt set cmiface 1 5 13 22 netmodel hdia ipaddr 10 0 21 2 netmask 255 255 255 255 destpii 1 2 1 21 encapsulationtype ip 1490 HDIA Data Group 10 0 20 0 IP Addr 10 0 20 2 Netmask 32 F 1 E IP Adar 10 0 20 0 Host a IAD a hee Netmask 26 L HDIa Pll 1 3 1 20 Default No ANA R A E IP Addr 10 0 20 1 Router 4 ze IAD IP Addr 10 0 20 4 ut oa Hosts m Netmask 30 DSLAM i Pll 1 6 14 b i E VC 528 HDIA Voice Group 10 0 21 0 a IP Addr 10 0 21 2 Netmask 32 my WI IP Adar 10 0 21 0 Sie IAD vee ae Netmask 26 ee Lice _ E HDIA PII 1 3 1 21 Voice ee ee b es IAD Pran 00D IP Addr 10 0 21 1 Gateway Phones Netmask 32 DSLAM ee Pll 1 6 14 b a VC 22 Configuring Data and Voice VCs CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Configuring the CE150 for DHCP Functionality For specific ports or VCs you can configure the CE150 to pro cess DHCP requests in one of the following modes e DHCP Server The CE150 responds to a DHCP request from a CMCP Copper Mountain Compatible Protocol CPE or a non CMCP CPE sending the IP address entered in the cmDHCPTable for that DSL PII DHCP Relay Agent The CE150 sends the DHCP request from any CPE or premise LAN host to an upstream DHCP server The netmodel must be IP DHCP Forwarding Agent The CE150 sends the DHCP request from any CPE or premise LAN host to an upstream DHCP server The netmode
107. AMManualLBCmd OAMManualLBCmdStatus OAMLBInterval OAMLBTimeOut OAMTxAISCells OAMRxXRDICells OAMRxAISCells OAMTxRDICells OAMTxLBRequestCells OAMRxLBResponseCells OAMRxLBRequestCells OAMTxLBResponseCells OAMRxUnsupportedCell OAMTxDiscards OAMRxDiscards T2 Le 80 1 122 Up Up 0 day 0 hour 0 min 0 0 sec 2000 04 14 14 41 37 Aal5 1600 1600 Active 1 adminDown 0 disabled disabled none none 5 15 OGOGO Ss OO OG 2 Set NetModel IPAddr NetMask and Encapsulation Type for the WAN port and the FarEndAddr The NetModel must be IP The EncapsulationType must be rfc1483 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 80 netmodel ip ipaddr 192 168 20 2 netmask 255 255 255 255 farendaddr 192 168 20 1 encapsulationtype rfc1483 Perform a Get on the VC and you will see this table CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 2 1 80 cmIfaceTable l2 1 80 Group Instance PII IfIndex Name GroupName AdditionallInfo NetModel IpAddr NetMask MacAddr BurnedInMacAddr FarEndAddr DestPII CMCPCompatible EncapsulationType FwdMode Pix ServiceClass Lee 2ie bigi80 1 2 1 80 we ww ww IP 192 168 20 2 V Rolo iy No pony Aa o Ko ope EEs EELE EEs FES EE EEEF ff EE EELEE 192 168 10 1 0 0 0 0 No rfc1483 Full IP 28 None Chapter 7 ADSL G lite and G dmt 167 3 Set the VC on the DSL port Use a PII such as 1 4 12 528 and specify a VPI and VCI They must match the ones on the CPE Typical
108. Base T Ethernet port 6 10Base T Ethernet port 6 10Base T Ethernet cable 16 16C550 PC Compatible serial port 6 33 33 600 Kbps analog modem 6 48 VDC power and ground 17 48 VDC power cable 22 75 Ohm coax cable 17 75 Ohm double braid shielded cable 17 A AAL2 136 AALS 221 222 AC Power module 5 ADSL G dmt module features 7 ADSL Gite module features 7 ADSLMultiModeModule 24A class 179 Alarm Clearing notification 177 alarm clearing notifications BoardUp 242 BootFileSucceed 242 ConfigReadSucceed 242 ConfigWriteSucceed 242 CpePlugAndPlayClear 242 DLCIStateEnabled 243 DSiLineStatusClear 243 DS3LineStatusClear 243 FanFaultClear 243 IDSLTimingLossClear 243 LinkUp 244 LoginAllowed 244 LoginAvailable 244 MaintSucceeded 244 PowerSupplyClear 244 RateFallbackClear 244 Index Alarm log 9 Alarm module power check 37 alarms 177 AtmVccDown 238 audible and visible 9 BoardDown 238 BootFileFail 238 clearing 185 ConfigReadFailed 238 ConfigWriteFailed 238 CpePlugAndPlayFailure 238 critical 184 DLCIStateDisabled 239 DSiLineStatusAlarm 239 DS3LineStatusAlarm 239 EndPointConflictAlarm 239 event log 182 FanFault 239 generate 99 100 IDSLTimingLossAlarm 240 LinkDown 240 log 180 LoginSaturated 240 LoginSuspended 240 MaintFailed 240 major 184 manually clear 185 minor 111 184 PortMisprovisioned 241 PowerSupplyFault 241 RateFallbackAlarm 241 RedundancyC
109. Changed directory to P ce200bu code ftp gt lcd code Local directory now C newce200 code b On the CE150 delete all bgz or bin files one by one ftp gt del be bgz or del be bin 250 Command accepted c Upload the new code files bgz from the local machine to the CE150 ftp gt mput bgz mput bce bgz Enter y for each file to confirm the upload 200 Port set okay 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection FEEF Appendix D Upgrading System Software 255 226 Transfer complete 14509 bytes sent in 0 10 seconds lt 145 09 Kbytes sec gt 8 Upgrade the System subdirectory a On the local machine only change to the System subdirectory ftp gt led system Local directory now C newce200 system b On the CE150 change to the System subdirectory in the ce200 directory It contains the Config file that you saved at the beginning of this process ftp gt cd ce200 system 250 Changed directory to P ce200 system c Copy the Config file ftp gt get config tgz or get config txt 200 Port set okay 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection 226 Transfer complete 3218 bytes received in 0 17 seconds lt 18 93 Kbytes sec gt d Return to the System subdirectory in the ce200bu directory ftp gt ed ce200bu system 250 Changed directory to P ce200bu system e Delete the existing Config file in the ce200bu directory ftp gt del config tgz or del config txt 250 Command accepted
110. Cross Connect netmodel allows conversion of disparate frame formats between DSL and WAN interfaces Under this netmodel different forwarding modes support multiple encap sulation types as well as translation between different encapsu lation types For example under the VC VC Payload forwarding mode a frame encapsulation on the DSL interface can be con verted into an ATM encapsulation on the WAN interface There are two types of Cross Connect forwarding modes deter mined by the DSL port encapsulation per VC forwarding modes and per port forwarding modes Per VC forwarding modes result from a DSL encapsulation that allows multiple VCs per DSL port Per port forwarding modes result from a DSL encapsula tion that does not support VCs Per VC Forwarding Modes All Cross Connect per VC encapsulations support up to 64 PVCs on the DSL port multiplexed to a single WAN VC Each DSL VC inherits its encapsulation from the DSL port DLCI numbers identifying DSL VCs obey the same rules as they do on WAN VCs numbers must be between 17 and 991 and they do not have to be sequential However the numbers 16 528 and 529 cannot be used In general the DSL VC s forwarding mode is determined by the WAN VC If the WAN encapsulation is not specified None packet forwarding is performed in VC VC Payload forwarding mode If the DSL and WAN encapsulations are the same packet forwarding is performed in a transparent mode If the DSL and WAN encapsulat
111. Cs Frame Relay and ATM support the following encap sulations For 1483 or 1490 encapsulation the netmodel deter mines whether the frame type is IP PDU or MAC PDU WAN VC Encapsulations Valid Netmodels Frame based VC Format ATM VC Format None None Cross Connect Q 922 address payload AAL5 payload RFC1483 VWAN IP CVPN HDIA Q 922 address 1483 AAL5 1483 Cross Connect MAC or IP RFC1490 VWAN IP CVPN HDIA Q 922 address 1490 AAL5 1490 MAC or IP RFC1973 Cross Connect Q 922 address RFC1973 RFC2364 null Cross Connect none PPP payload AALS trailer RFC2364 LLC Cross Connect none LLC header PPP payload AALS trailer FRF 5 Cross Connect AAL5 FRF 5 Ethernet Port Encapsulations Since industry standards unambiguously define a single en capsulation for each protocol the CE150 only accepts Encap sulation None Translations For the Cross Connect netmodel the CE150 does not terminate protocols but may convert headers For non VC DSL port en capsulations there is only one logical interface per DSL port For DSL port encapsulations of Q 922 RFC1973 or ATM each DSL VC may be a separate logical interface 222 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide DSL Port Translations This table covers the DSL port encapsulations that do not sup port VCs It describes Cross Connects from a DSL port to a WAN VC DSL Cross Connect Encapsulations DSL Port Encapsulati
112. DLC frames The CE150 can transform them into RFC 1973 frames and then send them to a WAN VC Different ports carrying PPP HDLC are mapped to VCs on the same WAN interface The operation is called Point to Point Protocol Multiplexing To configure the PPP HDLC 1973 forwarding mode set the net model and encapsulation on the DSL and WAN interfaces 1 Set the DSL port s netmodel and encapsulation and specify the WAN VC as the destination PII CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype ppp hdlc destpii 1 2 1 100 2 Set the netmodel and encapsulation for the WAN VC CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 100 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype rfc1973 After configuration both WAN VC 1 3 1 100 and DSP port 1 6 1 have a forwarding mode of PPP HDLC 1973 To configure the HDLC VC payload forwarding mode set the netmodel and encapsulation on the DSL and WAN interfaces 1 Set the DSL port s netmodel and encapsulation and specify the WAN VC as the destination PII CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype ppp hdlc destpii 1 2 1 100 2 Set the netmodel and no encapsulation for the WAN VC CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 100 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype none After configuration both WAN VC 1 3 1 100 and DSP port 1 6 1 have a forwarding mode of HDLC VC payload For more information about the Cross Connect netmodel refer to Appendix A Data Encapsula
113. Edge unit as a Syslog client all you need to do is enter the IP address of the server In most cases the default settings of all of the oth er objects should be the appropriate ones For example CRAFT gt set cmfile syslogaddr 209 141 14 4 For more information about other Syslog configuration options for the CE150 refer to the cmFile MIB definition in the Copper Edge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 203 CPE Message Log Table If you need to perform diagnostics for an IAD CPE such as a CR408 CR508 or CR508T you can log debug messages to a CPE log table which you can view from the Craft prompt To log messages you will use two MIB groups cmCpeIADTable and cmCpeLogTable e cmCpeIADTable Create and delete the log table entries using the LogAction LogType LogLevel and LogDuration objects e cmCpeLogTable View up to 1000 logged message entries The first entry contains the oldest information In the following examples we will turn on message logging and generate some messages To start logging messages 1 First check the cmCpeBoardTable to see if the CPE supports cmCpeLogTable CRAFT gt get cmcpeboard cpe 1 5 2 groupmap Group cmCPEBoardTable Instance CPE 1 5 2 GroupMap 3a 40 39 91 92 93 94 9b a5 a0 a7 In the GroupMap a5 indicates cmCpeLogTable 2 Then check the cmCpeIADTable to see how the LogAction object is set CRAFT gt geta cm
114. Ethernet network the module will synchronize and negotiate its speed with the network The Ethernet LED will turn green if the network is a 10BASE T 10 Mbps system and red if it is a 100BASE T 100 Mbps system The CE Internal Data LED indicates data activity internal to the CE150 itself The state of this LED does not correspond to the status of the system At any time the Internal Data LED may be off blinking pulsing or solidly green On the System Control Module panel the Network and Packet Comm LEDs beside the modem port indicate Chapter 2 Installation 39 data traffic The Network indicator turns or flickers green when Ethernet data packets are transmitted by the CE200 The Packet Comm indicator turns or flickers green when Ethernet data packets are received by the CE200 On the System Control Module 3 panel the Ethernet port has two LEDs a single Transmit Receive Data LED and a Data Link Integrity LED The Transmit Receive Data LED indicates data traffic It turns or flickers yellow when data is received or transmitted on the Ethernet line The Data Link Integrity LED turns green when the integrity of the Ethernet link for 10BASE T or 1OOBASE TX is acceptable The DS3 WAN Module if present has three LED indicators on its front panel just below the Transmit BNC connector At power up all three LEDs will light briefly as a functional test RECEIVE TRANSMIT 5 mopute D3 FRAME NEAREND SYSTEM MON
115. Except for HDLC and PPP HDLC all DSL port encapsulations including None allow a dual netmodel cmIface entry on VCID 22 This means that such encapsulations imply a port level encapsulation that supports VCs which is ATM or RFC2364 null RFC2364 LLC for ATM based DSLs and Q 922 or RFC1973 for frame based DSLs DSL VC Encapsulations In one special case DSL VC VCID 22 you specify a DSL VC encapsulation in a cmIfaceTable row Such DSL VCs support these encapsulations DSL VC22 Encapsulations DSL VC Encapsulation Valid Netmodels Mare Description None Cross Connect Q 922 SDSL or AAL5 G lite Used for transparent forwarding and G dmt RFC1490 Cross Connect 1490 IP or MAC frames Used for FRF 8 translation IP 1490 HDIA Routed IP frames Appendix A Overview of Data Encapsulation 221 WAN Port Encapsulations Currently WAN ports do not have cmIface entries or explicit configuration Since the hardware for each WAN port supports only one encapsulation the encapsulation is implied by the hardware Frame based WAN interfaces such as DS3 Frame and Quad T1 imply a WAN port encapsulation of Q 922 Frame Relay ATM WAN interfaces such as DS3 ATM imply a WAN port en capsulation of ATM In the future frame based WANs may sup port non Q 922 encapsulations and you will then have to explicitly configure the WAN port encapsulations WAN VC Encapsulations WAN VC Encapsulation WAN V
116. Frame Relay Transmit Receive mon itor jacks you will need two 75 Ohm double braid shielded ca bles RG316 U with SMB connectors at both ends of each cable In North America for dial in access to CopperCraft not avail able in the European Union you will need to provide a serial modem cable DB9 DB25 Chapter 2 Installation System Software In addition to the core data processing software your CE150 software includes the CopperCraft CLI SNMP agent an FTP file server The software will support the available CopperView AMS DSL Access Management System and CopperView EM Element Manager Each of these tools may be employed in managing the CE150 and its links Configuration data is stored in the CE150 s on board flash memory The CE150 s embedded software and the software for its CopperRocket CPEs is upgradable by download from a re mote host allowing you to extend the useful life of your sub scribers CPEs CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide CE150 Installation A CAUTION All CE150 modules contain static sensitive devices If you must remove or handle modules for any reason observe standard ESD precautions ground straps for personnel and equipment etc If you are unsure of the necessary precautions contact Copper Mountain Technical Support for assistance Unpack the CE150 When you unpack your CE150 system check that you have the following items e One of the following chassis
117. Guide North America Regulatory Notices United States FCC Part 15 Emissions Notice The Copper Mountain CE 150 DSL Concentrator has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Federal Communications Commission Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful in terference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio com munications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by us ing other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to op erate this equipment Industry Canada ICES 003 Emissions Notice The Copper Mountain CE 150 DSL Concentrator is a Class A digital app
118. II over which the request was received in the DHCP request This IP address will be used by the upstream DHCP server to send the DHCP response back to the CE150 2 Fora CMCP CPE the CE150 modifies the DHCP request by inserting the CircuitID from the cmDHCPtTable into the Relay Agent Information and Client Identifier fields in the DHCP request message For a non CMCP CPE or a host on the premise LAN the CE150 modifies the DHCP request by inserting the CircuitID only into the Relay Agent Information field 3 The CE150 sends the request upstream as a unicast IP packet destined to the DHCP Server IP address configured in the cmDHCPTable Netmodel IP The CE relays the DHCP request to the A CPE CMCP or non CMCP upstream DHCP server identified by the or premise LAN Host sends a Server IP address from the DHCPTable DHCP request i FS ea Se Nc re OT N Link to DSL PII A CopperEdge Upstream DHCP lt lt T T A lt _ _ CPE 1 4 1 0 l DSLAM Router 4 Server A A ete Tags Bee ees ten i P ServerlPAddr 204 20 20 30 The CE unicasts or broadcasts the Host DHCP response to the CPE or Host The DEBE Server responds with an IP address and any other configuration parameters sending them back to the CE The CE150 as a DHCP Relay Agent Pass Through Mode If the CE150 receives a DHCP request and there is no entry in the cmDHC
119. If your system is equipped with either a SCM1 or SCM2 it will need a EIA232 NUL Modem cable with 9 pin D subminiature female connector to 9 pin D subminiature male connector It connects the serial port of a local terminal to the Craft or Diagnostic port on the System Control Module front panel CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Tools You are responsible for providing these additional cables e Network connection cables For each DS3 WAN Frame or ATM module two shielded 75 Ohm coax cables RG 59 U with BNC connectors on both ends Connects the CopperEdge DS3 WAN module to the WAN concentrator For each DS1 WAN Frame module Category 5 cabling with RJ 45 connectors on both ends Connects the CopperEdge DS1 WAN module to the WAN concentrator e For each additional DSL line module the appropriate DSL cable For the dial up modem telephone cabling with RJ 11 connectors on both ends You will need the following items to install the CE150 e Flat blade screwdriver e No 2 Phillips screwdriver preferably with a magnetized tip e Voltmeter e ESD static strap e For connection of the 48 VDC Power and Ground a 12 Wire Lug Crimp tool e Cable ties Optional Equipment For connection to the DIAG or Craft ports you may need one or more of these items e Two serial cables DB9 male to female e One serial A B switch e One Gender changer male to male DB9 For access to DS3 ATM or
120. In networking parlance the network access device is normally consid ered the DCE DHCP server A host processor accessed through Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DLCI Data Link Circuit Identifier A logical name generally 10 bits in length assigned to a Frame Relay virtual circuit and included in the Frame Relay header DLCMI Digital Link Connection Management Interface Software mechanism for configuring and controlling Frame Relay virtual circuits DSL Digital Subscriber Line A digital tele phone line capable of reliably transporting data at high speeds for G lite from 160 Kbps up to 2 Mbps for G dmt from 32 Kbps up to 6 Mbps over ordinary twisted pair copper wire local loops Also the hardware and software tech nology utilized to implement DSL DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multi plexor A network device usually at a tele phone company central office that receives signals from multiple customer DSL connec tions and sends the signals on a high speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques Depending on the product DSLAM multiplex ers connect DSL lines with some combination of asynchronous transfer mode ATM Frame Relay or IP networks DSL Module A CE150 module that interfaces between DSL links and the switched network CE150 DSL modules may either be 12 or 24 port types and depending on the model may support a variety of xDSL formats 268 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operatin
121. In router mode the CPE treats all of the hosts on the LAN as extensions of a subnet configured on the CE150 But if you have a LAN and a series of hosts downstream from your CPE and if you have it configured in bridge mode the set up is different A CPE in bridge mode also can be set up with either public or private IP addresses for hosts In bridge mode hosts on a LAN use a DSL port on the CE150 as a gateway Once packets arrive at a DSL port the CE150 looks up its default IP route and sends them to a WAN VC It forwards them over a Point to Point link to a Telco router If the packets have been sent by hosts with public addresses the router sends them out over the Internet to a destination ad dress with their source address embedded If the packets have been sent by hosts with private addresses the Telco router uses its NAT function and replaces the private addresses with its own public address Then the router sends the packets out over the Internet to their destination with its public address or source address embedded In response when messages come downstream for hosts on the LAN the router looks through its routing tables for the private addresses or destination addresses Before the router forwards the pack ets downstream it replaces its own public address with the ap propriate private addresses for the hosts Route VC 528 VC 128 Tables j NY Router No DD o A Route Route HOST 1 Tables IP T
122. M see the MIB Definitions in the CopperEdge 150 Cop perCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Chapter 5 Routing Forwarding Managing Links 13 Configuring Quad T1 Frame Relay The Quad T1 Frame Relay module unlike the DS3 module for either Frame Relay or ATM does not require the installation of software to run it The software already resides on the System Control module in the CopperEdge The Quad T1 Frame Relay module is very similar to a DS3 Frame Relay module The Quad T1 Frame Relay module has the same features and functions as a DS3 Frame Relay module but the Quad T1 Frame Relay module has significantly lower throughput rates Like the DS3 Frame Relay module The Quad Tl Frame Relay module module will allow the configuration of VCs and the shaping of traffic using CIR on the VCs 132 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Performance Monitoring Many interfaces and operation modes collect summary packet counts useful in monitoring and evaluating link and interface performance In most cases the counts are cumulative since the system was last booted Counters can only be reset by resetting the CE150 For complete information on available performance monitoring groups and their objects see the specific tables in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual IP Monitoring with Iffable group The Iffable is a MIB II standard table where information on IP interfaces and their data p
123. MAC address of Read only this interface BurnediInMacAddr For CPEs that support this feature the burned in Read only MAC address of the CPE at the end of the DSL link FarEndAddr For IP netmodel WAN VCs the IP address of the Read Write device at the opposite end of the WAN VC DestPIl For most netmodels on DSL ports the aggregated Read Write interface to which this DSL port is connected ICPCompatible For DSL ports specifies whether the CPE at the Read Write end of the DSL link supports Copper Mountain s EncapsulationType Internal Control Protocol ICP for enhanced network manageability The data format of data frames or packets Read Write exchanged on this interface FwdMode The kind of processing that the CE150 will perform Read only for packets on this interface The CE150 displays this result as a function of all other configuration Automatic Creation of WAN VC cmliface Entries For ease of configuration file storing and loading the CE150 al lows the full set of cmIface entries to specified in any order This means that you can specify a WAN VC as a DestPii of a DSL port even if the WAN VC s cmlface entry does not yet exist In this case the CE150 automatically creates a minimal cmIface entry for the WAN VC The CE150 sets the WAN VC s netmodel to the netmodel of the DSL port which implicitly created it The CE150 sets all other parameters to the simplest defaults In general you should expli
124. MCN 0080262 01 COPPEREDGE Installation and Operating Guide CopperEdge 150 DSL Concen trator COPPER MOUNTAIN Part Number 0080262 01 May 2001 Release 5 0 Copyright 1997 2001 Copper Mountain Networks Inc All rights reserved The Copper Mountain logo is a registered trademark and Copper Mountain CopperEdge CopperView CopperCraft and all Copper Mountain product names are trademarks of Copper Mountain Networks Inc Other brand and product names are trademarks of their respective holders San Diego Facility 10145 Pacific Heights Boulevard Suite 100 San Diego California 92121 Palo Alto Facility 2470 Embarcadero Way Palo Alto California ii CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Limited Warranty Copper Mountain Networks Inc Copper Mountain warrants the CopperEdge 150 to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment from Copper Mountain s factory Should your CE150 fail during the warranty period Copper Mountain will at its option and as its sole and exclusive obligation under this warranty repair or replace it with a like product which may include new or refurbished parts or components This warranty is extended only to the original purchaser and only covers failures due to defects in materials and workmanship which occur during normal use during the period of the warranty It does not cover damage which occurs in shipment or
125. MIB RFC 1573 DS3 ES MIB and Copper Mountain Proprietary MIB Proxy management for Copper Mountain CPEs EJA 2332D Console port Craft interface Telnet password protected to CopperCraft CLI CopperCraft interface accepts up to four simultaneous management sessions through IP Telnet and FTP up to five sessions through SNMP and one through the Craft serial port Ping utility both originate and respond CopperView DSL Access Management System with graph ics based element manager a self contained SNMP Man ager Radius authentication and accounting for system level operators including those on the CE150 Reliability Serviceability Hot swap supported for all DSL modules front panel status indicators to aid fault isolation Optional power redundancy through dual load sharing power supplies with automatic failover and fault monitoring Software and configuration downloads from flash memory or from external server through FTP Extensive performance monitoring through system trunk and port level statistics Event and Alarm log and extensive event trapping capabil ity provide status information to NUS SNMP Managers front panel module shows alarm status and network of contact closures enable audible and visible CO alarm devices Chapter 1 Introducing the CopperEdge 150 9 Product Certification in North America Release Notes e Product Safety United States UL 1950 3rd Edition Safety of Informa tion Technol
126. MON FAREND CONTROL ne MODULE DS3 Frame Module LEDs If the DS3 ATM or Frame WAN module is connected to a compatible DS3 facility then the green Module LED will light and the Red Near End and Yellow Far End LEDs will be off In the event of a local failure such as loss of signal or frame errors at the CE150 or within the DS3 Module itself the Near End LED will light red to indicate the failure If a failure occurs that is not associated with the CE150 or with the DS3 Module but instead is the result of a failure on the link or with upstream equipment then the Far End LED will light yellow to indicate that failure mode If there is a saved configuration file it will be read in automatically If there are CopperRocket CPE units connected to the CE150 s SDSL ports they will attempt to train handshake and connect on the CE150 regardless of whether the ports have been configured As the Customer Premises Equipment attempts to train on a port the Port Status LED on the corresponding SDSL Module will first blink rapidly and then turn steady green if the CPE trains successfully If the CPE attempts to train but fails the Port Status LED will go off until the CPE again tries to train It may take several minutes for all of the connected ports to come up 40 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide The Port Status LEDs of unconnected DSL ports will periodically blink green as the system ch
127. Message CPE is not IMUX capable You will see an error message if you try to place ports in an IMUX bundle incorrectly and the CPE s ports are already trained CE150 DSL ports that have already been configured as individual interfaces and ports that have mismatched End PointIDs will cause the CE150 to generate error messages The error messages related to IMUX configuration are listed below For the full configuration procedure for IMUX bundles see Configuring an IMUX Bundle on page 100 Multilink Bundle Error Messages Description Action You cannot assign a CPE to a bundle unless it has IMUX software in its code When a CPE trains on a port the CE150 knows whether it is IMUX capa ble IMUX CPE has EndPointID inconsistent with existing members You cannot assign a port to a bundle Enter the command getal1l when the CPE trained on the port has cmEndPointPort to list all End an EndPointID that does not match the PointIDs in the CE150 starting EndPointID of a port already in the bun with the first port on the first line dle card All ports in a bundle must have the Create a new bundle and then same EndPointID either switch the mismatched port or attach the correct phone to it Finally create other ports for the other phone lines to the bundles 198 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Message IMUX CPE has EndPointID that matches member in dif ferent bundle Multi
128. North America 020000eeeeee 10 Release Notes iscsi a scene Cad acter eds Pal ake e EETA Gee deh aati 10 Technical Supp0lty eecuciapareueietdaces Hietamiead howhs dened 11 Chapter2 Installation 22 2 62osi0ccetinmin anneanne 13 Site Preparation 0 0 0 0 cece tees 14 Environmental Conditions 000 0c eee eee 14 Required Services 00 0c cee eee eee 14 Required Equipment 0 0 eae 14 System Hardware 00000 cece eee ee 14 Control Console 000 eee 15 Cables iii tic EEEE E eh a tena ray een pans 15 TOOS see hick ph iata rA GAA ey HERA tae a aT ale Setar a a 17 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide ix Optional Equipment 0 eee 17 System Software 0 0 0 18 CE150 Installation 0 0 0 cc ten eee 19 Unpack the CE150 0 2 2 cece 19 Rack Installation 2 0 000 cece eee 20 Wall BracketS 0 00 00 cc eee eee 21 Rear Panel Connectors 00 0 ccc eens 21 120 VAC Power Connection for North America 23 48 VDC Power Connection 0 00 cee eee ee 23 Provide Over Current Protection 00000 23 Ground the CE150 Chassis 000 eee eee 24 DC Power Connection 0 0 00 ce eee eee ga 24 Connection to Telecommunications Network Voltage Circuits 25 DSL Link Connections 0 00 ens 26 Front Panel Connections 0 00 cece nae 28 Sys
129. P Addr 10 0 20 1 Router j 10 0 20 Net mask 30 DSLAM Hosts Jj PII 1 4 14 L a VG 528 HDIA Voice Group 10 0 21 0 IP Addr 10 0 21 2 8 eo IAD oe J iP Addr 10 0 21 0 Phones 88 VC 22 Net mask 26 es e up fp bli 1 2 1 21 Voice eo Y 3 00 FR EEEE IP Addr 10 0 21 1 Gateway Phones se Net mask 32 DSLAM Pll 1 4 14 s VC 22 HDIA Netmodel Data and Voice Groups with Netmasks CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 6 IP Addresses on the data DSL Ports a Assign the 10 0 20 2 address with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 32 to the first DSL port Only one host can be attached to this IAD b Assign the 10 0 20 4 address with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 252 30 to the second DSL port As many as four hosts can be attached to this IAD 7 IP Addresses on the voice DSL Ports a Assign the 10 0 21 2 address with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 32 to the first DSL port Only one host or group of eight phones can be attached to this IAD b Assign the 10 0 21 3 address with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 32 to the second DSL port Only one host or group of eight phones can be attached to this IAD N O T E The term voice VC refers to VC 22 More generally VC 22 is the high priority VC on the CE150 It should be used for any delay sensitive traffic including voice and video In the downstream direction the CE150 gives
130. P Addr 10 0 21 2 Net mask 32 DSLAM IP Addr 10 0 21 0 PII 1 4 13 Net mask 26 Voi VC 22 Pll 1 2 1 21 OES Gateway IP Addr 10 0 21 1 HDIA Netmodel Configuring IP Addresses and Netmasks When you perform a get you will see this table Make sure the object CMCPCompatible shows a setting of Yes If it does not perform another Set command with CMCPCompatible Yes CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 4 13 Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 4 13 0 PII 1 4 13 0 IfIndex 1 4 13 0 Name we GroupName oun AdditionallInfo oun NetModel HDIA TpAddr 10 0 20 2 NetMask 255 255 255 255 MacAddr 0 60 58 1 43 12 BurnedInMacAddr 0 60 58 1 43 12 FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPII 1 2 1 20 CMCPCompatible Yes EncapsulationType rfcl483 FwdMode HDIA Pix 15 ServiceClass D 150 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Set the VC for data for DHCP You are configuring the CE150 so that it can dynamically assign an IP address to the host on the data VC You are assuming the existence of a DHCP server upstream from the CE150 and its default router CRAFT gt set cmdhcp 1 4 13 22 ipaddress 10 0 21 2 netmask 255 255 255 255 function dhcpforward serveripaddr 10 0 25 2 When you perform a get you will see this table CRAFT gt get cmdhcp 1 4 13 22 Group cmDHCPTable Instance 1 4 13 22 PILE 1 4 13 22 RowStatus Active IpAddress 10 0 20 2 NetMask 255 295 2950 DefaultRo
131. PTable for that DSL PII the CE150 passes the re quest to the upstream router or DHCP server The DHCP re quest is not modified the Relay Agent Information and Client Identifier fields are not inserted in the message Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 83 When the netmodel is IP the CPE or premise LAN host cannot obtain an IP address from the upstream DHCP server The CE150 simply drops the response it receives from the upstream DHCP server Cross Connect HDIA VWAN and CopperVPN Netmodels When the netmodel is Cross Connect HDIA VWAN or Copper VPN you can configure the CE150 to act as a DHCP Server or as a DHCP Forwarding Agent for a port or VC The CE150 as a DHCP Server For CMCP CPEs The CE150 responds to DHCP requests from CMCP CPEs for which there is an entry in the cmDHCPTable e The CE150 generates a response based on the configured objects in the cmDHCPTable and sends the response back to the DSL port that it arrived on For hosts on the premise LAN The CE150 forwards the DHCP requests to an upstream DHCP router which is responsible for sending the request to the appropriate DHCP server The Forwarding function is described on page 85 For non CMCP CPEs and hosts on the premise LAN e The CE150 responds to DHCP requests from non CMCP CPEs for which there is an entry in the cmDHCPTable e However the CE150 cannot differentiate between DHCP requests coming from non CMCP CPEs or hosts on the p
132. Poe eet vealed Caged eae aces 93 Viewing Filters ariii aceasta eee AATE bi ENEA EEE EAT e DRR 94 Specifying Activating and Deleting Filters 95 Filter Criteria sera ns decay RTS A aaa eh dae casera RA A athe 96 Chaining Filters 000 cee eee 97 Specifying Filters 0 er ee eee eee 97 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide xi Chapter 5 Chapter 6 DSLIMUX oe ada a anata aeons Heke ead ees 99 Configuring an IMUX Bundle 0000 cece eens 100 DSL Voice and Data Service 000000 c eee eee 102 Class of Service 0 0 0c 102 Priority Queuing sesanan eee 103 Radius Authentication 0 0 eee ee 104 Preparing to Configure CopperEdge for Radius Servers 104 Configuring Radius Servers for CopperEdge 106 Configuring CopperEdge for Radius Servers 107 Saving Valss take olka Seetisigia bead Sido Pads red a Haste 108 Restarting the System n saaa 0 00 cece eee 109 Gontiguring BackUp i edsisteeh Hes ae a E naan ne sia sie 110 Backing Up the Saved Config File 0000000 110 Restoring a Backed Up Configuration 0 00000 111 Routing Forwarding Managing LINKS 3 sites kee ee ee ed ea 113 Fedes are nce a a dade BR el deed Wedel a Ss Bae eee 114 DS3 Frame Relay Module 0 0000 e eee eee eee 114 DS3 ATM Module 00 000 c eee eee 114 DS1 Frame Relay Module or Quad T
133. Port Translations 0 0 0 00 0000000 eee 223 DSL VC Translations 0 0 00 cece eens 223 AppendixB cmliface Configuration 00000 cece eee eee 225 Data Forwarding Configuration 0000 cece eee eee 225 The cmlifaceTable 00 000 cee eee 228 Permanent Interface Identifier 22005 228 Cmlface ObDj6ctS iach a agara ae ak ede ed teed aad 229 Automatic Creation of WAN VC cmiface Entries 230 IP Netmodel arati sath aaah eed Bede als aA AA pas 231 Pulls ROVING era aera as eee ete aati dates Bete 231 DSL and Ethernet interfaces 00 eeu ae 231 WAN VC interfaces 0000 cece eee 231 Policy to WAN VC IP Routing 0000ee eee 231 Policy to Ethernet IP Routing 20 00 eae ee aes 232 VWAN Netmodel 0 0000 cee eee 232 Cross Connect Netmodel 00000 cece eee eens 233 VC to VC Frame Forwarding 00000ee eee eeee 233 HDLC to VC Frame Forwarding 20 20 e0eee 233 PPP Frame Conversion 0 0 00 e eee n eee eas 233 CopperVPN Netmodel 0 000 cece ee eee eee eee 234 DS imtenace ss sc e Aa T sca ete K eben hacks 234 WAN VC interfaces 00 0 cee ees 234 HDIA Netmodel 000 000 eee eee 235 Appendix C Event and Alarm Reference 20000eeeeeeee 237 Alarm Sis 2 cet ae Rasta cays yaaa Yad ob ansaid aa a a ats 238 Alarm Clearing Notifications
134. This is because bcMax and BE are expressed as absolute values fixed number of bits transmitted over the commitment interval peri od while CIR and Access Rate are expressed in bits per second Setting CIR Parameters for Frame Relay PVCs By default the CIR setting on newly created WAN PVCs is zero The default value of bcMax is also zero In this case ExcessBurst automatically assumes the value of the Speed object in the IfT able Thus Speed in this instance may be considered as synon ymous with Access Rate as shown in the preceding illustration N O T E Congestion management parameters CIR bcMax and BE are not configurable for DSL VCs Since there is no enforcement of CIR on the receive side of WAN VCs bandwidth commitments cannot be assigned or honored on the transmit side of the corresponding DSL VCs With the factory default settings every frame is technically dis card eligible But as frames will not normally be discarded un less the Access Rate is exceeded the default scenario represents the most conservative situation If you decide to configure the congestion management parame ters to a value other than the default then we recommend that you first agree upon appropriate values for CIR bcMax and BE with your network provider To set the information commitment parameters all three of the relevant objects must be set as part of the same command to ensure that all three are simultaneously applied For example
135. Thus this document puts greatest emphasis on those methods For information on the CopperView Element Manager and its graphic user interface see the CopperView Element Manager Installation and Operation Guide CopperCraft Login As the CE150 boots the Copper Mountain Networks copyright and system information is displayed followed by the user name prompt Copper Mountain Networks CopperEdge200 Copyright 1996 2001 All Rights Reserved System Name Tech Pubs Build Date Feb 27 2001 20 29 54 USERNAME gt To log in enter admin for both user name and password USERNAME gt admin PASSWORD gt Once you are logged in the factory default command line prompt is displayed 44 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide ce150 1 3 gt This default prompt consists of the system name ce150 as de fined in the Name object of the cmSystemTable plus the slot number of the active System Control Module 1 3 Since all CE150s initially have this default prompt we recommend you change the system name in the cmSystemTable to a more meaningful name You cannot change the slot number In this manual we show the command line prompt as CRAFT gt CopperCraft Logout When you are ready to log out of the system enter exit quit or logout If you changed any system settings and did not save the config uration the following prompt is displayed CE configuration has been changed Save the configuratio
136. Transmitting and Receiving Loopback Messages To determine the exact location of the fault system administra tors must use the OAM fault management function on one or both of the devices at the endpoints of the connection Admin istrators can set a device to automatically send Requests for Loopback cells to a device at the other end of the connection on a regular basis or they can set a device to send Requests for Loopback cells on a manual basis Then administrators can read the counters for Requests for Loopback cells and the counters for Responses to Loopback Requests But to locate the fault if the connection has multiple segments someone must look at the counters for Requests and Responses on devices located on intervening segments The fault on the connection will be between the last device to receive Requests for Loopback cells and the first device to not receive those same Requests for Loopback cells Node A Node B Node C Node D Loopback No Loopback Request Response No Loopback Loopback Response Request End Point PENES End Point After a specified interval a Loopback Failure occurs Lookback Request No Response Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 89 Configuring the OAM Function To configure the OAM function first configure the ATM WAN port then the WAN VC and finally the OAM object itself l Configure the ATM WAN port for AdminStatus using the object group IfTable
137. WAN combinations CE150 Chassis Ethernet WAN CE150 Chassis Quad T1 Frame WAN CE150 Chassis DS 3 ATM WAN CE150 Chassis DS 3 Frame WAN e One or two DSL line modules installed in the chassis e One AC or DC power module installed in the chassis e Removable Fan Assembly e Cables e Optional mounting kit for rack installation e User documentation Chapter 2 Installation 19 Rack Installation The CE150 can be installed with attachment hardware for ei ther 19 inch EIA or 23 inch Telco CO style racks The standard configuration is 19 inch ears for mounting although the CE150 has rubber feet on the bottom for sitting on a table A typical rack mount installation is shown in the following dia gram y PEN EEEE Yy 000000000000000 000000000000000000000000 Start with the bottom two screws on both sides of the chassis o0o00000000000000000000090000000000000000 X mh o g A Typical Rack Mount Installation 20 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Wall Brackets The CE150 can also be mounted flat against a wall using two brackets attached to the wall In this position the LEDs and connectors for diagnostics ports craft ports and WAN ports are facing the ceiling The connectors for DSL links are facing the floor Four screws two for each of the brackets attach the
138. a single DSL link comprises a bridge group the FwdMode object in the cmlIface group is VWAN POINT TO POINT When the Ethernet port is configured as the destination WAN interface the Fwd Mode object is always VWAN BRIDGED even for a single mem ber group Configuration of VWAN links must be coordinated with the tele com datacom management at the far end of the upstream link An IRB capable router with a compatible operating system IOS version must be installed at the far end The following procedure provides a model for end to end config uration of an SDSL subscriber for VWAN using a Frame Relay WAN link Configuration of the network port for VWAN over Ethernet appears in Chapter 5 1 Configure the DSL interface for VWAN and specify the outbound facility to use 2 Remember that for a Frame Relay or ATM WAN interface the DESTPII object includes the number Frame Relay DLCI or ATM Virtual Link that identifies the associated virtual circuit For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel vwan encapsulationtype rfc1483 destpii 1 2 1 27 Set Successful CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 4 1 Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 4 1 0 PII 1 4 1 0 IfIndex 1 4 1 0 Name Zebra GroupName X ray AdditionallInfo Comp account NetModel VWAN IpAddr 0 0 0 0 NetMask 0 0 0 0 MacAddr 0 60 58 1 0 36 BurnedInMacAddr 0 77 62 18 63 bc FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPii 1 2 1 27 CMCPCompatible Yes EncapsulationType
139. ables Tables HOST ou 2 CPE 2 Telco SF Router Bridge Router Route E Tables LA Router IP Netmodel Chapter 7 ADSL G lite and G dmt 161 Configuring the G dmt and G lite Data Network The procedure for configuring the CE150 and CPEs for a Cross Connect netmodel with PPP is different from the procedure for configuring them for a full IP netmodel But in both cases it is best to start with the WAN VCs and their upstream routers Then work your way down to the DSL ports and link them to the WAN VCs Finally configure the CPE routers or CPE bridges and the hosts connected to them The procedures for configuring the CPE routers or CPE bridges and the attached hosts however will vary according to the type and brand of CPE router or bridge and the type of operating system running on the host But sev eral basic steps are always present Cross Connect Netmodel In the Cross Connect netmodel with PPP the end points of the VCs must be manually configured for each stage in the link See the diagram below VCs on the Telco router going to the CE150 must be mapped to VCs on the WAN interface of the CE150 WAN VCs on one side of the DSLAM must be mapped to the DSL VCs on the other side And finally VCs on the DSL interface going to the CPE router must be mapped to VCs on the CPE For each PPP link the procedure must be repeated A new WAN VC must be cre ated for each new DSL VC In the following diagram only one DSL port and
140. ackets go to the location specified Since CopperVPN DSL interfaces specify a static endpoint the DestPID their FwdMode is always CopperVPN 4 At the far end of the CopperVPN link the upstream router configure the router to specify the VC 5 In the sample config txt file for a Cisco Systems router the settings are the same as for the VWAN netmodel but without IRB functionality IP addresses are assigned on the subinterface in its place version 11 2 no service udp small servers no service tcp small servers hostname MegaFonsInc enable password admin I frame relay switching 1 interface Ethernet0 ip address 192 168 11 255 255 2559 20 interface Serial0 no ip address encapsulation frame relay IETF no keepalive ignore dcd frame relay intf type dce 1 interface Serial0 1 point to point frame relay interface dlci 22 ip address 192 168 2 1 255 255 255 0 interface Serial0 2 point to point frame relay interface dlci 23 ip address 192 168 3 1 255 255 255 0 interface Serial0 3 point to point frame relay interface dlici 24 ip address 192 168 4 1 255 255 255 0 interface Serial no ip address encapsulation frame relay IETF no keepalive ignore dcd shutdown no ip classless ip route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 254 1 snmp server community public RO line con line aux line vty line vty FeO Om Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 71 Cross Connect Netmodel The
141. al Radius server skip the next section The SNMP Community names will be created on the Radius server Create the SNMP Community Names To use CopperView AMS CopperView EM or another SNMP based manager you must first configure two operators any community names but typically public and private The first operator must have the View privilege and the second must have the Provision privilege They are to be used in the Read Community and Write Community login prompts respectively To create the Public community name 1 From the control console enter the name context state and operator privilege level CRAFT gt set cmoperator public state create context snmp privilege view Set Successful 2 Verify the configuration CRAFT gt get cmoperator public Group cmOperator Instance public Name public Password KK RK KKK State Active Context SNMP Privilege View Chapter 3 Initial Configuration 55 To create the Private community name 1 From the control console enter the name context state and operator privilege level CRAFT gt set cmoperator private state create context snmp privilege provision Set Successful 2 Verify the configuration CRAFT gt get cmoperator private Group cmOperator Instance private Name private Password KKKKKKKKKK State Active Context SNMP Privilege Provision System Information Although not essential for operation you should identif
142. als connectors timing and handshaking are defined It can also refer to the procedures codes and protocols that enable a connection and exchange of informa tion between two entities IP address Internet Protocol address A 32 bit address assigned to hosts using TCP IP The address is written as four octets that denote the addressee s network subnet and host location IRB Integrated Router Bridge A special oper ating mode of certain routers that allows the router to support virtual bridge groups and which thus enables the CE150 Virtual Wide Area Network VWAN capability ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network A CCITT standard for a digital network as imple mented and delivered by telecommunications common carriers Appendix F Glossary 269 L LAN Local Area Network A short distance network used to link computers and peripheral devices under standard control LANs allow users to access centralized servers and anyone on the LAN can send messages to and work jointly with others on the LAN LCV Line Coding Violation a class of DS3 error LMI Local Management Interface A Frame Relay specification related to information exchange between network devices bridges routers etc LOS DS1 and DS3 Loss of signal message MAC address Media Access Control address A unique 48 bit character string address per manently assigned to an individual device at the time of manufacture Mbps Megabits per second
143. always be clearly marked on the outside of the package to ensure the fastest possible repair or replacement 216 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Appendix A Overview of Data Encapsulation As the capabilities of the CopperEdge product family have grown to embrace an ever wider pool of users and service pro viders the number of supported protocols and encapsulations has grown as well The diagrams presented below and on the following page provide a graphic representation of each of the encapsulation types supported in Version 2 1 which interfaces and networking models they apply to and how they resemble and differ from each other Appendix A Overview of Data Encapsulation 217 DSL Port Encapsulations ae te on E Ethemet flag DLCI 16 ernet frame CRC flag ar he i rao R te Optional lor2 PPP HDLC EEN PPP information ea Frame Relay WAN VC Encapsulations 1483 FUNI HDLC HDLC Ethernet Q 922 jaa AA 03 00 80 C2 00 07 00 00 Ethernet frame CRC flag 1483 FUNI HDLC HDLC IP Q 922 jaa AA 03 00 00 00 08 00 IP packet CRC fag 1490 HDLC Q 922 03 00 soloo 80 c2 00 07 Ethernet frame crc HPLC Ethernet flag flag 1490 ap fae Q 922 03 CC IP packet HDLC None Cae Q 922 VC payload vere variable 218 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide ATM WAN VC Encapsulations variable ee VC payload pad AALS trailer variable 14 variable 1483 IP
144. ames and object values In a Set command you will be assigning values to multiple objects In these situations separate different objects and their values from each other with spaces as follows CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 24 netmodel vwan destpii 1 2 1 500 encapsulationtype rfc1483 cmcpcompatible yes Chapter 3 Initial Configuration 49 You can enter multiple Get commands on the same line by separating them with a semicolon as in the following example CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 4 24 get iftable 1 2 1 109 Any of the CopperCraft object names can be truncated up to the point of its shortest unique character string For example in the sample Set command above cmIface could be abbreviated to cmif and iffable could be abbreviated to ifta Some object names may also be entered using a shorter alias Alias strings that differ from the object name and that consist of something other than a truncated version of the name are shown in the MIB definition tables in the CopperEdge 150 Cop perCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Whenever you assign IP addresses or subnet masks for the CE150 accuracy is essential always issue a Get command to verify the entry when you are done The CE150 will report an error if you try to assign the same IP address to more than one of its interfaces but it does not currently report an error if two IP addresses for the same subnet are assigned to separate in terfaces 50 Copp
145. and traffic trans mitted over the DSL port Priority Queuing without regard to the data rates on the various DSL links Class of Service This function applies to packets received by the DSL ports on the CE150 It allows you to assign a level or class of service to each of the DSL ports using cmIface When you indicate the netmodel the net mask and the IP address for a DSL port you also can enter a class of service for it Typically you will give a DSL port carrying voice a higher level of service than a DSL port carrying regular IP data traffic The CE150 allows you to set four levels of service A B C and D where A is the highest class and D is the lowest The default is D The relative weight of each of the levels or classes is con figured using the cmServiceClass MIB group For more infor mation on how these relative weights are derived and how they affect their assigned interfaces see the description in the cm ServiceClass MIB group definition in the CopperEdge 150 Cop perCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Once configured the value selected as the weight for a particu lar class of service is the same for that class for every DSL port to which it is applied For example CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 5 24 Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 5 24 0 PII 1 5 24 0 IfIndex 1 5 24 0 Name GroupName AdditionaliInfo Se EEN NetModel IP IpAddr 172 20 1 2 NetMask 255 255 255 0 MacAddr 0 60 58 1 0
146. ane of the front panel module inserted position e Check the retainer screws on all plug in modules and assemblies including the fan tray and the alarm module Use your fingers to tighten any loose screws until they are snug e Check all connectors to be sure they are correctly installed and fastened securely This completes the physical installation Chapter 2 Installation 37 Power Up LED Sequence Before you connect power to the CE150 read this section so you will understand the LED start up sequence Power Up LED Sequence After you turn on the CE150 the LEDs follow this start up se quence l On the AC Power Module slot 7 the Module Status LED is lit with a green color As power is applied Module Status LEDs on the Buffer Control Module and on the SDSL Modules cycle as follows Red for second Orange for 1 2 second Green for 1 2 second Normal Start up After the cycle described in Step 2 the Buffer Control Module Status LED turns red and then begins to blink As the initialization process ends usually taking less than a minute the status LED changes to a rapidly flickering green On the SDSL Modules the Module Status LEDs turn amber while software is being downloaded to them from the System Control Module then switch to steady green If software is being installed After the cycle described in Step 2 the status LEDs turn a steady amber until the software download begins While th
147. aratus that com plies with Canadian ICES 003 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide v United States FCC Part 68 Telecommunications Notice The Copper Mountain CE 150 DSL Concentrator Modem complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the backside of the CE 150 is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the Telephone Company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the tele phone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the device not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the REN contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area This equipment cannot be used on telephone company provided coin service Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs This equipment uses the following Universal Service Order Code USOC jack RJ 11C This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible jack that is FCC Part 68 compliant An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company wi
148. ards in the CE150 s chassis CRAFT gt getall cmboard Here is an example of a longer Set command which sets the pa rameters on an ATM quality of service table CRAFT gt set cmcircuitparam 6 rowstatus createandgo servicecategory nrtvbr pcr 104000 scr 604 mbs 4 cdv unspecified The line editor function on the CopperCraft CLI lets you recall as many as 20 previous commands from the system s memory buffer You can move through the command lines and edit them before you press Enter and send the command to the system To display the list of valid Line Editor commands press esc at the system prompt CRAFT gt D Delete current character DEL Delete current character H Backspace E End of line A Beginning of line Escape F Forward one word Escape B Backward one word SK Delete to end of line U Delete to beginning of line SUCK Delete entire line L Redisplay current line Left Arrow Cursor left Right Arrow Cursor right Up Arrow Scroll up through history R Scroll up through history Down Arrow Scroll down through history N Scroll down through history Control characters are shown with a caret Press and hold the Control key press the letter key then release both keys Escape sequences are indicated by the word Escape Press and release the Escape key and then press the letter key If you are using a terminal emulator be sure to set it to VT100 mode If a command line will not fit on a single
149. ask 255 255 255 192 encapsulationtype rfc1483 farendaddr 10 0 21 1 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 5 13 netmodel hdia ipaddr 10 0 20 2 netmask 255 255 255 255 destpii 1 2 1 20 encapsulationtype rfc1483 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 5 13 22 netmodel hdia ipaddr 10 0 21 2 netmask 255 255 255 255 destpii 1 2 1 21 encapsulationtype ip 1490 Appendix B cmlface Configuration 235 236 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Appendix C Event and Alarm Reference This appendix contains an alphabetic reference listing of all CE150 events divided into subsections for Alarms Alarm Clearing Notifications and Event Notifications For descriptions of the groups and objects see the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Appendix C Event and Alarm Reference 237 Alarms Type AtmVccDown Severity Minor Description Sent by the System Control Module when an ATM WAN VC OperState causes changes to one of the fault conditions Information included in the event PII of the VC VPI of the VC VCI of the VC Operational status of the VC Cause of the operational status Cleared by AtmVccUp Trap Enterprise BoardDown Major Sent by the System Control Module when a board stops responding to polls Information included in the event Index Cleared by BoardUp Trap cmBoardDown BootFileFail Major Sent when a file download request from a board is not suc cessful
150. asswords through a local database inter nal to the CE150 the cmOperator MIB group For more infor mation about the cmOperator group see the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual The initial tasks to be performed include e Create at least one unique operator name and password e Change the password for the factory default operator name admin e If your system will be managed locally not through an external Radius server and an SNMP manager will be used create the SNMP Community names Note the following restrictions for entering operator usernames and passwords e Do not use the following characters backslash double quotes or ending bracket The CE150 may misinterpret them as other commands e The character is not allowed e Spaces are not allowed in UserName strings If first and last names are needed use upper case or an underscore to separate them JohnDoe or john_doe e Passwords are not completely case sensitive the first character of a password may be accepted regardless of case The system is case sensitive to all successive password characters In addition to the username and password you will set the op erator s context authorizing system access through SNMP nonSNMP or All and Privilege level View Monitor or Provi sion Only one operator the Security Administrator is allowed the highest privilege level Security The default operator ad
151. ault is 17 seconds it has a range of 1 to 999 seconds Reset it if necessary OAMLBInterval specifies how often a Loopback Request will be sent until either a Loopback Response is received or a timeout occurs If no response is received before timeout the OAMState object indicates a loopback failure 4 Check the OAMLBTimeOut object Its default is 18 it has a range of 1 to 999 seconds Reset it if necessary to a longer period OAMLBTimeOut specifies how long Loopback Requests will be sent The timeout period must always be longer than the interval period With this configuration the OAM function will send out period ic f5End2End Loopback requests to the device on the far end of the network If the device at the far end receives the requests if no breaks exist on the connection it will return Loopback re sponses during each period If the device on the near end does not receive a response before the timeout period end it records a loopback failure in the OAMState object Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 91 Manual Loopback Requests The manual loopback function will operate only when the port and the VC are UP the OAMAdminState function is Enabled and a command for the OAMManualLBCmd object has been sent It will operate at the periods specified in the Interval and Timeout objects that you either accepted or changed in the configuration of automatic loopback requests The success or failure of a manually sent loopbac
152. based IP Routing With this variation on the IP netmodel the CE150 is able to route inbound packets according to the IP address of the origi nation device and outbound packets regardless of IP address to a designated interface on the CE150 Two types of interfaces exist e In IP Policy over a WAN interface packets outbound from the CPE are routed to a destination WAN port interface usually an ATM VC or Frame Relay PVC on the CE150 In IP Policy Over Ethernet packets outbound from the CPE are routed to a specific LAN host device through the CE150 Ethernet port To configure interfaces for Policy based IP routes and to estab lish WAN virtual circuits for IP Policy follow the procedures in the IP Policy Over WAN on page 119 64 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide VWAN Netmodel With this netmodel subscriber links act as wide area exten sions of a remote LAN or other private network Packets can be exchanged over an ATM or Frame Relay virtual circuit or as MAC PDUs over the CE150 s Ethernet port VWAN is a layer 2 LAN extension to an upstream router The VWAN netmodel requires an upstream IRB router allowing the CE150 and the router together to function as a virtual bridge Hosts on the LANs on the downstream side of the CPEs become remote or wide area extensions of a private LAN on the upstream side of the router N O T E Enabling VWAN in the CE150 depends on a specific operating mode of certain
153. brackets to the wall They are 34 inch wood screws intended for installa tion into 34 inch plywood Six screws three on each end of the CE150 attach the CE150 to the brackets A cable clamp also attaches to the back of the CE150 It sup ports the power cable keeping it from being accidentally pulled out of the power connector g CE150 with Brackets for Wall Installation For detailed instructions see the Mounting Instructions in the tear out template at the back of this manual Rear Panel Connectors The rear panel of the CE150 is a sheet of clear acrylic separat ed from the circuit backplane by metal standoffs In cutouts on the sheet of plastic are a series of connectors Chapter 2 Installation 21 Also just below and to the side of the 120 VAC power is a screw for attaching the cable clamp that supports the power cord or 48 VDC power cables Rear View of the CE150 Metal Standoff Ground Connection JP1 iS 2 lt Cell 3 8 Z lt 48 Vdc Power Connection 120 Vac Power Connection and Switch Rear Panel Power and Ground Connections N O T E Either the 48 VDC or the 120 VAC power may be used but not both 22 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 120 VAC Power Connection for North America Connection of the CE150 to 120 VAC Mains is provided by an IEC 320 power con
154. chapter describes the procedures used to plan and config ure networks for voice over SDSL and T1 line modules It dis cusses the configuration of DSL and WAN interfaces using different netmodels along with in the case of Integrated Access Devices IADs configuration of both voice and data subnets on a single port An IAD serving both voice and data circuits in contrast to a CPE serving only data circuits requires a dual netmodel and dual pathways over the IAD and the CE150 Chapter 6 Voice over DSL 135 Overview of VoDSL In delivering digitized voice over SDSL or T1 the CE150 is able to work with a series of different ADs on local loops and a se ries of different voice gateways on DS 1s DS 3s and OC 3s At present the CE150 is able to interface with voice gateways from a number of other manufacturers Signaling Protocols Two signaling protocols for call setup and for voice communica tions over the CE150 exist GR 303 and Media Gateway Control Protocol MGCP Some IADs are able to work only with the GR 303 protocol others are able to work only the MGCP standard A few IADs such as Copper Mountain s CR408 CR508 and CR5O8T are able to work with gateways using either the GR 303 or the MGCP standard But if the CopperMountain IADs have code compatible with GR 303 you must download new code to make them compatible with MGCP and vice versa Service Architecture Two types of service architecture for carryin
155. chine refers to the comput er such as a PC that you are using to control and manage the installation of new upgraded software We assume that your local machine is provisioned with suitable FTP and Telnet ap plications and that you are familiar with their use N O T E Although you are upgrading a CE150 unit the names of the directories are ce200 and ce200 Appendix D Upgrading System Software 249 Software Upgrade Overview While specific software upgrades may have unique aspects the basic tasks and their sequence include the following steps as illustrated in the following diagram The numbers in the dia gram correspond to the numbered step 1 Local Machine newce200 LS som Fite Code 11 4 a OE Me ce200 ce200 scm File scm Fite File Code Currently Running Version Loaded Version Backup of Previously Directory Structure for Software Upgrade 1 On the local machine prepare a mirror of the CE150 directories containing the new software 2 Telnet to the CE150 and save its current configuration this updates the Config file Exit the Telnet session and then FTP to the CE150 4 Rename the backup directory to deactivate it rename ce200 to ce200bu 250 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 5 Rename the current directory to make it the new backup directory rename ce200 to ce200 6 Set the FTP
156. citly configure your WAN VCs to be sure all the parameters are set as you expect 230 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide IP Netmodel This section assumes you are familiar with the networking con cepts of IP and the CE150 s IP capabilities It provides details of how to configure the IP functions of the CE150 The IP net model is supported on DSL ports Ethernet ports and WAN VC interfaces Full IP Routing DSL and Ethernet interfaces The CE150 treats DSL interfaces the same as Ethernet interfac es because in IP netmodel the DSL link acts as a long cable to the CPE s Ethernet interface The CE150 requires you to con figure IP subnets on DSL and Ethernet interfaces You must specify the NetModel IpAddr NetMask and Encapsulation ob jects For example CRAFT gt craft gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel ip ipaddr 10 0 0 1 netmask 255 0 0 0 encapsulationtype rfc1483 WAN VC interfaces The CE150 treats WAN VCs as unnumbered IP point to point links Unnumbered links have no subnet on them and each end may have an IP address You can assign addresses to either end of the VC both ends or neither end To assign an IP ad dress to the CE150 s end of the VC set the IpAddr object The NetMask is ignored for WAN VCs because there is no subnet associated with a WAN VC To assign an IP address to the far end of a WAN VC set the farEndAddr object Note that for the CE150 to route a packet to a WAN VC one end or t
157. ckup Directories 1 Initiate an FTP session to the CE150 and log in C gt ftp DSLAM_IpAddress Connected to DSLAM_IpAddress User lt DSLAM_IpAddress lt none gt gt 2 Enter admin when you are asked for the user name and password 3 Check the current directory structure ftp gt dir 200 Port set okay 150 Opening ASCII mode data connection size date time name 512 Nov 09 2099 12 08 08 CE200 lt DIR gt 512 Nov 09 2099 12 08 08 CE200 lt DIR gt 1024 bytes 1248768 bytes free 226 Transfer complete 252 bytes received in 0 00 seconds lt 252000 00 Kbytes sec gt Note that two directories are listed with similar names ce200 and ce200 ce200 minus The ce200 directory contains the code and supporting files for the last version of the software that ran on this CE150 before the version currently installed If the CE150 is unable to boot from its current software contained in the ce200 directory it automatically looks for the ce200 directory and tries to boot using the previous software version Appendix D Upgrading System Software 253 4 Rename the ce200 directory to ce200bu This version of the software is now obsolete and is about to be replaced ftp gt rename ce200 ce200bu 350 Accepted source filename Ready for destination name 354 Rename done 5 Rename the ce200 directory to ce200 The current code is now designated as the backup ftp gt rename ce200 ce200 350 Accepted source filename Rea
158. complex control master The single SCM in a CE sys tem that is the point of egress for all user data traffic to the WAN and the point of operator management of the system control module The System Control Module SCM or Buffer Control Module BCM CopperCraft Copper Mountain s product name for its embedded command line software that utilizes an SNMP like command language to configure and monitor performance of DSL and other ports on the CE150 CopperVPN Copper Mountain s name for a networking model by which subscribers are aggregated into a virtual private network of DSL links connecting transparently with a remote LAN or corporate network but without reliance on any special capabilities or software in router devices connected to the CoppperVPN circuit CPE Customer Premise Equipment Telecom munications equipment that resides at the subscriber s location Copper Mountain s Cop perRocket 201 SDSL Modem is one type of CPE D datagram A message unit that contains source and destination address information as well as the data itself which is routed through a packet switched network DCE Data Communication Equipment In defining interface standards for connection of equipment to a network the classification of a device as Data Communications Equipment typically a modem or printer or Data Terminal Equipment typically a computer or remote ter minal device determines the wiring of the interface connector
159. connector 17 RJ 14 cable 265 RJ 21 connector 138 RJ 21X connector 26 RJ 45 connector 6 16 32 RJ45 connectors 29 RJ 48C connector 7 RJ 48C modular jack 36 RoleChanged alarm 241 routing table 57 RS232Port class 179 S SCM See System Control Module SCM 1 and SCM 2 Ethernet port pinouts 29 SCMRestart command 49 210 SDSL module features 7 SDSL10xModule class 178 SDSL10xModule 1 class 178 SDSL30xModule class 178 SDSL30xModule 24 class 178 SDSLPort class 179 Security filtering 8 serial A B switch 17 serial modem cable 17 Shelf class 178 SMB connectors 17 35 specifications AC Power module 5 ADSL G dmt module 7 ADSL G lite module 7 Buffer Control Module 7 Buffer Control Module 2 7 CopperEdge physical dimensions 5 DC Power module 5 DSL hardware 5 input power 5 operating environment 5 SDSL module 7 System Control Module 1 and 2 6 System Control Module 3 6 static strap 17 Status LEDs System Control Module 3 173 Support class 180 System class 178 System Control Module replace 211 Status LEDs 173 System Control Module WAN replace 211 System Control Module 1 and 2 analog modem port 31 Craft serial port 29 Diagnostic port 29 Ethernet port 29 System Control Module 1 and 2 features 6 System Control Module 3 analog modem port 34 Craft serial port 33 Diagnostic port 33 Ethernet port 33 features 6 system information clock 108 cmSystem 108 Sys
160. cpeiad Index CurrentIpAddr CurrentCAIpAddr SavedIpAddr SavedCAIpAddr NumVoicePorts NumConnections Command TOSByte LogAction LogType LogLevel LogDuration TotalMsgsLogged TracelMask Trace2Mask Instance CPE 1 13 2 CPE 1 13 2 10 1071 5 1041011 10 10 1 45 10 10 1 1 8 16 None 10 None 0 0 30 0 0 0 3 Since LogAction None there should be no messages logged in the cmCpeLogTable CRAFT gt geta cmcpelog No more instances 4 Turn on the debug message logging feature for the duration of the timer set in the LogDuration object CRAFT gt set cmcpeiad cpe 1 5 2 logaction startdebug Set Successful When the timer expires the LogAction object is automatically set to StopDebug and messages are no longer logged 204 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 5 Select a log type by entering either the text or the bit number for the text CRAFT gt set cmcpeiad cpe 1 5 2 logtype dhcp OR CRAFT gt set cmcpeiad cpe 1 5 2 logtype 4 Set Successful 6 Specify the message levels to be logged by entering either the text or the bit numbers for the text CRAFT gt set cmcpeiad cpe 1 5 2 loglevel 0 1 2 OR CRAFT gt set cmcpeiad cpe 1 5 2 loglevel infoterror detail other Set Successful 7 Optional You can change the timer for logging messages for example from 30 minutes to 10 minutes CRAFT gt set cmcpeiad cpe 1 5 2 logduration 10 Set Successful 8 For this example we can generate some
161. d DSL module SDSL ADSL G lite or G dmt or T1 If there is a difference in the way one or the other types of DSL modules behave or what they require it will be ex plicitly specified Chapter 3 Initial Configuration 43 System Configuration Guidelines Configuration of the CE150 is accomplished by entering SNMP like commands to modify the Management Information Base MIB This section contains instructions for querying and con figuring the CE150 as part of the installation process Accessing the CE150 You can log in to the CE150 using the Command Line Interface CLI or the Graphical User Interface GUI e You can use CopperView or some other SNMP based NMS to remotely configure the CE150 e You can use a LAN and a telnet session to access the CLI to remotely configure the CE150 e You can use a terminal or terminal emulator to the Craft serial port on the SCM front panel and then employ the CLI to configure the CE150 on site To access the CopperCraft command line interface the CLI through your PC COM port use Hyperterminal or an equivalent terminal emulation application Set the serial port rate to 9600 bps 8 N 1 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit Ifyou want to use flow control choose the hardware RTS CTS settings CE150 installation on site verification and establishment of upstream data links are normally done using the CopperCraft interface either through direct connection method or through Telnet
162. d to this CE150 the CPEs may also need to have their software updated CopperRockets as well as some third party CPEs consult the manufacturer s documentation for each equipment type may be upgraded by downloading software from the CE150 individ ually using cmCPEBoard Upgrade command or in groups us ing cmEndPointConfig For CPEs with unique capabilities IMUX Multilink or IAD de vices used with derived voice applications use the special in structions in CPE Upgrades from an External Server on page 262 Upgrading the CPE software is service affecting for the CPE be ing upgraded During the upgrade process communication with the CPE will be interrupted while it reboots downloads and installs its new code and then reboots from the new soft ware Should the CPE fail to train using the new code the CPE will reboot and request a new download Upgrading an Individual CPE Depending on the PROM version installed some CopperRocket 201 CPEs do not have the 1 568 Mbps data rate hard coded in their CPE PROM If you are performing upgrades of individual CR201s be sure to perform the entire procedure below To upgrade individual CPEs other than CR201 however simply issue the upgrade command shown in step 2 1 Set the SDSL Module Port to any data rate other than 1 568Mbps CopperEdge gt set cmhdslmodem pii datarate 784 2 Issue the upgrade command to the CPE CopperEdge gt set cmcpeboard cpe pii command upgrade
163. de of PPP translation As with other per VC encapsulations the DSL VC s forwarding mode is the same as that of the cross con nected WAN VC To configure DSL RFC 1973 to WAN RFC 1973 1 Set the netmodel and encapsulation on the DSL port CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 5 1 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype rfc1973 2 Create the cmSublface row and set the WAN destination PII CRAFT gt set cmsubiface 1 5 1 20 destpii 1 2 1 100 3 Set the WAN VC encapsulation CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 100 encapsulationtype rfc1973 After configuration both WAN VC 1 3 1 100 and DSL VC 1 6 1 20 have a forwarding mode of PPP transparent Per Port Forwarding Modes The Cross Connect netmodel per port forwarding modes result from a DSL encapsulation that defines the DSL port as a single logical interface that does not support VCs Encapsulations on DSL and WAN VCs for Per Port Forwarding DSL Line Card WAN Forwarding Mode Encapsulation Type Encapsulation g PPP HDLC Frame RFC 1973 PPP HDLC 1973 PPP HDLC Frame None HDLC VC payload 76 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide PPP HDLC Forwarding Modes The Cross Connect netmodel supports PPP HDLC encapsula tion which is valid only for DSL ports not for WAN VCs The forwarding mode in the previous table applies to both the DSL port and the WAN VC PPP HDLC RFC 1662 is a point to point protocol that allows a DSL port on the CE150 to receive PPP H
164. dem cable 29 O Object classes Support 180 operating environment 5 operator session terminate 189 Operator system class 178 optional equipment 17 P performance monitoring 9 Ping utility 9 49 93 116 pinhole reset switch 6 pinouts Craft port SCM 1 and SCM 2 29 Diagnostic port SCM 1 and SCM 2 29 DSL port 26 Ethernet port SCM 1 and SCM 2 29 Ethernet port SCM 3 33 Quad T1 port 36 straight through for Craft port SCM 3 33 straight through for Diagnostic port SCM 3 33 Policy based packet multiplexing protocol 8 Port class 179 port status indicators DSL modules 176 PortMisprovisioned alarm 241 ports 100Base T Ethernet 6 10Base T Ethernet 6 16C550 PC Compatible serial 6 Craft 6 16 Craft serial 44 DB9 male serial 6 Diagnostic 6 16 EIA 2332D Console 9 power check Alarm module 37 power modules AC 5 DC 5 power supply 48 VDC 23 PowerModule class 180 PowerSupplyFault alarm 241 Private community name 55 protocols ANSI T1 606 Addendum 1 FR 8 ANSI T1 606 Frame Relay 8 ANSI T1 618 FR 8 CopperVPN IP multiplexing 8 FR Forum UNI FRF 1 8 FR NNI per FRF 2 8 Frame multiplexing 8 HDLC DSL link 8 HDLC PPP DSL link 8 LMI Rev 1 0a 8 Policy based packet multiplexing 8 Q 922 DSL link 8 Q 922 1490 DSL link 8 Q 933 Annex A 8 RFC 1058 Gateway and Hosting 8 RFC 1157 SNMP 8 RFC 1483 8 RFC 1483 DSL link 8 RFC 1490 8 RFC 1490 DSL link 8 RFC 1973 PPP 8 RFC 2225 8 RFC
165. dy for destination name 354 Rename done Upload New Files 1 On the CE150 change to the ce200bu directory ftp gt cd ce200bu 250 Changed directory to P ce200bu 2 List the ce200bu directory ftp gt dir 200 Port set okay 150 Opening ASCII mode data connection size date time name 512 Jan 01 2001 12 08 08 x lt DIR gt 512 Jan 01 2001 12 08 08 er lt DIR gt 512 Jan 01 2001 12 08 08 code lt DIR gt 512 Jan 01 2001 15 01 32 system lt DIR gt 2287440 Jan 29 2001 12 08 08 scm 2289488 bytes 56043520 bytes free 226 Transfer complete 431 bytes received in 0 01 seconds lt 43 10 Kbytes sec gt N O T E You will only be upgrading the code and system directories Ignore any other directories such as html image or other 3 Set up the FTP utility a Set the FTP utility to interactive mode ftp gt prompt Interactive mode On If the following message is displayed enter prompt again to turn Interactive mode on Interactive mode Off b Set the FTP utility to binary code transfer mode ftp gt bin 200 Type set to I binary mode c Set the FTP utility to view the progress of your uploads ftp gt hash Hash mark printing On lt 2048 bytes hash mark gt 254 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 4 On the local machine change to the new software directory ftp gt led c newce200 Local directory now C newce200 5 On the CE150 delete the SCM file in the ce200bu directory ftp g
166. e 000 133 Voice over DSL wy pst tie Se a aires Seas 135 Overview of VODSL 00 00 cece eee 136 Signaling ProtocolS 0 0 00 cece eee ee 136 xii CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Service Architecture 0 0 0 0 00 cece eee 136 Dual Pathways ona Port 2 0 0 eee es 137 Dual Netmodels ona Port 0 0000 eee eee eee 137 Dual Pathways on an IAD 2 1 ee 138 HDIA Netmodel 0 0000 cee eee 139 Planning HDIA Data and Voice Subnets 141 Planning Multiple Hosts on HDIA 0 0 00 00 eee 144 Configuring HDIA Data and Voice Subnets 146 Chapter 7 ADSL Glite and Gdmt 200 eee 157 Overview of G dmt and Glite 2 ee 158 CPEs Supporting G dmt and Glite 0 00055 158 Netmodels Supporting Gdmt and Glite 158 Encapsulations Supporting Gdmt and Gllite 158 VCs Supporting Gdmt and Glite 000 0000 00 159 Planning the G dmt and G lite Network 2 0 000 eee 160 Cross Connect Netmodel and Point to Point Protocol over ATM 160 IP Netmodel 0 0000 c eee 161 Configuring the Gdmt and Glite Data Network 162 Cross Connect Netmodel 0 00 c eee eee eee eee 162 IP N tmodel dat iminenta eds Se teehee ea nee eed eae 166 Chapter8 Troubleshooting 0cee eee e eee eee eee 171 CE150 Diagnos
167. e a directory containing the software files system a directory containing the Config file These items are identical to the contents of the ce200 directory on the CE150 3 Set the local machine s default directory to newce200 N O T E If the file or directory structure of the new software is not the same as shown here refer to the instructions release notes accompanying the new software for specific instructions Save the Current Config File on the CE150 1 Use Telnet or an SNMP Manager to connect to the CE150 Log in to the CE150 Enter admin when you are asked for the login name and password 4 At the prompt save the current configuration CRAFT gt set cmsystem command save 252 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 5 Verify that the save was successful CRAFT gt get cmsystem Group cmSystem ObjectClass System OperState Enabled Version E 3 0 Master 0 0 0 0 ConfigFileName config tgz CalendarTime 2000 07 21 10 01 11 MyPII 1 2 0 0 PrimaryPII 1 2 0 0 SecondaryPII 0 0 0 0 Redundancy NotAvailable ShelfCount 1 ExpIpSubNet 192 168 250 0 ConfigSynch Saved Command SaveConfig CommandStatus Succeeded 6 Ifthe CommandStatus object displays InProgress instead of Succeeded repeat the get cmsystem command If it displays Failed contact Copper Mountain Technical Support 7 Log out of the CE150 Upgrade the Software on the CE150 Rename the Current and Ba
168. e 1 51 1 memberlpii 1 5 1 member2pii 1 5 2 Set Successful If the CPE connected to the bundle is an IMUX CPE then it will train normally first on the Member1PII port and then on the Member2PII port If the bundle is miswired or misconfigured an alarm will be generated and a trap sent If the configuration and wiring are correct but there is no CPE connected or trained the member ports in that bundle will show an endpoint ID consisting of zeros and their status will indicate WaitForAdd If a CPE is later connected it will train normally and the member ports endpoint and status information will automatically update Using cmlIface set the NetModel and the EncapsulationType for the IMUX bundle The CopperRocket 202 works only with the Cross Connect netmodel Also if you want to change the default for Service Class you can do so at the same time For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 51 1 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype q922 Set Successful 100 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide N O T E When creating IMUX bundles do not attempt to preconfigure the individual DSL Member ports with cmlFace or cmSublface before assigning them to a bundle If you try to assign configured ports to an IMUX bundle the cmBundle command will fail and the system will return an error message If this happens use cmiface to reset the DSL member port causing the error to NetModel None Configuration of NetModel a
169. e CopperCraft interface that will achieve the same result To perform a hardware restart of a DSL module connect to the system control module in system equipped for redundancy this must be the current Primary control module through the CopperCraft interface and issue the following command CRAFT gt lcrestart n n where n n indicates the shelf and slot number of the target DSL module Note that this command cannot be abbreviated SCM 3 Reset Switch If the software restarts do not work and your CE150 is equipped with a System Control Module 3 SCM 3 press the Reset switch on the front panel of the module It resets the System Control Module Buffer Control Module and any WAN modules in a complex Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 209 System Configuration If you suspect the CE150 s configuration data has become un stable or corrupt you may need to reload the backup configu ration file from a remote file server using cmMaintCmd and its ConfigRestore option as described in Restoring a Backed Up Configuration on page 111 Implementing the recovered data file however does require a full restart of the CE150 as dis cussed in the next section The cmSystem ReadConfig command is not supported in this release System Soft Restart In a major software fault occurs there may be no alternative to restarting the system To restart reboot the CE150 enter the following command CRAFT gt set cmsystem command restart Using
170. e cmTrapAlarm group described in the CopperEdge 150 Cop perCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual CRAFT gt geta cmtrapalarm SeqNum Type ObjectClass ClassId ProbableCause Severity TimeTag Text Instance 25 25 PortMisprovisioned IDSLPort 11 4 0 0 MinorAlarm 2000 12 02 11 49 53 Operation state of Instance 27 27 PortMisprovisioned IDSLPort 11 14 0 0 MinorAlarm 2000 12 02 11 49 55 Operation state of Instance 33 33 PortMisprovisioned SDSLPort 10 14 0 0 MinorAlarm 2000 12 02 11 50 29 Operation state of CRAFT gt get cmtrapalarm 33 Group cmTrapAlarmTable Instance 33 SeqNum 33 Type PortMisprovisioned ObjectClass SDSLPort ClassId 1 10 14 0 ProbableCause 0 Severity MinorAlarm TimeTag 2000 12 02 11 50 29 Text Operation state of the port is up but the port is not configured 182 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Audit Log When isolating the cause of a problem it can be helpful to know what might have triggered it On systems with an SCM 2 or SCM 3 the CE150 software includes uploadable logfiles con taining a record of the most recent attribute changes up to 1 000 events on this CE150 Attribute changes are generally changes that result from a Set command With the time stamped AttributeChange known you can logi cally infer the precipitating command The Audit Log also lists the name and IP address of the operator initiating the change a
171. e modules are also capable of communicat ing with CPEs in either router or bridge mode However some CPEs will run only in bridge mode Netmodels Supporting G dmt and G lite Both the G dmt and G lite modules are compatible with all of the current netmodels in the CE150 including IP VWAN Cop perVPN Cross Connect and HDIA However the LAN exten sion netmodels IP VWAN CopperVPN and HDIA data require the CPEs on the DSL links to be in bridge mode not router mode None of the CPEs is CMCP compatible they must have the CMCPCompatible object in the cmIface group set to No Encapsulations Supporting G dmt and G lite Both the G dmt and G lite modules support RFC 1483 for DSL port encapsulation They also support RFC 2364 for DSL port encapsulation but the CE150 allows only RFC 2364 encapsu lation with VC VC forwarding on the DS3 ATM WAN port When using RFC 2364 for DSL line encapsulation the CE 150 will not allow RFC 1973 encapsulation with PPP Translation forwarding on the DS3 ATM WAN port It also will not allow RFC 2364 encapsulation with PPP Transparent forwarding or with PPP Translation forwarding on the DS3 ATM WAN port 158 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide In addition when using FRF 8 the CE150 will not allow a translation from RFC 1483 for DSL port encapsulation to an RFC 1490 encapsulation on the DS3 Frame Relay port VCs Supporting G dmt and G lite Both the G dmt and G lite modules suppo
172. e software download is in progress the Buffer Control and DSL Module status LEDs turn to a blinking amber When download is complete the SDSL Module status LEDs turn green the Buffer Control Module status LED changes from amber to rapidly flickering green The System Control Module and System Control Module 3 have six LEDs beside the Ethernet connector When power is applied the Power LED immediately turns green and the Processor Running indicator turns green within a second or two 38 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Processor Running CE Spare Internal Data LS RXD DCD pa Spare Ethernet TXD DTR Power System Control Module Packet Comm Network DS 3 FRAME A a6 SYSTEM of LOCAL CONTROL J qn fit ee Ge Ge C eed MODULE DIAGNOSTIC CRAET STATUS NETWORK MODEM System Control Module 3 Transmit Receive Data Data Link Integrity DIAG CRAFT MODEM DS 3 FRAME i i SYSTEM com ge ee UA MODULE L STATUS STATUS NETWORK Processor Running E iene Ethernet 2 Data a Spare Ethernet 1 Power System Control Module LEDs 5 Ifthe System Control Module is connected to an
173. e the interface termi nates pp is the port number of the interface If a virtual circuit is associated with the inter face uuuu is an identifying number for the vir tual circuit if applicable For example the PII 1 3 2 27 refers to system shelf 1 the WAN card in Slot 3 of that shelf port number 2 and a virtual circuit with a DLCI or ATM Virtual Link number of 27 PPP Point to Point Protocol protocol A set of rules relating to the format and timing of data transmission between devices In packet switched networks proto cols break a lengthy message into equal parts called packets The packets are transmitted across the network the receiving processor then error checks them and returns an acknowledgment to the originating device protocol interface While a PII points to and focuses on a physical interface a port or con nector a protocol interface is a logical name for any interface through which packet date passes a physical port DSL Ethernet etc or a virtual circuit A protocol interface may take the form of a full PII always including a circuit identifier or it may simply be the logical name cmName IfName assigned to that interface PSES DS3 P bit Severely Errored Second One second of time in which 44 or more P bit coding violations frame defects or incoming alarm signals occur 270 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit A Frame Relay term for a config
174. ear boro deals 51 PUG soe en ane ANA a E E ate E eau ne OEE Mette 51 Initial Configuration sasaaa uaaa 52 Configure Operator Names aannaaien 53 Management by a Radius Server 0 000 eau 54 Create a Unique Operator 00 0c eee eee eee 54 Change the Factory Default Operator Password 55 Create the SNMP Community Names 55 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide System Information n a 0 000 eee eee 56 System CloGk 5 44 or ae ae a E ene hat ees EA 57 Trap Destination a an aaan aaa 57 Configuring the CE150 on the Network 000005 57 Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 002 cece eee eee eee 61 Configuring DSL Links for Network Models 000005 62 IP N tmodel irent iaiaaeaia hee ed eed an ered eee ania 63 Pull IP ROUTING sci adc ate bk ace wah ee Wace Swe Seid as 63 Policy based IP Routing 0 cee eee ee 64 VWAN Netmodel 20 00 00 0 ccc 65 Copper VPN Netmodel 0 000 cece eee eee ene eee 69 Cross Connect Netmodel 0000 cece eee eee 72 Per VC Forwarding Modes 000e cece ee eeeee 72 VC VC Payload Forwarding Mode 2 0 000 73 FRF 5 Forwarding Mode 0 00 eee eee eee 74 FRF 8 Translation and Transparent Forwarding Modes 74 PPP Translation and Transparent Forwarding Modes 75 Per Port Forwarding Modes 00 eee eee
175. ecific information Alarm Severity Alarms are divided into three levels of severity e Critical A service affecting condition that requires immediate corrective action Used when the entity is totally out of service and its capability must be restored e Major A service affecting condition that requires urgent corrective action Used when there is a severe degradation of the entity s capability which must be restored e Minor An event or condition that does not affect service but corrective action should be taken to prevent a more serious fault 184 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Alarm Clearing The phrase clear an alarm describes an occurrence a CE150 generated event or manual action that causes visual and audi ble alarm indications to disappear usually but not always cor responding to correction of the underlying problem Some alarms such as BoardDown are cleared by the CE150 when a corresponding event in this case BoardUp occurs Other alarms such as RoleChanged have no such correspond ing event In the latter case you must manually clear the alarm by setting the cmAlarmTable as discussed in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Manually clearing an alarm in the CE150 does not imply fixing the problem Clearing the alarm merely causes the alarm unit to no longer display alarm indications You can manually clear alarms that support automatic c
176. ecks their status If you encounter problems while starting the system normally such as from data stored in the CE150 s flash memory please contact Copper Mountain Technical Support Chapter 2 Installation 4 Connect the Power Now that you understand the LED start up sequence apply power to the CE150 and observe the LEDs Check the Fan Tray After the CE150 has successfully been powered on check the fan tray to be sure it is operating properly Hold your hand beside the chassis and feel for blowing air If you cannot feel any blowing air 1 Disconnect the power from the CE150 2 Use the voltmeter to recheck the wiring 3 Reapply power to the CE150 If the power is good but you still cannot fell any blowing air dis connect the power to the CE150 and contact Copper Mountain Technical Support Installing or Replacing Modules For information about replacing modules see Chapter 8 42 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Chapter 3 Initial Configuration This chapter describes procedures for performing initial provi sioning and other basic configuration tasks Before you attempt to modify any of the software settings however you should be familiar with the sections on General Configuration Guidelines Command Structure and the Permanent Interface Identifier scheme of specifying interfaces on the CE150 The term DSL module is generally used throughout this chapter to mean any supporte
177. ed from the network ESF framing mode Loopbacks with settings for inward loop near end line loop near end payload loop far end line loop and far end payload loop Chapter 5 Routing Forwarding Managing Links 115 Configuring CE150 Network Interfaces You can review the basic configuration of any CE150 interface by checking the contents of its entry PII in the cmlIface table see the sample table entry below Then use the command set cmiface to specify the interface and configure its various pa rameters objects In the following example and in the tables throughout this chapter shaded objects are read only you cannot directly set them The objects without shading are operator configurable Group cmIfaceTable dmisieani eay elite 03 PIET E S O IfIndex 1 421 0 Name Name of this port AdditionaliInfo NetModel IP IpAddr 192 168 1 1 NetMask 255 255 255 0 MacAddr 0 60 58 0 0 b BurnedInMacAddr 0 60 58 0 0 b FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPii 1 2 2 32 CMCPCompatible Yes EncapsulationType rfcl483 FwdMode IP Policy Pix 54 Full IP vs Policy Routed Links As described in the previous chapter you can configure a DSL link to make the CPE behave as an ordinary IP router If you configure a DSL link with an IP address and you also specify a destination PII At that point the link is said to be IP Policy rout ed and the status of the fwdMode field in the cmIface table will display
178. ed to an Ethernet net work the module will synchronize and negotiate its speed with the network The Ethernet LED turns green if the network is a 10BASE T 10 Mbps system and red if it is a 100BASE T 100 Mbps system Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 173 N O T E A green lit Ethernet LED is not a signal that the CE150 is connected to or communicating with a live Ethernet network the LED turns green by default whether or not the port is actually connected The CE Internal Data LED indicates data activity internal to the CE150 itself The state of this LED does not correspond to the status of the system At any time the Internal Data LED may be off blinking pulsing or solidly green On the System Control Module panel the Network and Packet Comm LEDs beside the modem port indicate data traffic The Network indicator turns or flickers green when Ethernet data packets are transmitted by the CE150 The Packet Comm indi cator turns or flickers green when Ethernet data packets are re ceived by the CE150 On the System Control Module 3 panel the Ethernet port has two LEDs a single Transmit Receive Data LED and a Data Link Integrity LED The Transmit Receive Data LED indicates data traffic It turns or flickers yellow when data is received or trans mitted on the Ethernet line The Data Link Integrity LED turns green when the integrity of the Ethernet link for lOBASE T or 100BASE TX is acceptable Modem Indicators On the Syste
179. ee this table CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 2 1 20 Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 2 1 20 PII 1 2 1 20 IfIndex 1 2 1 20 Name ww GroupName AdditionallInfo oun NetModel HDIA TpAddr 10 0 20 0 NetMask 255 255 255 192 MacAddr Liv EEL EEL EE BurnedInMacAddr EP EEEE EELEE fE FarEndAddr 10 0 20 1 DestPII 0 0 0 0 CMCPCompatible No EncapsulationType rfcl483 FwdMode HDIA Pix 532 ServiceClass None 146 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 2 Set the VC for voice on a WAN VC using the address 10 0 21 0 and using a 255 255 255 192 subnet mask 26 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 21 netmodel hdia ipaddr 10 0 21 0 netmask 255 255 255 192 encapsulationtype rfc1483 farendaddr 10 0 21 1 The FarEndAdadr is the voice gateway for the voice group It must be on the same subnet as the IAD IP addresses The following diagram shows addressing for both voice and data subnets on WAN VCs on a single WAN port When you perform a Get on the VC to check your work you will see this table CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 2 1 21 Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 2 1 21 PII 1 2 1 21 IfIndex 1 2 1 21 Name ww GroupName nn AdditionallInfo oun NetModel HDIA IpAddr 10 0 21 0 NetMask 255 255 255 192 MacAddr PEERS EELS BurnedInMacAddr fie vii tivti ft FarEndAddr 10 0 21 1 DestPII 0 0 0 0 CMCPCompatible No EncapsulationType rfcl483 FwdMode HDIA
180. er pA rN LS SS ee hoe Sores _ ie The DHCP Server responds with Depending on the netmodel the CE an IP address and any other Host unicasts broadcasts or forwards the configuration parameters sending DHCP response to the CPE or Host them back to the CE The CE150 as a DHCP Forwarding Agent Pass Through Mode If the CE150 receives a DHCP request and there is no entry in the cmDHCPTable for that DSL PII the CE150 passes the re quest to the upstream router or DHCP server The DHCP re quest is not modified the Relay Agent Information and Client Identifier fields are not inserted in the message When the netmodel is Cross Connect VWAN HDIA or Copper VPN the CPE or premise LAN host can obtain an IP address from the upstream DHCP server There is enough information in the message for the CE150 to forward the response to the correct DSL PII and ultimately to the correct CPE or premise LAN host Downstream DHCP Processing In the downstream direction the following DHCP processing takes place for DHCP Response messages for the various net models The CE150 will drop any DHCP requests coming down stream from a WAN VC or an Ethernet port IP Netmodel The DHCP response is routed to the DSL PII based on the IP ad dress of that DSL PII and the assigned Client IP address of the received DHCP response The DHCP response is either broad cast downstream on the DSL PII
181. erEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Helpful Shortcuts Getall and Find In addition to the standard SNMP commands the CopperCraft interface provides two special command Getall and Find They are briefly described below For more complete information about these commands see the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Getall The Getall command allows you to review the status of all ob jects for all instances of a specified group at the same time The output is more condensed than the output for a Get command The basic syntax is CRAFT gt getall mib_group Since the list could have hundreds of entries the screen will fill up and stop at four or five entries To view additional entries press any key except Esc Continue paging until you find the entries you want or until you reach the end of the list To quit the listing at any time press Esc Find The Find command provides an easy way of compiling lists of interfaces based on common criteria The lists are useful for troubleshooting and record keeping You can use the find com mand in several different ways To specify up to three objects and their values for all instances the basic syntax is CRAFT gt find mib group objecti valuel object3 value3 To specify up to three objects and their values starting with a specific instance the basic syntax is CRAFT gt find mib group instance objectl valuel object 3 value3 You can i
182. erformance is collected and stored The IfTable includes only IP interfaces Therefore Frame Relay PVCs used only as policy routed destinations do not appear in the table PVCs that have IP addresses on either end appear in the IfTable but only IP routed packets are counted policy routed packets are not counted in the IfTable VC Monitoring with frCircuitTable The frCircuit group is a standard Frame Relay MIB table with configuration and performance information about the config ured PVCs Information in this table is specific to Frame Relay and does not include data on IP addresses and routing Monitoring Frame Relay Errors with frErrTable The frErrTable also derived from RFC 1315 is a standard table of information about the most recent errored frame detected over a specified Frame Relay interface Disabling Deprovisioning an Interface To temporarily take any interface or port out of service set the Iffable AdminStatus to Down To restore service at the same level and to the same users enter this command CRAFT gt set iftable pii adminstatus up To completely deprovision a port that is remove it as an active interface or prepare it for a fresh configuration set the cmIface table entry for the interface to NetModel None and clear the Name Group and AdditionalInfo objects Chapter 5 Routing Forwarding Managing Links 133 134 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Chapter 6 Voice over DSL This
183. ernet Port Pinouts Craft and Diagnostic Serial Ports The Craft and Modem ports share the same circuitry and can not be operated simultaneously The Craft port takes prece dence if the two are in operation at the same time the Craft port will function and the modem port will not Both the Craft and Diagnostic connectors are DB9 male EIA TIA 232 serial interfaces Signal Ground Ring Indicator In from DCE O O Data Terminal Ready Out Clear to Send In from DCE O Transmit Data Out to DCE Ready to Send Out O O Receive Data In from DCE Data Set Ready In O Data Carrier Detect In from DCE Pinouts for the Craft and Diagnostic Ports EIA TIA 232 DB9 Connect a null modem cable between the COM port on the local terminal or computer and the Craft port Note that the Craft port is a DTE interface If you are connecting a terminal or computer which are also DTEs you will need to use a null modem cable The Diagnostic port is intended to facilitate factory processes If there is a problem with your system however your Copper Mountain Technical Support engineer may ask you to connect the Diagnostic port to the serial port of a local computer to aid in troubleshooting Chapter 2 Installation 29 N O T E We recommend that you do not connect the Diagnostic port except as directed by Technical Support Restarting a computer with one of its serial ports connected to the Diagnostic port
184. et cmsystem to save the Config configuration file and to re start the system When you have finished adjusting the system attributes to your preferred settings save the configuration data CRAFT gt set cmsystem command save The data is saved to the appropriate volume P in flash as ce200 system config tgz or config txt To verify that the save command was successful CRAFT gt get cmsystem Group cmSystem ObjectClass System OperState Enabled Version E 3 0 Master 0 0 0 0 ConfigFileName config tgz CalendarTime 2000 07 21 10 01 11 MyPII 1 2 0 0 PrimaryPII 2310 10 SecondaryPII 0 0 0 0 Redundancy NotAvailable ShelfCount 1 ExpIpSubNet 192 168 250 0 ConfigSynch Saved Command SaveConfig CommandStatus Succeeded In the resulting cmSystem listing the CommandStatus field should indicate succeeded If Command Status shows In Progress repeat the command get cmsystem if Command Status shows Failed contact Copper Mountain Tech Support N O T E The cmSystem readContig command is not supported in this release If it becomes necessary to reload a previous configuration use the cmMaintCmd group s ConfigRestore command See Restoring a Backed Up Configuration on page 111 108 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Restarting the System The cmSystem group can also be used to do a warm restart of the system A restart will interrupt any processes in progress and the CE15
185. f Typically a loop test is run at the time of installation in order to establish a baseline for future assessment Data from the test is kept on file and can then be used to perform line quality analysis or for troubleshooting if needed To check continuity over the entire length of the SDSL loop you need the cooperation of an assistant at the CPE site who can communicate in real time with the person operating the CE150 To perform this test follow these steps 1 Tell the assistant at the CPE site to disconnect the DSL line from the CPE thus opening the loop 2 At the CE150 console enter the following command CRAFT gt set cmsdsltest pii of the sdsl port type type_of_test action start 3 At the CE150 console wait five or ten seconds then enter a get cmsdsltest command Observe and record the value displayed in the ContinuityTest Result field 4 At the CE150 console while observing the value displayed in the ContinuityTestResult field tell the assistant at the CPE site to apply a short between pins 2 and 3 of the RJ 11 plug at the end of the DSL line 5 At the CE150 console wait five seconds and repeat the get cmsdsltest command There should be a perceptible change in the value of the integer displayed in the ContinuityTestResult field observe and record the new value 6 At the CE150 console while observing the value displayed in the ContinuityTestResult field tell the assistant at the CPE site to remove t
186. ferent A CPE in router mode can function as a simple or a complex router using a DHCP func tion and a Network Address Translation NAT function In simple router mode the setup typically requires a public IP address for the CPE and the hosts In complex router mode the setup typically requires an IP public address for the CPE Using a DHCP function the CPE then dynamically assigns private IP addresses to hosts on its LAN When the hosts send messages upstream the CPE sets up a table recording all source and destination addresses Then before the CPE forwards packets upstream to a destination it substitutes its own public address for the hosts private addresses In response when messages come downstream for hosts on the LAN the CPE consults its routing table for source and destination addresses Before it forwards packets downstream it substitutes the hosts private addresses for its own public address HOST 1 HOST 2 VC 23 VC 130 A o l NY Router NAT amp oo Route Route Route Tables DHCP Tables Tables M CPE Telco SF Router Router Router Route Tables LA Router Cross Connect Netmodel and Point to Point Protocol 160 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide IP Netmodel If you have a LAN and a series of hosts downstream from your CPE and if you have it configured in router mode the IP net model can be set up with public IP addresses or private IP ad dresses for the hosts
187. ferent farEndAddr on the same Ethernet interface In this forwarding mode the CE150 forwards inbound DSL packets that are not addressed to the DSL s own IP address to the specified Ethernet port and next hop IP address For policy routing the CE150 does not consult any routing table to for ward received packets For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel ip ipaddr 192 168 1 1 netmask 255 255 255 0 encapsulationtype rfc1483 destpii 1 3 1 farendaddr 172 16 1 1 Ethernet and WAN VCs do not support policy routing VWAN Netmodel This section assumes you are familiar with the networking con cepts of Copper Mountain s VWAN netmodel It provides details of how to configure the VWAN functions of the CE150 VWAN is the simplest mode to configure for DSL interfaces To do so set the NetModel Encapsulation and DestPii You must specify a WAN VC or an Ethernet port for the DestPii If only one DSL port refers to a given WAN VC both interfaces are in VWAN point to point mode If two or more DSL ports refer to the same WAN VC all the interfaces in the VWAN group are in VWAN bridge mode The CE150 automatically selects the FwdMode based on the given configuration For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel vwan encapsulationtype rfc1490 destpii 1 2 1 61 WAN VCs do not need to be configured for VWAN mode because they assume VWAN mode automatically when referenced by VWAN DSL ports WAN VC and Ethernet interfaces cannot be c
188. fferent alphanumeric identifier but it must start with an alpha character The CircuitID is inserted in the Relay Agent Information Option 82 and Client Identifier Option 61 fields in the DHCP request message N O T E An upstream DHCP server uses Option 82 Relay Agent Information to identify which DSL port the DHCP request originated on It uses Option 61 Client Identifier to distinguish between requests originating from a CPE and requests originating from a host If Option 61 is present the request originated from a CPE if it is not present the request originated from a host The CE150 s DHCP functionality depends on which netmodel is being used and whether the CPE is a CMCP CPE Summary of the CE150 s DHCP Functionality Host with Non CMCP CPE DHCP Function Network Model CMCP CPE CMCP CPE or Host CE150 asa IP Response Relay Response Server CopperVPN Response Forward Response VWAN Response Forward Response HDIA Response Forward Response Cross Connect Response Forward Response CE150 as a Relay IP Relay Relay Relay Agent CE150 as a For Copper VPN Forward Forward Forward warding Agent VWAN Forward Forward Forward HDIA Forward Forward Forward Cross Connect Forward Forward Forward 1 The CE150 cannot distinguish between non CMCP CPEs and their hosts on the premise LAN It can only assign one IP address which comes from the cmDHCPTable The CE1
189. figure Frame Relay virtual circuits PVCs es tablished at WAN interfaces They are Throughput e CommittedBurst e ExcessBurst Throughput Throughput a term synonymous with CIR specifies the aver age amount of data in bits per second that can be sent over a given PVC assuming a reasonably well designed network on demand 24 hours a day Since PVCs may be shared by a num ber of users the Committed Information Rate for a CE150 PVC will typically approximate some reasonable sum of the data rates of all of the subscribers who have access to the interface Chapter 5 Routing Forwarding Managing Links 127 As a practical matter however a user of a real world data link can almost always transmit and receive at a much faster rate than the nominal baseline indicated by the CIR As we know most networked data communication is bursty in nature that is it consists of bursts of packets some of which may be very large separated by relatively long idle periods Thus there is another typically larger number that represents a burst of data which the network will accept with a reasonable probability of reliable delivery This is the CE150 CommittedBurst bcMax The third congestion management setting specifies the amount of data which though in excess of the Committed Burst can still be handled by the network and the circuit under normal condi tions This amount is the ExcessBurst BE However because this ExcessBurst does
190. filter values should be entered All filters following the deleted filter have their filter numbers reduced by 1 as a result e DELETE_LIST Deletes the entire filter list for the specified interface No other filter values should be entered but you must enter a filter number any 1 or 2 digit integer will do because filter number is an index of the table Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 95 Filter Criteria Each IP filter includes the five filtering criteria listed below In order for a packet to be considered as matching the filter it must match all five of the categories This means that all five items must be configured even if the specification is don t care For don t care fields set the field to a value that will be true for every packet for example if you do not care about the Source Address you can simply specify the source IP address and source subnet mask values as zero Here are the five categories of filter criteria 1 Source address and source mask Match if SA amp mask value 2 Destination address and destination mask Match if DA amp mask value 3 IP Protocol Identifier of the filter The ID is entered as an integer which translates to the type of protocol as shown in the table below A match occurs if Filter Protocol ID Protocol ID of the packet or Filter Protocol ID O any Valid IP Protocol IDs are shown in the following table Valid IP Prot
191. function object For example CRAFT gt set cmfilter 1 4 4 3 function delete This command will delete filter number 3 for the interface spec ified a DSL port at location 1 4 4 With the function object the operator can command a filter or filter list to be deleted or a fil ter to be inserted into a list When the filter specifications are displayed in response to a Get or Getnext command the filter function always displays as active The operator can set it to any value to perform the following functions recall that a filter definition must have both a PII and a filter number e ACTIVE Activates the filter criteria specified within the accompanying command that is in the same set statement as the active command If there is already a filter at the location list number specified it will be replaced with the filter you have defined If you specify a filter number larger than any on the existing list the new filter will then be appended to the end of the filter list e INSERT Inserts the filter criteria specified within the accompanying command The new filter will be assigned the filter number you specified and the numbers of all existing filters in the list will be increased by 1 to make room for the inserted filter If you specify a filter number larger than any on the list the new filter will be added to the end of the filter list e DELETE Removes the specified filter As shown in the example above no other
192. g Guide DTE Data Terminal Equipment In defining interface standards for connection of equip ment to a network the classification of a device as Data Communications Equipment typically a modem or printer or Data Terminal Equip ment typically a computer or remote terminal device determines the wiring of the interface connector Network interfaces on the CE150 Ethernet and WAN are wired as DTE E Ethernet A local area network used for con necting computers and peripheral devices over short distances and using private facilities Ethernet operates over twisted pair wire or coaxial cable at rates to 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps Event An indication of an occurrence that an operator may want to know about F filter A logical construct that allows selective reception or blocking of data packets based on the criteria such as the IP address of the origi nator assigned and built into the filter specifi cation Frame Relay A high performance shared bandwidth packet switching protocol which has become the de facto standard in wide area data communications FTP File Transfer Protocol H HDIA High Density Internet Access A networking model that allows separate voice and data circuits on DSL and WAN ports and that provides economical use of IP ad dressing It requires that you set up base IP addresses and address ranges or net masks for voice and data subnets on WAN ports as well as on DSL ports for IADs and CPEs and their
193. g call setup mes sages and voice packets exist ATM and IP Some voice gate ways as well as the IADs capable of working with them use an ATM AAL2 based architecture In contrast other voice gate ways as well as the IADs capable of working with them use an IP based architecture 136 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Dual Pathways on a Port All IADs provide data and voice access to upstream networks for users downstream But although the data streams and voice streams go over the same DSL line to and from the CE150 the data and voice packets are separated into two VCs on DSL lines and on DS1 and DS3 lines Two pathways on the WAN in terface must be created Two paths over the CE150 are neces sary because the voice packets must go to their own voice gateway and the data packets must go to their own data gate way The voice gateway performs call setup and routes voice packets the data gateway reads header information and in ad dition routes data packets Dual Netmodels on a Port To accommodate the dual pathways over DSL ports and WAN ports on the CE150 dual netmodels are necessary For exam ple on data VCs on DSL ports you can use any of five netmod els e JP e VWAN e CopperVPN e Cross Connect e HDIA On voice VCs on DSL ports which must be set on VC 22 you can use either of two netmodels e Cross Connect e HDIA The procedures for configuring data VCs on the DSL ports for the IP VWAN C
194. g router You can read this learned address be getting the WAN VC s cmlface entry The farEndAddr will be returned as the learned address and the FwdMode will be CopperVPN auto to indicate that the farEndAdadr is learned and not operator configured For exam ple CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 61 netmodel coppervpn farendaddr 0 234 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide HDIA Netmodel With this netmodel the CE150 is able to provide economical IP addressing for hosts You can map all data VCs on different DSL ports to a single data VC on a WAN port You can also map all voice VCs on different DSL ports to a single voice VC on a WAN port HDIA unlike VWAN or CopperVPN in their aggregate mode permits peer to peer communications between DSL VCs Specify base IP addresses and address ranges or net masks for voice and data subnets when you are configuring the circuits on WAN ports Also specify base IP addresses and address rang es or net masks for IADs and hosts when you are configuring circuits on DSL ports For more detailed instructions see Cop perEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manu al Here are examples of the configurations for the data and voice VCs on both the DSL and WAN interfaces CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 20 netmodel hdia ipaddr 10 0 20 0 netmask 255 255 255 192 encapsulationtype rfc1483 farendaddr 10 0 20 1 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 21 netmodel hdia ipaddr 10 0 21 0 netm
195. gement System AMS The CopperView AMS facilitates remote control and management of multiple CopperEdge concentrators simultaneously through SNMP The CE150 s software tools may be used individually or together to configure the CE150 and each of its links and to monitor status and performance As shown in the following illustration the CopperCraft inter face provides an intelligible text based mechanism by which an operator can directly monitor and control the CE150 When controlled by the CopperView Element Manager or other net work management systems the CE150 s SNMP agent responds to commands originated by another computer SNMP Manager Serial Craft Port Terminal CopperEdge DSLAM Configuration Data Status Information CopperCraft IP Command E a Telnet E L CopperView IP AMS WwW A Line DS3 or N Ethernet Interface CE Management Information Base relied Modem MIB R T S A SNMP Agent yV Other Management Tools PSTN Concept of Operation Chapter 1 Introducing the CopperEdge 150 3 Third Party Customer Premise Equipment CPE As a leader in the move toward standardization in the xDSL in dustry Copper Mountain has instituted an ongoing program to maximize interoperability of the CE150 with the DSL customer premise equipment CPE of other manufacturers as well as with its own CopperRocket product line Many CPEs from third party manufacturers have been certified for use with the
196. generates an SNMP trap A trap is a record of the event that is captured and sent to the configured trap destinations for the system it contains the same information as the event For a listing of all currently sup ported traps associated with each event see Appendix C There is no one to one mapping between events and traps Be cause of the way alarms are cleared internally one or more events may translate into the same trap In these cases one or more data fields can be used to distinguish the traps For exam ple both the DLCIStateDisabled and DLCIStateEnabled events result in a frDLCIStatusChange trap being generated To view a chronological list of the 1 000 most recent traps events you can use the elog or cmTrapEvent group as de scribed above The same information is also available sorted by the type of trap or event To access this list use the cmTrap Type group as described in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Traps can be sent to as many as ten different SNMP managers The list of those designated to receive traps is contained in the cmTrapDestination table in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Alarms constitute one subset of events When generated an alarm message contains the following information e Name of the alarm such as FanFailure e Source module port link e Severity Critical Major Minor e Time the event occurred e Other event sp
197. gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype q 922 CRAFT gt set cmsubiface 1 4 1 19 destpii 1 2 1 1 CRAFT gt set cmsubiface 1 4 1 20 destpii 1 2 1 2 After configuration WAN VC 1 3 1 1 has a forwarding mode of FRF8 1490 1483 while WAN VC 1 3 1 2 has a forwarding mode of VC VC payload CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Not all translations described by the FRF 8 1 specification are implemented Translations are implemented for Frame Relay PDUs with e NLPID 0x80 which include but are not limited to Bridged PDUs 802 3 protocol and Other routed PDUs AppleTalk data AppleTalk ARP IPX Inverse ARP but not ARP e NLPID OxCC which are Routed IP Version 4 PDUs NLPID 0x08 Connection oriented protocols Q 933 Q 2931 NLPID PDUs that include but are not limited to SNA Packets that do not fall into these categories will be discarded PPP Translation and Transparent Forwarding Modes The PPP translation forwarding mode supports RFC 1973 to RFC 2364 interworking PPP transparent forwarding mode supports RFC 1973 to RFC 1973 interworking At present RFC 2364 to RFC 1973 and RFC 2364 to RFC 2364 interwork ing are not supported RFC 2364 actually specifies two encapsulations the Null VC Multiplexing and the Logical Link Control LLC encapsula tions ATM based line cards and WAN interfaces in the CE150 support both RFC 2364 encapsulations To convert an RFC 1973 frame t
198. h port in a bundle to a group Member Port must not be under loopback testing You cannot assign a port to a bundle when it is in loopback testing Similarly you cannot perform loopback testing on a port already in a bundle To perform testing on a port ina bundle remove it from the bundle perform the test and put it back in the bundle PII value must be a DML Bundle The PII for an IMUX bundle represents a logical not a physical interface It must have the format 1 51 n where n is any number from 1 to 63 inclusive Port cannot be configured into multiple entries in a bun dle A bundle can have as many as four ports assigned to it Each port must have a different PII The ports can be on the same line card or on different line cards Port is configured in a differ ent bundle You tried to assign the same port to dif ferent bundles You cannot assign the same port to different bundles Enter the command getall emBund_1e to list all IMUX bundles on the CE150 and all ports assigned to them Valid RowStatus values Active Destroy The default value for RowStatus is Active The only other acceptable value Destroy allows you to delete the bundle You can delete the bundle with out deleting ports from the bundle Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 199 Problems during CPE Training Message EndPoint Conflict CPE in bun dle is not IMUX capable If there is no CPE connec
199. h the bandwidth and the throughput of a single DSL link Thus an IMUX bundle containing two SDSL ports each set at 1 568 Kbps has a theoretical throughput of 3 136 Kbps A small portion of the total however is reserved for management overhead IMUX links may be either IDSL or SDSL provided they are matched with the appropriate CPE and line module type In the current release the CE150 supports two DSL ports in one bundle But the application is capable of supporting four port IMUX bundles in software With few exceptions IMUX bundles are treated in the same way as any other DSL port Each bundled port is designated with its own PII and assigned to a logical slot 51 such as 1 51 3 N O T E Only IMUX capable CPEs can be assigned as endpoints of an IMUX bundle if a regular single link CPE is designated as the endpoint of an IMUX bundle and the CPE attempts to train the connection will fail and the CE150 will generate an alarm Moreover any mismatch or conflict between the ports in an IMUX bundle and the bundle s endpoint CPE will result in an alarm condition In the following diagram two port DSL bundles are shown con necting the CE150 to separate IMUX CPEs For contrast two standard single port links are shown with their standard CPEs Router LA Hub Etc Switching 10BaseT Router Switching LAN Hub Etc 10BaseT FE Host Device I 10BaseT Host Device
200. hanged 241 RedundancyConflict 241 RoleChanged 241 signals 36 view information 182 Alarms command 49 altitude operating 5 Amphenol connector 16 analog modem port SCM 1 and SCM 2 31 Index 273 SCM 3 34 ANSI T1 606 Addendum 1 FR network protocol 8 ANSI T1 606 Frame Relay network protocol 8 ANSI T1 618 FR network protocol 8 ATMLink class 179 AtmVccDown alarm 238 AtmVccUp notification 242 audible and visible alarms 9 Audit log 180 183 BNC connectors 17 35 Board class 178 BoardDown alarm 238 BoardRestart event notification 245 BoardUp notification 242 BootFileFail alarm 238 Buffer Control Module features 7 LED indicators 172 replace 213 Buffer Control Module 2 features 7 BufferControlModule class 178 C cable clamp 21 cables 10Base T Ethernet 16 48 VDC power 22 75 Ohm coax 17 75 Ohm double braid shielded 17 AC power 15 Category 5 17 Category 5 STP 29 33 Category 5 STP rollover 33 Category 5 STP straight through 33 DB9 17 DSL 17 DSL connector 16 DSL twisted pair 138 EIA232 NUL Modem 16 Ethernet 138 IEC 320 15 Local Craft Interface 16 network connection 17 null modem 29 RG316 U 17 RG 59 U 17 RG59 U coaxial 35 RJ 11 265 RJ 14 265 serial 17 serial modem 17 twisted pair 36 Category 5 cable 17 Category 5 STP cable 29 33 Category 5 STP rollover cable 33 Category 5 STP straight through cable 33 CE150Shelf class 178 CE200Shelf class 178
201. he WAN VCs and the data and voice gate ways Then work down to the DSL ports assigning the proper number of VCs on all of the ports to accommodate all of the hosts and IADs In the following example the focus is on a single voice subnet and data subnet and a single IAD on the two subnets But the procedure would be the same for installing multiple IADs with multiple hosts attached to each IAD Different sized groups of hosts however require different subnet masks In this exam ple you will see only a single host on the IAD So the subnet mask will be 255 255 255 255 or 32 Also to assign IP addresses to hosts on the data subnet you can do it manually or automatically dynamically using a DHCP server located upstream from the CE150 This proce dure shows you how to assign the IP addresses with the DHCP server It also shows you how you how to assign the IP address for the voice VC automatically dynamically by using the CE150 as a DHCP server To set up addressing for an HDIA data and voice group on the CE150 follow these steps 1 Set the VC for data on a WAN port using the address 10 0 20 0 and using a 255 255 255 192 subnet mask 26 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 20 netmodel hdia ipaddr 10 0 20 0 netmask 255 255 255 192 encapsulationtype rfc1483 farendaddr 10 0 20 1 The FarEndAddr is the data router for the data group It should be on the same subnet as host IP addresses When you perform a Get on the VC you will s
202. he other of the VC must have an IP address because the routing table re quires an IP address for the NextHop object specified through the IPRoute MIB group For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 61 netmodel ip ipaddr 10 0 0 1 farendaddr 192 168 1 1 Policy to WAN VC IP Routing You can configure DSL interfaces for policy IP routing to a WAN VC To do so set the NetModel IpAddr NetMask Encapsula tion and DestPii objects in the DSL port s cmlIface entry You must specify a WAN VC as the DestPii This means that in bound packets that are not addressed to the DSL s own IP ad dress are always forwarded to the specified DestPii For policy routing the CE150 does not consult any routing table to for ward received packets For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel ip ipaddr 192 168 1 1 netmask 255 255 255 0 encapsulationtype rfc1483 destpii 1 2 1 61 Ethernet and WAN VCs do not support policy routing Appendix B cmlface Configuration 231 Policy to Ethernet IP Routing You can configure DSL interfaces for policy IP routing to the CE150 s Ethernet port To do so set the NetModel IpAddr Net Mask Encapsulation DestPii and farEndAddr objects in the DSL port s cmlface entry You must set the DestPii to a CE150 Ethernet port usually 1 3 1 You must also set the DSL port s farEndAddr object to the next hop IP address on the Ethernet subnet to receive the forwarded packets Each DSL port can specify a dif
203. he short from the RJ 11 plug at the end of the DSL line Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 195 7 At the CE150 console wait five seconds and repeat the get cmsdsltest command The value of the integer displayed in the ContinuityTestResult field should return to the value you noted in step 3 When using the cmSDSLTestTable for troubleshooting the ab solute numerical values displayed in the above procedure have no meaning in themselves and will vary depending on the length of the loop and a number of other physical and electrical factors The significant points are the change in the value as the line is monitored while being opened or shorted and whether and by how much the resulting values deviate from the base lines recorded at the time of installation The following diagram shows the cmSDSLtTest function CO Loop CopperEdge Up to 500 ft DSLAM l l lq lq SDSL CPE l Mod I gt gt l l CPE Connection Point CO Connection Point On site assistant alternately opens loop NearEndLoopProfile checks for and applies short while CE200 operator shorted or open circuits up to monitors test in progress 500 ft from the SDSL port SDSL Loop Test Functionality 196 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Built in Performance Monitors In addition to hard failures the CE150 also collects information that can be helpful in diagnosing marginally performing lines
204. he upstream CPE port is the gateway for hosts on the LAN But since the CE150 in the IP netmodel is in router mode it sends packets coming upstream from its DSL ports to its WAN VC based on destination addresses in the packets It sends packets coming downstream from its WAN VC to the proper DSL ports based on destination addresses For each of the DSL ports with G dmt and G lite CPEs connect ed to them part of the configuring process must be repeated New DSL VCs must be created on each DSL port In the following diagram only one DSL and one WAN port ap pear In the procedure on the following pages first a WAN VC with an IP address of 192 168 20 2 will be created then a DSL VC with an IP address of 10 10 1 1 Finally the default IP route on the CE150 will be set Configuration of addresses on the Tel co router and downstream hosts will not be shown 166 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 1 Set the VC on the WAN port The VPI and VCI on the WAN VC must match those on the Telco router Set AdminStatus to Up the default is Down CRAFT gt set cmatmvcl 1 2 1 80 vpi 1 vci 122 adminstatus up Perform a Get on the VC and you will see this table CRAFT gt get cmatmvcl 1 2 1 80 cmAtmVclTable t54 4 86 Group Instance PII Vpi Vei AdminStatus OperStatus LastChange AalType Aal5CpcsTransmitSdusS Aal5CpcsReceiveSduSi RowStatus TransmitTrafficDescr OAMState OAMAdminState OAMAutoLBState O
205. ice a CR408 has a LifeLine feature that allows two regular phone lines to be attached to its RJ 21 connector Back Panel telephony ports 1 8 ICa A A A DC Ground RJ 21 port adapter wire telephony cable port screw Back Panel of the CR408 138 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide HDIA Netmodel To manage separate voice and data circuits on DSL ports and WAN ports and to allow economical use of IP addressing the CE150 provides a dual netmodel called High Density IP Access HDIA It requires that you set up base IP addresses and ad dress ranges or net masks for voice and data subnets on WAN ports It also requires that you set up base IP addresses and ad dress ranges or net masks for IADs and hosts on DSL ports HDIA allows you to place a router and hosts on different pre mises but on the same subnet and then assign to hosts a series of contiguous addresses by means of power of 2 addressing boundaries You must set the base address and address ranges on the DSL ports but you must set the individual IP addresses on the hosts locally Note in the two diagrams below that you must set up two HDIA groups one for data and one for voice Host Phones IP Addr 10 0 20 2 Voice Circuit 10 0 21 0 Data Circuit 10 0 20 0 IP Addr 10 0 20 1 Default a r IAD HDIA DSLAM l IP Addr 10 0 21 2 b il Voice Gateway IP Addr 10 0 21 1 HDIA Netm
206. iface 1 4 1 ipaddr 200 10 10 1 netmask 255 255 255 252 destpii 1 3 1 farendaddr 192 168 1 2 netmodel ip encapsulationtype rfc1483 Set Successful 120 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Note that this use of FarEndAddr is very different from its func tion in configuring WAN virtual circuits Note also that if the DestPII is the Ethernet port on the System Control Module then the FarEndAddr must be a separate IP address but it must be on the same subnet as the Ethernet Port The configured DSL interface should be similar to the following example Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 4 1 BEL 1 4 IfIndex 1 4 NetModel IP IpA Addr 200 10 10 1 NetMask o o Ar Eo e AS A MacAddr 00 Ao eoe 1 BurnedInMacAddr OO 60 14 34556 He FarEndAddr 192 168 1 2 DestPii 1 3 1 0 CMCPCompatible Yes EncapsulationType rfcl483 FwdMode Policy IP Pix 14 A key difference between policy routing over Ethernet versus policy routing over WAN is that over Ethernet the far end ad dress of the DSL interface is configured with the IP address of the Ethernet host In contrast over a WAN link the far end ad dress FarEndAdad r is not significant for the DSL link You don t need to configure it Chapter 5 Routing Forwarding Managing Links 121 Configuring Ports for VWAN Over Ethernet Configuration of DSL ports and WAN VCs for VWAN is de scribed in Chapter 4 Although the Ethernet port does
207. ing the cm Loop group of objects Setting up loopback and then starting interrupting and com pleting loopback tests are trapped events As such all of them are reported to the trap receiver The current CE150 product release does not support multiple simultaneous loopback tests Only one test can be run at any one time Moreover the CE150 loopback test software makes no assumptions and has no prior intelligence about the loop under test If the loop is open even if only temporarily because up or downstream equipment is busy the test will run but the CE150 will report errors Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 193 DS3 Loopbacks For DS3 boards either ATM or Frame you must configure loop backs through the dsx3Config group See the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Three types of loopbacks are possible for DS3 boards inward loops near end line loops and far end line loops For the in ward loop test and the far end line loop test the CopperEdge must generate test packets using a generator on its System Control Module For the near end line loop test a remote device must generate test packets and send them to the CopperEdge Remote Device CopperEdge DSLAM S W P System DSX3 Control Module Module Far End Line Loop Near End Line Loop InwardLoop DS3 Loopback Modes After setting the loopback tests for DS3 boards with the dsx3ConfigTable group of objects you are ready to
208. int on Node A Similarly the de vice at node C sends an AIS message to the device on the endpoint at Node D Each device on the endpoint sends an RDI message to the device at the other endpoint notifying it of the fault But neither message gets through the fault between Node B and Node C Neither message needs to The devices at both ends of the link know the connection is broken because of the AIS messages they have already received Manual loopback testing can begin from the devices at either end to determine the exact location of the fault 88 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Node A Node B Node C lt RDI lt RDI m AIS RDI Node D ATM Connection End Point ATM Connection End Point A Fault on the Upstream Connection In the diagram above the device at Node C senses the fault on the upstream between Node B and Node C It sends an AIS mes sage to the device on the endpoint at Node D The device at Node D responds and sends a RDI message to the device on the other end of the WAN connection The message goes through because no fault is present on the downstream part of the connection At this time devices at both ends of the connection know the upstream path on the connection has a fault is broken and two traffic has stopped Loopback testing can begin from the devices at either end to determine the exact location of the fault
209. ion TimeTag 1999 08 16 15 58 08 Text 126 4 0 1 6 4 0 Both of these events have four event specific fields the form is GroupName ObjectName iffable Index cmNameTable IfName cmNameTable PII cmGroupTable Name Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 187 Save Configuration Failure If the system configuration is not successfully saved when you log out of the CE150 the following message is displayed and the logout process is stopped CE configuration has been changed Save the configuration Y y gt y CE configuration save failed To see information about the failure look for the ConfigWrite Failed event in the event log it will be at or near the end of the event log CRAFT gt elog 2000 10 03 14 37 03 ConfigWriteFailed cmSystem ConfigFileName config tgz cmTrapEventTable Type ConfigWriteFailed cmTrapEventTable ObjectClass System cmTrapEventTable ClassId 1 0 0 0 cmTrapEventTable SeqNum 11 cmTrapEventTable TimeTag 2000 10 03 14 37 03 cmTrapEventTable Severity Information To see the entire description of the event find the instance number the ConfigWriteFailed event in the cmTrapEvent group CRAFT gt geta cmtrapevent SeqNum Type ObjectClass ClassIid ProbableCause Severity TimeTag Text Instance 11 11 ConfigWriteFailed System 105 060 0 Information 2000 10 02 10 22 23 Unable to To view the full description in the cmTrapEvent group for that instance CRAFT gt geta cmtrapeve
210. ions chapters and books Examples of CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 32 1 44 netmodel ip configuration farendaddr 192 168 99 2 commands Examples show link or user specific information such as IP addresses subnet masks or MAC address es Unless otherwise specified all such data is ficti tious and is provided for illustrative purposes only N O T E Additional information pertaining to the topic N _ Information alerting you to a situation that could result in damage to the data or system A CAUTION Information alerting you to a situation where electrostatic discharge could damage the data or system WA w ARNING a m d Information alerting you to a situation that could result in personal injury XX CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the CopperEdge 150 The CopperEdge 150 CE150 DSL Concentrator is at the heart of the Copper Mountain high speed DSL system for occu pants of multiple tenant units such as office and professional buildings Each CE150 unit can distribute DSL data packets at high speed to as many as 48 subscriber lines over two conduc tor twisted pair copper wire A high speed DSL access device such as Copper Mountain s CopperRocket 201 SDSL or CopperRocket 202 SDSL IMUX or CopperRocket 508 Integrated Access Device seamlessly con nects the subscriber s PC or LAN through the DSL physical link to the CE150 at a central location
211. ions differ packet forwarding is performed in a translation mode Since the cmSublface table has no FwdMode object the Cross Connect forwarding mode is found in the cmIfaceTable entry for the WAN VC The forwarding mode for the DSL port is per VC since each DSL VC has its own FwdMode LMI is available on DSL links with per VC forwarding modes When LMI is in force the CE150 acts as a DCE and the CPE acts as a DTE For more information see the discussion on the cmlface and cmSublface object groups in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Also see the discussion of encapsulation in Appendix A CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Encapsulations on DSL and WAN VCs for Per VC Forwarding DSL Line Card WAN Forwarding Mode Encapsulation Type Encapsulation Q922 1490 Q922 Frame None VC VC payload transparent Q922 1490 Q922 Frame FRF5 FRF5 translation Q922 1490 Frame RFC 1483 FRF8 1490 1483 translation RFC 1973 Frame RFC 1973 PPP Transparent RFC 1973 Frame RFC 2364 null PPP Translation RFC 1973 Frame RFC 2364LLC PPP Translation RFC 1973 Frame None VC VC Payload VC VC Payload Forwarding Mode The VC VC payload forwarding mode allows third party CPEs to use encapsulation formats other than RFC 1483 so they can function as terminals on a remote LAN In such a configuration as the following graphic shows the WAN i
212. ior to Version 3 0 FTP Errors If you quickly perform several FTP operations you may see a transient error from the CE200 because it has run out of sock ets for an operation Transient errors are numbered from 400 to 499 as in the following example ftp gt dir 200 Port set okay 426 Data Connection error Wait a few seconds and try the operation again Under normal conditions the problem will clear within 60 seconds Appendix D Upgrading System Software 251 Upgrade the CE150 Software This section provides the generic procedures for upgrading the system software If there is a conflict between these procedures and the specific instructions accompanying the new version of your software follow the version specific instructions Be sure to perform these procedures at the local machine such as a PC from where the new software will be copied Prepare the New Software on the Local Machine 1 On the local machine create a directory such as newce200 2 Copy the new software to the newce200 directory The new software is located at the Copper Mountain ftp site you can access it directly through ftp or through the Copper Mountain web site If you do not know how to access the ftp site contact the Copper Mountain Technical Assistance Center Although individual upgrades may vary your new directory should contain at least the following file and directories scm a file with the new System Control Module code cod
213. is condition cycling power to the CE150 should always clear it e Red Buffer Control Module is in latched reset because the CPU has failed to start or the SRAM test failed A full CE150 power cycle is required to clear this state 172 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide System Control Module Status The System Control Module and System Control Module 3 have six LEDs beside the Ethernet connector When power is ap plied the Power LED immediately turns green and the Proces sor Running indicator turns green within a second or two System Control Module Packet Comm Network DS 3 FRAME g se SYSTEM of LOCAL CONTROL a qu ee an oO MODULE DIAGNOSTIC CRAET STATUS NETWORK MODEM Processor Running Spare Internal Data LS RXD DCD SSS ESES Spare f Ethernet TXD DTR Power System Control Module 3 Transmit Receive Data Data Link Integrity DIAG CRAFT MODEM MG s DS 3 FRAME SYSTEM cnu gee l MODULE L STATUS STATUS NETWORK Processor Running CE Internal Ethernet 2 Data Da Spare f Ethernet 1 Power System Control Module LEDs If the System Control Module is connect
214. is protection should be greater than or equivalent to that provided by three millimeter gap carbon blocks C A U T ON Use only waxed nylon string or nylon cable ties threaded through the white cable tie brackets to secure the attached amphenol connectors in place in addition to the screw on the connector If you use other types of attachment hardware take care that they do not contact the CE150 backplane circuitry and that cables are held securely in place Damage resulting from use of non standard hardware may not be covered by the warranty The CE150 s Line module slots are filled at the factory in as cending slot number order The first DSL module is installed in Slot 4 served by connector J1 and the second in Slot 5 served by connector J2 26 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Slot 4 J1 SDSL IDSL and ADSL Line Module Pinouts TIP RING 1 Port Pot1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 11 ll 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 N C N C Pins 25 and 50 are not used T1 Line Module Pinouts TIP RING 1 Port Tx TxPortl IAIA Rx Port1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7
215. ith existing members When the CPE attached to the port trains the CE150 discovers that it already has an active port in the bundle with a different EndPointID Either replace the port in the bundle making sure that you have the correct phone line attached or keep the port but switch the phone line EndPoint Conflict IMUX CPE has EndPointID that matches member in different bundle When the CPE attached to the port trains the CE150 discovers that it has a CPE with the same EndPointID attached to a port in another bundle Either switch the mismatched ports between the bundles or switch the phone lines attached to the ports 200 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Diagnostic Port The Diagnostic port on the front panel of the System Control Module is for CopperMountain personnel If you have a problem with your system a Copper Mountain Technical Support engi neer may ask you connect to the Diagnostic port to the serial port of a local computer The Diagnostic port does provide ac cess to certain events related to the functioning of the CE150 but not in a form readily usable by an operator N O T E Copper Mountain recommends that you not connect to the Diagnostic port except as directed by Copper Mountain Customer Support Restarting a computer with one of its serial ports connected to the Diagnostic port may cause the CE150 to reset Also certain service options that are available
216. k will be recorded only in the OAMManualLBCmdStatus object never in the OAMState ob ject After the automatic function discovers the existence of a fault this function will help you to discover which segment on the connection has the fault To send a manual loopback follow these steps 1 Set the O0AMManualLBCmdStatus object to f5end2end CRAFT gt set cmatmvcl 1 2 1 101 oammanuallbcmd f5end2end 2 Check the O0AMManualLBCmdStatus object You will see one of three conditions in progress succeeded failed CRAFT gt get cmatmvcl 1 2 1 101 Group cmAtmVclTable Instance 1 2 1 101 PII tees 0L Vpi 2 Vei 11 AdminStatus Up OperStatus Up LastChange 12 day 1 hour 44 min 54 0 sec 2000 09 28 14 44 46 AalType Aald5 Aal5CpcsTransmitSduS 1600 Aal5CpcsReceiveSduSi 1600 RowStatus Active TransmitTrafficDescr 2 OAMState normal 0 OAMAdminState enabled OAMAutoLBState enabled OAMManualLBCmd f5end2end OAMManualLBCmdStatus succeeded OAMLBInterval 17 OAMLBTimeOut 18 OAMTxAISCells 0 OAMRxRDICells 0 OAMRxAISCells 0 OAMTxRDICells 0 OAMTxLBRequestCells 0 OAMRxLBResponseCells 0 OAMRxLBRequestCells 0 OAMTxLBResponseCells 0 OAMRxUnsupportedCell 0 OAMTxDiscards 0 OAMRxDiscards 0 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Interface Filters IP Filtering When you configure a DSL interface with the IP netmodel the CE150 allows all inbound messages to
217. l must be Cross Connect VWAN HDIA or CopperVPN N O T E Configured as a DHCP server the CE150 cannot distinguish between non CMCP CPEs and their hosts on the premise LAN It can assign only one IP address from the cnDHCPTable sending it to both non CMCP CPEs and their hosts Therefore configure the CE150 to relay or forward the requests to an upstream DHCP server which can respond with different IP addresses for both the CPEs and their hosts The CE150 s DHCP functionality based on RFC 1542 gives service providers the option of having their own DHCP servers provide IP configuration parameters for CPEs and hosts on the premise LAN CPE DSL CopperEdge Upsiream DHCP Router Server Link DSLAM HT Host CE responds to a DHCP request relays it to an upstream DHCP server or forwards it to an upstream router DHCP Functionality in the CE150 The CE150 must use some form of client circuit identifier when sending DHCP requests to an upstream DHCP server if that server is to be able to uniquely identify the clients CPEs and their hosts sending the requests The CE150 assigns a client circuit identifier for CPEs as follows Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 79 e A unique circuit identifier is automatically entered in the CircuitID object in the cmDHCPTable The default is the CE150 s system name plus the DSL PII You can change it to a di
218. l not be able to process the commands that you sent through the Cop perCraft CLI Instead the system will issue an error message Command strings for SNMP object groups have a minimum of two elements e a command type e an object group name Command strings for SNMP object groups have a maximum of five separate elements e a command type e an object group name e an instance typically a PII e one or more object names e an object value for each object name Here is the structure of a typical Set command that is assigning a data rate on an HDSL port of 416 Mbps The port is the fourth one on a board in the fourth slot of the chassis Command Group Instance Type Name Craft gt set cmhdslmodem 1 4 4 datarate 416 Object Name Object Value Example of a Set Command CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide You must enter the elements of command strings in the follow ing order and you must adhere to the following restrictions Command type set get getnext getall help find ping Always enter the command type first separated from the group name by a space For operators with Security or System privileges the following commands are also available elog alarms LCRestart and SCMRestart Group name cmSystem cmIface cmADSLModem etc Always enter a group name for the set get getnext getall and find commands Otherwise the system will return an error message All of the gro
219. lation 140 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Planning HDIA Data and Voice Subnets High Density Internet Access HDIA uses an encapsulation type of IP 1490 on its DSL voice VCs and an encapsulation type of RFC 1483 on its DSL data VCs Multiple voice groups and multiple data groups are permissible Different voice gateways located at different places can serve different voice groups different ISPs or enterprise routers locat ed at different places can serve different data groups In the following example the focus is on IADs whose voice VCs belong to a single voice group and whose data VCs belong to a single data group The data VCs on the DSL links have address es on the same subnet as their router The voice VCs have ad dresses on the same subnet as their voice gateway HDIA Data Group 10 0 20 0 1 F 7 Host W IAD HOI pelaut E IAD DSLAM Hosts ai b al HDIA Voice Group 10 0 21 0 ee r 7 Phones 88 IAD as HDIA Voice ee Gateway 8 Be AD Phones 8 DSLAM HDIA Netmodel Data and Voice Groups To plan the addressing for an HDIA data or voice group on the CE150 follow these steps 1 DSLAM and IADs a Create two diagrams Each has a DSLAM in the middle and multiple IADs on the left side connected by lines to the DSLAM b Label the first diagram HDIA Data c Label the second diagram HDIA Voice 2 DSLAM Router and Voice Ga
220. le Instance 1 2 1 32 PII Sas oe IfIndex ee eels Si Name se orks AdditionallInfo GroupName bh ae ase Ue NetModel IP IpAddr 0 0 0 0 NetMask 0 0 0 0 MacAddr ap cet fect eter EEE BurnedInMacAddr HELEENE EEA EOE FarEndAddr 192 166 101 8 DestPii 0 0 0 0 CMCPCompatible No EncapsulationType rfcl490 FwdMode taille Pix 141 Once the FarEndAddr is defined for the VCs you can use those IP addresses as the next hop for route table entries For more information see the ipRoute table description in the Copper Edge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual For example CRAFT gt set iproute 192 168 250 0 nexthop 192 166 101 8 124 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Currently when you delete a FarEndAddr by setting it to 0 0 0 0 you must manually delete any associated routes in the ipRoute table For example if you move an IP address from one VC to another you must first delete and then recreate any routes using that address You can delete routes at any time but you cannot create a new route until after the interface IP address is assigned N O T E You can make a VC both a policy route destination and a full IP interface The two functions are independent of each other Chapter 5 Routing Forwarding Managing Links 125 Configuring DS3 Frame Relay To establish a Frame Relay virtual circuit on a WAN interface first enable the WAN port for Frame Relay
221. lear ing For example you would do this if a line card is being re moved from a system with no immediate plans to replace it The alarm that would result from the subsequent BoardDown event could be suppressed by manually clearing the alarm However we recommend that you do not manually clear such alarms very often because information about the status of your system will be discarded in the process When an alarm is cleared a Notification message is displayed showing the new operational condition Not all Notification messages are alarm clearing some are simply informational or advisory A Warning is essentially a Notification but with the added dimension of calling the operator s attention to a situa tion that may include some vulnerability or future risk Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 185 Example Alarms and Events Elog Display This example shows how the events are seen using the elog command Here is a link down alarm indicating that the Frame Relay Link on port 1 2 1 has gone down 1999 08 18 17 38 38 LinkDown ifTable Index 1 2 1 0 cmNameTable IfName n cmNameTable PII 221 0 cmGroupTable Name u cmTrapEventTable Type LinkDown cmTrapEventTable ObjectClass FrameRelayLink cmTrapEventTable ClassId 1 2 1 0 cmTrapEventTable SeqNum 56 cmTrapEventTable TimeTag 1999 08 18 17 38 38 cmTrapEventTable Severity MinorAlarm Here is a link up clearing notification for the Frame Relay Link on port 1 2
222. led information provided in Chapter 7 62 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide IP Netmodel With this netmodel the CE150 is able to route both inbound and outbound packets according to the IP address of their orig ination and destination devices In the full IP netmodel and also the IP policy variation subscriber links appear as wide area extensions of a remote LAN Springfield Fred s Fly Fishing Factory World Headquarters 119 Elm Street Wiring Closet Dallas Distributor a Seattle g Supplier Common DSL Links i Pubie e il Network 196 200 104 1 Bangkok Sune 192 181 113 101 ol 219 166 5 Supplier CE150 4 07 aa Banking House 192 181 113 102 D j IP Network Model Full IP Routing The IP netmodel with full IP forwarding is one that most users know well The NSP Central Office serves as a gateway to the net and individual message packets are exchanged and routed over the public network based on their destination IP address The diagram above describes the model I Set the IP address and other required parameters for each connected CPE Use the PII to designate the interface to be configured CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel ip ipaddr 192 181 113 101 netmask 255 255 255 0 encapsulationtype rfc1483 Set Successful CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 4 1 Group Instance ECE IfIndex
223. line an arrow character lt or gt appears at either end of the line indicating Scroll mode Use the arrow keys to move to the end of the line the next 10 characters will be displayed CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Permanent Interface Identifier PII Fully populated CE150s can have over 48 physical interfaces including DSL ports WAN ports and Ethernet ports They can have an even larger number of virtual circuits All ports and cir cuits must be uniquely identifiable so they can be configured and so the traffic over them can be monitored To accomplish the job the CopperCraft CLI uses a system called Permanent Interface Identifiers PIIs The PII system consists of four elements which must be written in a series format in a specific order c s p v where the letters represent the following c Chassis shelf number always 1 s Slot number 1 to 7 p Port number For DSL 1 to 24 for WAN 1 to 4 v Virtual circuit number 1 to 976 Slots in theCE150 chassis are reserved for specific types of modules as shown in the following table Slots in the CE150 Chassis Slot No Module 1 Buffer Control Module DS1 or DS3 WAN Modules Frame ATM System Control Module Ethernet Port SDSL ADSL or T1 Module 24 Ports SDSL ADSL or T1 Module 24 Ports Currently unused NI OO a A O N Power Module If the ports in slot 2 are on a their numbers are 1 to 2
224. link Bundle Error Messages Description You cannot assign a port to a bundle when the CPE trained on the port has an EndPointID that matches the End PointID of a port in another bundle All ports in a bundle must have the same EndPointID Action Enter the command getall cmEndPointPort to list all of the EndPointIDs in the CE150 starting with the first port on the first line card Either switch the port to the other bundle or attach the correct phone line to the port Then add another port to the proper bundle and attach the correct phone line Member PII must be a DSL port You cannot assign a WAN or Ethernet port to a bundle Member PII must be on same shelf as BundlePIl This error message does not apply to the CE150 Member Port must have Net Model set to None to be added to bundle You must set the netmodel for the IMUX bundle You cannot set the netmodel separately for each ports in the bundle Member Port must not be configured in cmDHCP table You must set the IMUX bundle for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol You cannot separately configure each port in the bundle for DHCP Member Port must not be configured in cmFilter table You must set the filters for the IMUX bundle You cannot set filters sepa rately for each port in the bundle Member Port must not be configured in cmMember table You must assign the IMUX bundle to a user group You cannot separately assign eac
225. ll no tify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possi ble Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes to its facilities equipment operations or pro cedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modification in order to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment please contact Copper Mountain Networks Inc at 888 611 4266 for repair and or warranty information If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges vi CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Canadian Industry Canada CS 03 Telecommunications Notice NOTICE The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective opera tional and safety requirements in the a
226. llowed configured for data trans port RFC1483 cmSublface not VWAN IP Funi VPI VCI of 1 32 allowed CVPN HDIA 1483 MAC Frame Relay DLCI 528 1483 MAC RFC1490 cmSublface not VWAN IP Frame Relay DLCI 16 ICP is optional allowed CVPN HDIA 1490 MAC Q922 None Cross Connect Q 922 VCs of unspeci Used to specify Layer 2 fied content Frame Relay interworking modes ATM None Cross Connect G lite ATM VC unspeci Used to specify Layer 2 fied content ATM interworking modes Q922 1490 RFC1490 Cross Connect Q 922 VCs each trans Used for FRF 8 transla lated VC containing tion Non translated VCs RFC1490 encapsula can have arbitrary tion unknown encapsulation HDLC cmSublface not Cross Connect Raw HDLC frame of Used for Cisco PPP allowed unspecified content No Cannot allow VCs or ICP VCs because there is no Q 922 header 220 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide DSL Physical Port Encapsulations DSL Port Implied DSL VC Valid Peer Encapsulation Encapsulation Netmodels Bates ly PPP HDLC cmSublface not Cross Connect PPP RFC1662 PPP Payload excludes HDLC allowed Payload No VCs address and control fields No VCs or ICP because there is no Q 922 header RFC1973 RFC1973 Cross Connect Either PPP transparent FRF 8 translation per or PPP translation Fwd formed when WAN Mode depending on encapsulation is WAN encapsulation RFC2364 null or RFC2364 LLC Dual Netmodel
227. ly they are 0 and 32 The number of the VC itself must be 528 It cannot be any other number for rfc1483 CRAFT gt set cmatmvcl 1 4 12 528 vpi 0 vci 32 adminstatus up Perform a Get on the VC and you will see this table CRAFT gt get cmatmvcl 1 4 12 528 Group cmAtmVclTable Instance 1 4 12 528 PII 1 4 12 528 Vpi 0 Vei 32 AdminStatus Up OperStatus Up LastChange 0 day 0 hour 0 min 36 0 sec 2000 04 14 14 42 13 AalType Aal5 Aal5CpcsTransmitSduS 1600 Aal5CpcsReceiveSduSi 1600 RowStatus Active TransmitTrafficDescr 0 Set the NetModel and the EncapsulationType for the DSL port Use the same PII 1 4 12 that you used in step 3 The VC number is not necessary Set CMCPCompatible to No the default is Yes CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 12 netmodel ip encapsulationtype rfc1483 cmcpcompatible no Perform a Get on the port and look at the table CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 4 12 Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 4 12 0 PII 1 4 12 0 IfIndex 1 4 12 Name we GroupName oun AdditionallInfo NetModel IP IpAddr 10 10 1 1 NetMask 259 295 2299 0 MacAddr ff ff ff ff ff ff BurnedInMacAddr 0 0 0 0 0 0 FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPII 0 0 0 0 CMCPCompatible No EncapsulationType rfcl483 FwdMode Full IP Pix 14 ServiceClass D 168 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Perform a set for the default IP route leading from the DSL ports to the WAN VC and
228. m Control Module the four LEDs for the modem port indicate two things handshaking between the sending and receiving terminals and the actual sending and receiving of da ta The LEDs for Data Communications Detect DCD and Data Terminal Ready DTR start flickering during handshaking and then turn a steady green when sending or receiving data The LEDs for Received RXD and Transmitted TXD turn green for the duration of receiving or transmitted data The modem is set to automatically answer on the second ring However it will take longer to answer when it is trying to recon nect after a disconnection it cannot answer on the second ring because it is still busy disconnecting from the previous session Craft Port Indicators The single LEDs for the Local Craft port will turn yellow as soon as a cable has been attached and the System Control Module detects a device on the other end 174 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide DS3 WAN Module Status The DS3 WAN module ATM or Frame Relay has three LED in dicators on its front panel to the right of the Transmit BNC connector At power up all three LEDs briefly illuminate as a functional test TRANSMIT RECEIVE mopute D3 FRAME NEAREND SYSTEM MON MON FAREND CONTROL T MODULE DS3 WAN Module LEDs If the DS3 WAN module is connected to a DS3 ATM or Frame Relay facility through a suitable access device the green Mod ule LED illuminates
229. mation included in the event Port index Port name Port PII Group name Cleared by LinkUp Trap linkDown LoginSaturated Warning Sent by the System Control Module when an operator login is attempted and the number of active sessions is already at the maximum Information included in the event Operator IP Reason Cleared by LoginAvailable Trap cmLoginsSaturated LoginSuspended Warning Sent by System Control Module when three successive login attempts for a specific user are unsuccessful This is cleared when the suspended user logs in success fully Information included in the event Operator IP Reason Cleared by LoginAllowed Trap cmLoginsSuspended MaintFailed Minor Sent by System Control Module when a maintenance com mand fails Information included in the event Maintenance command attempted Status of command attempted Reason code Status string Cleared by MaintSucceeded Trap cmMaintCmdStatusChange 240 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Type PortMisprovisioned Severity Minor Description Sent by the System Control Module for a DSL port when the line trains but is not configured that is the operational state of the port is Up but the port is not configured This event alerts the operator that an end user is trying to connect on a port that is not configured Information included in the event Status string Cleared b
230. min is always the Security Administrator for the system You can use the Help command to view the list of available con figuration options for each cmOperator object CRAFT gt help cmoperator Chapter 3 Initial Configuration 53 Management by a Radius Server If your system will be managed by an external Radius server you will not create the SNMP Community names from Copper Craft The user and password databases on all CE150s on the network including CopperView SNMP sessions will be con solidated on the Radius server All login requests for CE150s will go to the Radius server for verification Once the Radius server is provisioned and enabled security features are under its control All operators will be created on the Radius server instead of through CopperCraft you can still configure the CopperCraft cmOperatorTable but its contents will no longer be used Operators configured in the cmOpera torTable and not contained in the Radius server database will not be able to log in The Radius protocol requires that operator names and passwords are fully case sensitive Create a Unique Operator Create at least one unique operator name and password with the CLI using the Craft port Telnet or the modem you cannot use SNMP or HTTP We recommend you use this operator to perform the remaining configuration tasks To create a new operator 1 From the control console enter the name password state context of nonSNMP and
231. mote upstream device Cia re Cortana E i Remote LANs Palo Alto DSL l fer a Wiring Closet WAN g vet Santa Clara Corporate CopperVPN 1 4 LAN pp j m Upstream Router with ARP Table pe See eee aera ii i Frame Relay CopperVPN2 H with ARP Tabe Ore as San Francisco CopperVPN n Public with ARP Table a Internet O Upstream Router CE150 O PVCn Copper VPN Network Model Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 69 Each CopperVPN group is separate and independent from the others so groups can have overlapping IP addresses This sep aration together with the overall design of the CE150 also en hances security by preventing IP packets from crossing from one CopperVPN group to another There is no restriction on the size of CopperVPN groups a group may have one member or in clude every DSL port To establish a CopperVPN link you must issue a series of set cmlface commands to the interfaces making up the CopperVPN group to the DSL ports and the associated WAN VC 1 For each DSL port to be aggregated configure its NetModel DestPI and EncapsulationType objects as follows CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel coppervpn destpii 1 4 1 23 encapsulationtype rfc1483 Set Successful CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 4 1 Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 4 1 0 PII 1 4 1 0
232. mple configuration For example Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 4 1 0 PII 1 4 1 0 IfIndex db Ak NetModel IP IpAddr 192 168 1 1 NetMask 20942 oe MacAddr Wh Os OSTOT BurnedInMacAddr On COe See Onis FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPii 1 2 1 32 CMCPCompatible Yes EncapsulationType rfcl483 FwdMode IP Policy Pix 27 As shown in this example policy routed DSL links do have IP addresses and subnet masks because packets are routed to them with full IP routing Packets forwarded in IP Policy mode are capable of generating the IETF standard TTL Exceeded ICMP error message if the packets expire before reaching their destination V1 6 and lat er This capability enables use of standard TraceRoute diag nostic utilities Note however that because outbound policy routed packets bypass the CE150 routing table a TraceRoute sequence cannot identify the CE150 leg of the route To resolve the hop to and from the CE150 you can add an entry to the routing table that will let the ICMP error message track through and identify the route segment from the WAN VC through the CE150 to the DSL port CPE Chapter 5 Routing Forwarding Managing Links 119 IP Policy Over Ethernet N O T E Performance implications when using the Ethernet port of the CE150 as a WAN interface using the IP Policy netmodel are not clear If you establish other network connections over a WAN port FR ATM V 35 along with a connection
233. mples and their configuration options see the MIB Defini tions in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Configuring ATM VCs for Quality of Service The CE150 supports ATM quality of service QoS for all cells transmitted upstream over an ATM WAN VC Different flavors of voice full range video and video conferencing can be accom modated The CE150 allows you to configure QoS using either the CopperView EM or the CopperCraft CLI You must use three different MIB groups or tables e emCircuitParam e cmATMVcl e cmParamSummary You can create as many as 255 different subclasses of service using the cmCircuitParam group You select either real time Variable Bit Rate rtVBR or non real time Variable Bit Rate nrtVBR and then configure the subclasses with different sizes for Peak Cell Rate PCR Sustained Cell Rate SCR and Maxi mum Burst Size MBS You also can configure Unspecified Bit Rate UBR Afterward you can apply the different subclasses or the differ ent values for PCR SCR and MBS to the different WAN VCs by using the cmATMVcl group Meanwhile you can manage the WAN VCs and different sub classes of service by monitoring the total bandwidth assigned to ports using the cmParamSummary group You can also ad just upward or downward subscription factors on the ports al lowing as much as 2500 percent oversubscription For more information about the MIB groups for applying QoS over AT
234. n Y y gt Enter y or y to save the configuration If the save was success ful the following messages are displayed CE configuration save succeeded 2000 11 14 15 33 17 USER LOGGED OUT If you enter a response other than Y y or if you do not respond within 30 seconds the configuration will not be saved but the logout process will continue If you entered Y y to save the configuration but do not want to wait for the save process press Esc The configuration will be saved and the logout process will continue Command Line Interface In general commands and other data can be entered without regard to case either capital letters or lowercase letters are ac ceptable However to specify a directory path on a file server use lowercase letters as many servers are case sensitive and will not download their software if commands are not lower case If a long command line wraps or for any reason you are in doubt about what the entire line actually contains and in what order type L Control L to refresh the display of the entire command For more information about line editing see Copper Craft Line Editor on the next page Chapter 3 Initial Configuration 45 CopperCraft Line Editor Command strings for SNMP object groups can be very short or very long especially when you are setting a series of new pa rameters in an object group Here is an example of a short getall command which returns data about all of the bo
235. n cases of emergency system down we recommend that you replace the module during a scheduled maintenance period at off peak hours To replace a SCM WAN module 1 If the installed System Control Module is operational e Set FTP to Binary mode and copy the Configuration file to a workstation e Or back up the existing configuration file as described in Backing Up the Saved Config File on page 110 2 Power down the system and disconnect all front panel cables from the System Control WAN Module 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the System Control WAN Module 4 Lift the module extraction levers to gently separate the System Control Module from its connector inside the CE150 When the module is free remove it from the CE150 and transfer it to a suitable anti static container 5 Remove the new System Control Module from its anti static bag and install in the empty CE150 System Control slot 6 Gently but firmly seat the module into its connector inside the CE150 If the module does not readily mesh with the connector pins do not force it pull the module out and try again Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 211 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 When the module is seated in the connector ensure that the extraction levers lay flat module inserted position and use your fingers to screw in the two retainer screws Finger tighten only do not over torque Reconnect the f
236. n code If Status Done the total elapsed time of the test If Status Done the total transmit count for the test If Status Done the total received errors for the test Test sub type Additional error information Port name Port PII Group name Cleared by None Trap cmLoopStatusChange 246 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Type Severity Description RisingThresholdAlert Notification Sent by the System Control Module when a performance value exceeds its threshold Information included in the event Index Threshold variable Sampling method Actual value Threshold value to compare against Port name Port PIl Group name Cleared by None Trap cmRisingAlarm Appendix C Event and Alarm Reference 247 248 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Appendix D Upgrading System Software This appendix provides procedures for installing upgrades to the CE150 software Installation of a software upgrade is by definition a service affecting event and should only be per formed during scheduled maintenance at off peak times If you receive notice of a software upgrade to the CE150 be sure to read any printed materials or files that accompany the new software Those specific instructions will always be more impor tant the procedures presented here are a more generalized view of the sequence required to update the CE150 file system In the procedures the term local ma
237. n entry exists for DSL PII 2 Ifit exists verify that the Function object is set correctly DHCPRespond DHCPRelay or DHCPForward For DHCP Relaying 1 Verify that the upstream router is able to perform the DHCP Relay or DHCP Server function 2 Ifthe netmodel is IP verify that the DHCP Server s IP address configured in the cmDHCPTable is reachable from the CE150 For DHCP Relay and Forwarding Check the cmDHCPTable and verify that the CircuitID ob ject is correct This is used by the upstream DHCP server for generating the appropriate DHCP responses 190 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Loopbacks The CE150 can be configured for a number of loopback tests useful not only in isolating failures but also in evaluating line performance over various segments of the end to end circuit In the current CE150 product release loopbacks are available for test and evaluation of the following SDSL ports DS3 ATM and Frame Relay ports and DS1 ports Three DSL loopbacks between the CE150 main processor and the subscriber CPE are controlled through the cmLoop group All of the loopback tests are packet oriented except the SCM CPE BER loopback which is a bit error rate test The cmLoo pHistory group provides information on the ten most recent tests run through the cmLoop group For information on con figuring cmLoop and cmLoopHistory see the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual
238. ncapsulation For DSL VCs configured with a cmlfaceTable entry the VC encapsulation is specified directly by that cmlfaceTable entry Appendix A Overview of Data Encapsulation 223 224 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Appendix B cmliface Configuration Data Forwarding Configuration The CE150 is capable of a wide variety of protocol processing functions for user data It requires a significant amount of op erator configuration to implement functions Each interface on the CE150 operates in one of five major net working models or netmodels IP VWAN Cross Connect CopperVPN HDIA You can configure interfaces independently and all netmodels may be simultaneously operating in a single CE150 DSL CopperEdge DSLAM IP VWAN CrossConnect CopperVPN HDIA WAN CE150 with Five Simultaneous Netmodels Appendix B cmlface Configuration 225 In general the netmodels behave quite differently and require very different configuration Later in this appendix we will dis cuss each netmodel separately But first we describe some com mon principles used in the CE150 The CE150 is a DSLAM or Digital Subscriber Line Access Mul tiplexor Therefore it is primarily a data forwarding and multi plexing device that connects DSL subscribers to Network Service Providers NSPs An NSP may be a third party service provider such as an Internet Service P
239. nclude up to five additional object names after the three objects and values to refine the output The system will return only the values for the instance and the object names for those entries that matched the specified criteria Chapter 3 Initial Configuration 51 Initial Configuration With the CE150 successfully started you can now configure the CE150 associated host devices and links both DSL links and upstream WAN links Initial configuration consists of set ting up attributes for two way communication over the net work The required steps described in the following sections consist of If your CopperEdge Concentrator is equipped with a DS3 Protection Switch Alarm Panel test the redundancy performance Setting up records user names and passwords for authorized system operators Storing the CE150 system name location and contact information optional Setting the system clock Specifying an SNMP manager to which traps will be sent a trap destination Configuring the CE150 network interfaces to enable remote access for system management The CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual contains a reference of all of the CE150 MIB groups and their objects and additional information about configuring or viewing them 52 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Configure Operator Names This section describes the method of configuring and managing operator names and p
240. nd no par ity bit The modem is set to automatically answer on the second ring However it will take longer to answer when it is trying to recon nect after a disconnection it cannot answer on the second ring because it is still busy disconnecting from the previous session If the modem connection is dropped and the operator did not log out of the Craft session the Craft session is terminated within 15 minutes The session is immediately available with out requiring a password to the next person who dials in dur ing the 15 minute period This is a security risk make sure all operators are aware that they need to properly log out of the Craft session Unlike the SCM 1 and SCM 2 boards you can concurrently use the Craft and Modem ports on the SCM 3 board 34 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide DS3 WAN Module ATM or Frame Relay The DS3 WAN module either Frame or ATM has separate BNC connectors for the Transmit and Receive signals Two RG59 U coaxial cables are provided to complete the connection between the module and the DS3 access device Two subminiature co axial connectors SMB allow test equipment to be connected to the Transmit and Receive Monitor ports SMB Coaxial Transmit Connector SMB Coaxial Status LEDs Receive Connector RECEIVE RANSMIT mopute DS3 FRAME SYSTEM i i Corro Loca FAR END ae
241. nd the resultant forwarding mode can only be done by configuring the bundle 7 Using cmSublface create the virtual circuit s for the IMUX bundle In the process set the destination PII to point to the desired virtual circuit on the WAN link CRAFT gt set cmsubiface 1 51 1 16 rowstatus create destpii 1 2 1 200 Set Successful 8 Using frCircuit create the entry for the virtual circuit on the WAN link if it does not already exist At the same time set the values for the Frame Relay congestion management parameters CRAFT gt set frcircuit 1 2 1 200 throughput n1 committedburst n2 excessburst n3 Set Successful Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 101 DSL Voice and Data Service In addition to conventional packet data traffic the CE150 can accommodate voice over IP and other types of real time IP traf fic such as video conferencing These real time packets and non real time packets can coexist within the CE150 and both types of signals can share the composite data stream over DSL ports and WAN ports Both types of packets can also flow simultaneously over any of the CE150 s Virtual Circuits ATM Frame Relay or DSL To op timize voice performance in this mixed environment the CE150 provides for the assignment of various levels of priority to delay sensitive real time packets over non real time packets Separate mechanisms are used for allocating priorities to traffic received over the DSL port Class of Service
242. ndard IDSN network element counter The monitor sends both stan dard EOC messages and a Copper Mountain specific message that the CPE use to learn the configured data rate If for some reason the EOC path fails the CPE may still be able to deter mine the data rate based on receiving Copper Mountain CMCP packets The monitor state machine is called once a second Customer Premises Loop IDSLCPE NT 5 7 IDSL Line Unit Line Unit gt Line Unit y Line Unit I Mod gt Tesi k Repeater or App LT Je NT Jet LT g NT l LT System Hop 0 Hop 5 CopperEdge DSLAM Digital Loop Carrier co Remote Remote DTE CO Term D Bank D Bank Control Hop 4 Hop 3 Hop 2 Hop 1 Module IDSL Loop with Multiple Network Elements If the entire IDSL loop is intact EOC will detect and report the presence of the CPE at the downstream end of the loop If the link is not complete EOC will attempt to count the network el ements that are in place and functioning and report the num ber through the cmIdsIModem NetworkElements object Thus if you know how many hops are supposed to comprise a link then isolating the area of the malfunction becomes much less complicated Similarly if the CPE at the end of an IDSL link is able to train but other performance factors are degraded or marginal the
243. nector with an On Off switch as shown in the previous illustration To connect 120 VAC power to the CE150 follow these steps 1 Take the power cord that comes in the box with the CE150 and plug it into your power source 2 Make sure the rocker switch beside the power plug is set to Off 3 Plug the power cord into the 120 VAC power connector 48 VDC Power Connection The CE150 may be connected to 48 VDC power systems in ac cordance with the following requirements Provide Over Current Protection The CE150 may be connected to either of the following 48 VDC power systems however the maximum current must be limited to 20 amperes e If the CE150 is connected to an single 48 VDC power supply the supply must comply with the regional Regulatory Safety Standards identified in the Certifications section of this manual and internally current limit the 48 VDC to no more than 20 amperes If the CE150 is connected to a Bulk 48 VDC power supply system the supply system must comply with the regional Regulatory Safety Standards identified in the Certifications section of this manual and external 20 Ampere Circuit Breakers must be installed between the Bulk 48 VDC power source and the CE150 48 VDC power input Chapter 2 Installation 23 Ground the CE150 Chassis When operating on 48 VDC power the CE150 chassis must be connected to a professionally installed Protective Earth which is independent of the AC Main
244. nfiguration process There is a danger of explosion if the battery is replaced incorrectly Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Fuses The telephone line interface module DSL module and AC Power module in the CE150 are equipped with over current protection de vices For continued protection against the risk of fire and electric shock make sure to replace any fuse with a fuse of the same type and rating as the original Protective Earthing In some cases the CE150 needs additional grounding to be in com pliance with local Safety Standards If the CE150 is installed such that the SDSL loops or analog modem interfaces are connected to telephone wiring that is external to the building the unit must be permanently connected to an Earth Ground in accordance with local and National Safety Standards us ing the protective earthing terminal on the rear of the equipment The Earth Ground must be professionally installed by a qualified electrician Refer to instructions provided in Chapter 2 Installation and Maintenance The CE150 must be installed in a restricted access area which is only accessible to trained and qualified personnel All CE150 installation and maintenance must be performed by trained and qualified personnel CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating
245. nformation see Saving Values on page 108 12 At the far end of the VWAN link the main LAN site configure the IRB capable router to provide a bridge virtual interface BVI 13 For example here is a typical config txt file for a Cisco Systems IRB capable router showing the relevant entries for VWAN in this example the DLCI number is 30 1 interface Ethernet0 ip address 192 1 1 188 255 255 255 0 1 interface Serialo no ip address encapsulation frame relay IETF no keepalive ignore dcd interface Serial0 1 point to point frame relay interface dlci 30 bridge group 1 1 interface Seriall no ip address shutdown 1 interface BVI1 mac address 0000 0c00 338c ip address 206 41 72 1 255 255 255 0 no keepalive bridge irb bridge 1 protocol ieee bridge 1 route ip 14 For additional information please consult the documentation supplied by the manufacturer Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 67 15 Log out of the Command Line Interface by entering exit quit OF logout at the prompt 16 If you fail to log out the system will perform an auto logout after approximately 15 minutes same as Telnet 68 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide CopperVPN Netmodel With this netmodel either in static forwarding mode or auto learning mode subscriber links act as wide area extensions of a DSL remote LAN Unlike the VWAN netmodel CopperVPN does not rely on the upstream device for i
246. ng Forwarding Managing Links This chapter discusses the 20OOCE150 s network interfaces and considerations in routing DSL links It describes ATM and Frame Relay functionality as implemented in the CE150 and provides instructions with examples for configuring circuits and connections for communication over Frame Relay and ATM links and over the Ethernet when that interface is used for net work access A reference listing of all of the CE150 MIB objects including those related to ATM and Frame Relay functionality configura tion status and performance monitoring is contained in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Chapter 5 Routing Forwarding Managing Links 113 Features No special commands or objects are needed for configuring ei ther Frame Relay or ATM WAN VCs All parameters are acces sible from the existing CE150 MIB tables DS3 Frame Relay Module The Frame Relay WAN VCs currently support DS3 ATM Module RFC 1973 point to point protocol over Frame Relay RFC 1483 encapsulation FUNI RFC 1490 bridged or routed IP encapsulation NNI on WAN Links RFC 1315 DLCMI and link PVC performance error monitoring Traffic Shaping with settings for Committed Information Rate CIR Committed Bursts CB and Excess Bursts EB Link Management Interface LMI with protocols LMI Revl ANSIT1 617 D and Q9 33 Annex A IP packet filtering on VCs The ATM WAN VCs currently sup
247. nt Group cmTrapEventTable Instance 11 SeqNum Type ObjectClass ClassId ProbableCause Severity TimeTag Text 11 11 ConfigWriteFailed System T000 0 Information 2000 10 02 10 22 23 Unable to open the file See Appendix C Events and Alarms for more information about the ConfigWriteFailed event 188 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Terminate an Operator Session An operator may forget to log out and a script may still be run ning preventing the CE150 from automatically logging the ses sion out after a time out expires Using the cmActiveSession group you can terminate any Craft FTP or SNMP sessions whether they were opened locally or through the Radius au thentication server But to terminate a session an operator must have security level privileges First list all active sessions to find the instance of the one you want to terminate CRAFT gt geta cmactivesession SessionID OperatorName Context Privilege IpAddress StartTime IdleTimeout RowStatus Instance 982 982 private SNMP Provision 0 64 20 162 8 day 18 hour 33 m 900 Active Instance 983 983 ce200 Telnet Security 0 64 20 249 8 day 18 hour 36 m 900 Active Instance 984 984 public SNMP View 0 64 40 66 8 day 18 hour 36 m 900 Active Instance 985 983 ce200 Telnet Security 0 64 20 234 8 day 18 hour 36 m 900 Active You can optionally view the information for that session only CRAFT gt get cmacti
248. ntegration of routing and bridging functions The CE150 learns the IP and MAC ad dress and port number for every host supported by the CPEs CopperVPN is a layer 3 LAN extension to an upstream router It simplifies the connection of DSL lines between end users and a remote LAN or other corporate network With it you can combine a number of DSL ports into a group within the CE150 You can send the data over a single virtual circuit across the network to a single destination typically a router at an ISP or a Corporate site Each CopperVPN PVC thus comprises a Virtual Private Net work of DSL subscribers without the need for any special router capabilities such as IRB or compatible IOS versions For each CopperVPN group the CE150 has a separate ARP ta ble which it uses to perform the IP to MAC address transla tion Incoming IP PDUs from the upstream router are properly delivered to their intended DSLs and nowhere else On the DSL LAN the CE150 acts as a proxy for the upstream router and replies to ARP requests from devices connected to the various DSL ports Then when the host on the DSL LAN responds with upstream transmission of MAC PDUs the CE150 simply for wards them to the appropriate upstream router in IP PDU for mat The CE150 obtains knowledge of the address of the upstream router in one of two ways either from the static con figuration entry of the WAN PVC s cmlface FarEndAddr object or from an inverse ARP request to the re
249. nterface and back bone can be either Frame Relay or ATM DSL VCs configured for VC VC payload using the Cross Connect netmodel generally use the Q922 1490 encapsulation type This setting used only on DSL VCs specifies e The DSL physical port encapsulation is Q 922 thus allowing Frame Relay or FUNI VCs on it The encapsulation on every VC using that port is RFC 1490 Branch Office IDSL Subscriber e Client IPA 192 168 10 2 Gateway 192 168 10 1 l AY Basie Sse WAN Wiring Closet l Corporate Headquarters po Public Corporate LAN Upstream BRI 192 168 1 1 Ethernet 192 168 10 1 PII 1 4 2 22 p Up to 6 PVCs Per DSL Port Router me ATM or FR CE150 192 168 1 2 2 1 900 Set cmiface 1 4 2 netmodel frame encapsulationtype 0922 l Network I Set cmsubiface 1 4 2 22 destpii 1 4 1 To Set cmidslm 1 4 2 datarate 128 VC VC Payload Fowarding Model Chapter 4 Advanced Configu 73 ration FRF 5 Forwarding Mode This translation mode allows a DSL port on the CE150 to re ceive Q 922 HDLC frames transform them into ATM AAL5 PDUs and send them to an ATM WAN interface for transmis sion across an ATM network At the other end of the network a reverse translation allows the Q 922 HDLC frames to be recov ered To configure this mode set the netmodel and encapsulation type on the DSL and WAN interfaces
250. o RFC 2364 the flag and Q 922 header are stripped away For the RFC 2364 Null encapsula tion Control and NLPID are removed as well For the RFC 2364 LLC encapsulation an LLC header is prepended to the frame and the NLPID is retained With both RFC 2364 encapsula tions an optional pad and a CPCS PDU trailer are appended to the frame at the ATM driver level The process is reversed to convert an RFC 2364 frame to RFC 1973 The following frame based line cards and WAN interfaces in the CE150 support RFC 1973 encapsulation e SDSL e Tl e DS3 Frame e Quad T1 The following ATM based line cards and WAN interfaces in the CE150 support RFC 2364 encapsulation e G lite e G dmt e DS3 ATM Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 75 RFC 1973 is configured on the port level for DSL links Then DSL VCs are configured with cmSublface entries The DSL VCs assume the DSL port encapsulation To configure DSL RFC 1973 to WAN RFC 2364 null 1 Set the DSL port netmodel and encapsulation CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 5 1 netmod cross connect encapsulationtype rfc1973 2 Create the cmSublface row and set the destination PII CRAFT gt set cmsubiface 1 5 1 20 destpii 1 2 1 100 3 Set WAN VC encapsulation CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 100 encapsulationtype rfc2364 null 4 Create a cmAtmVcl row for the WAN VC CRAFT gt set cmatmvel 1 2 1 100 vpi 1 vci 121 adminstatus up After configuration WAN VC 1 3 1 100 has a forwarding mo
251. ocol IDs 12 Name Description 0 IP Pseudo protocol number matches any Internet protocol 1 ICMP Internet control message protocol 2 IGMP Internet group multicast protocol 3 GGP Gateway gateway protocol 6 TCP Transmission control protocol 17 UDP User datagram protocol 4 Source port comparison For TCP and UDP packets only compares the source TCP UDP port with the port specified by the filter The comparison standard can be set to detect a match if the value of the packet s source port is ANY LT GT EQ NE anything less than the filter port greater than the filter port equal to the filter port not equal to the filter port 96 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 5 Destination port comparison For TCP and UDP packets only compares the destination TCP UDP port of the packet with the port of the filter The comparison standard can specify a match if the value of the packet s destination port is ANY anything LT less than the filter port GT greater than the filter port EQ equal to the filter port NE not equal to the filter port N O T E In specifying Source or Destination Port Comparisons please be aware that the options Any and NE are homophones of each other Always check for understanding to be sure that any oral instruction to configure this option as Any is not misinterpreted as NE or vice versa The pass and block actions are self explanatory
252. odel Data and Voice Networks Each IAD has an IP address for its voice VC Similarly the hosts that the IAD serves through its Ethernet port have IP addresses on the data subnet The data VCs on the subnet must be mapped to a single data VC on a WAN port Also the data VC on the WAN port must be mapped to an upstream data router which itself must have an IP address on the subnet Host IPAddr 10 0 20 2 IP Addr 10 0 20 2 IP Addr 10 0 20 0 Net mask 32 Net mask 26 IP Addr 10 0 20 1 Default PII 1 4 13 528 PII 1 2 1 20 Router F i B b IAD HDIA y DSLAM IP Addr 10 0 21 2 h Voice IP Addr 10 0 21 2 IP Addr 10 0 21 0 Ww Net mask 32 Net mask 26 IP Addr 10 0 21 1 Gate ay PII 1 4 13 22 PII 1 2 1 21 HDIA Netmodel IP Addresses and Netmasks Chapter 6 Voice over DSL 139 To simplify the process of addressing and configuring Copper Rocket IADs the CE150 is able to exchange information with them through both CMCP and DHCP messages The Plug and Play feature eliminates the need for users or administrators to configure CopperRocket IADs locally The CE150 and the Cop perRocket IADs attached to its DSL ports can send the following types of data e IP addresses and netmasks for voice and data VCs e voice gateway types voice gateway IP addresses e fragmentation capabilities e maximum number of voice channels on CopperRocket IADs e CPE data function and data encapsu
253. ogy Equipment Including Electrical Busi ness Equipment UL Recognized Component gt Canada CAN CSA C22 2 No 950 95 3rd Edition CUL Recognized Component e Product Emissions United States Compliant with the Code of Federal Reg ulations Title 47 Part 15 Radio Frequency Devices Subpart B Class A Canada Compliant with Canadian ICES 003 Class A e Telecommunications United States Compliant with the Code of Federal Reg ulations Title 47 Part 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to Telephone Network Canada Compliant with Canadian Certification Specifi cation for terminal equipment Terminal Systems Net work Protection Devices Connection Arrangements and Hearing Aids Compatibility CS 03 For complete information about new features hardware soft ware compatibility and late breaking operational or other is sues that the operator or installer should know about consult the Release Notes document corresponding to the version of hardware and installed software in this CE150 A copy of the applicable Release Notes document should be packed with the CE150 in the same accessory pack as this manual In addition electronic copies of all release notes are available at the Copper Mountain support FTP site From your web brows er enter ftp userid support coppermountain com Enter your password when prompted to complete your login CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Technical Support
254. ol Module WAN Module System Control Module with optional WAN Connection DSL Module DSL Module Blank Filler Panel Fan Assembly AC or DC Power Module CE150 Module Arrangement Control Console A Control Console a notebook or other portable PC is typically used at installation and can be used by an on site operator at any time to provide direct serial port access to the CopperCraft command line interface CLI to act as an external file server or to monitor information at the CE150 s Diagnostic port Cables The following cables are included with your base system e Power Cable stranded red black and green For connection to 120 VAC Mains Power an IEC 320 AC Power Cable For connection to 48 VDC Power and Ground 12 Stranded Red Black and Green or Green Yellow Stripe UL Recognized Copper Wire Closed 12 Wire Crimp Lugs N O T E The CE150 can be powered by 120 VAC or 048 VDC but not both Chapter 2 Installation 15 e One DSL Connector Cable 10 feet of 24 25 pair cable with Amphenol connectors and locking clips Connects the CopperEdge chassis to the Intermediate Distribution Frame One cable is required for every 24 DSL ports One 10Base T Ethernet Cable 10 feet of Category 5 shielded twisted pair STP 10Base T cable with RJ 45 connectors on each end EJA 568A Connects the CopperEdge Ethernet port to the LAN concentrator One Local Craft Interface Cable
255. on s WAN VC Encapsulations FwdMode Netmodel Cross Connect HDLC None HDLC VC payload Used for PPP HDLC to PPP HDLC Cisco PPP ATM Cross Connect PPP HDLC RFC1973 PPP HDLC 1973 PPP HDLC to RFC1973 DSL VC Translations Netmodel DSL VC Encapsulations This table covers the DSL port encapsulations that support VCs It describes Cross Connects from a DSL VC to a WAN VC Since DSL VCs defined in the cmsublface table have no Fwd Mode object operators must look to the Cross Connected WAN VC for the FwdMode which the CE150 uses for both the DSL VC and the WAN VC In these cases the DSL port has a Fwd Mode Per VC since each DSL VC has its own FwdMode DSL Port VC Encapsulations WAN VC Encapsulations FwdMode Notes Cross Connect None None VC VC payload payload transparent including PPP RFC2364 This is not really a translation FRF 5 FRF 5 FRF 5 Cross Connect RFC1490 RFC1483 FRF 8 1490 1483 FRF 8 translate None VC VC payload payload transparent including PPP RFC2364 FRF 5 FRF 5 FRF 5 Cross Connect RFC1973 RFC 1973 PPP Transparent Like VC VC payload but with encapsulations specified and validated RFC 2364 null PPP Translation FRF 8 translate RFC 2364 LLC PPP Translation FRF 8 translate None VC VC payload payload transparent a For DSL VCs configured with a cmSublfaceTable entry the VC encapsulation is implied by the DSL port e
256. on the OAM function will respond to AIS messages from the network by sending out RDI messages It also will respond to Loopback Request messages sent by a de vice on the other end of the network But it will not send out Loopback Requests 90 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Configuring the OAM Loopback Function The loopback function has two parts an automatic function and a manual function You can operate them at the same time or separately The automatic function is simply for discovering when a fault occurs the manual function is for discovering where the fault is on the connection Automatic Loopback Requests The automatic loopback function will operate as long the port and the VC are UP and as long as the OAMAdminState function is Enabled It will operate at the periods specified in the Interval and Timeout objects It will record loopback failure in the OAM State object To configure the loopback function within the OAM function first configure the ports and VCs as described in the previous section then the OAMAutoLBState object You may want to make changes in the loopback interval and the loopback time out Follow these steps 1 Check the ATM WAN port and the ATM VC for their AdminStatus Make sure they are both set to Up 2 Configure the ATM VC for OAMAutoLBState by setting it to Enable CRAFT gt set cmatmvcl 1 2 1 101 oamautolbstate enabled 3 Check the OAMLBInterval object Its def
257. one WAN port appear In the procedure that follows first the WAN VC at 1 2 1 130 will be created Then the DSLVC at 1 4 1 23 will be created Finally the DSL VC will be mapped to the WAN VC Configuration of the VC on the Telco router and configuration of the VC on the CPE router are not shown VC 1 4 1 23 VC 1 2 1 130 HOST 1 NAT amp Cross Route DHCP Connect Tables 2 CPE Telco Router Router VPI 0 VPI 1 VCl 32 VCl 121 Cross Connect Netmodel VPIs and VCls 162 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide For the first PPP connection on the DSL port follow these steps l Set the VC on the WAN port The VPI and VCI on the WAN VC must match the ones on the Telco router but the VCL does not have to match its counterpart on the Telco router Set AdminStatus to Up CRAFT gt set cmatmvcl 1 2 1 130 vpi 1 vci 121 adminstatus up Perform a Get on the VC and you will see this table CRAFT gt get cmatmvcl 1 2 1 130 Group cmAtmVclTable Instance 1 2 1 130 PII 1 2 1 130 Vpi 1 Vei 121 AdminStatus Up OperStatus Up LastChange 0 day 0 hour 0 min 0 0 sec 1999 12 23 04 03 39 AalType Aald5 Aal5CpcsTransmitSduS 1600 Aal5CpcsReceiveSduSi 1600 RowStatus Active TransmitTrafficDescr 1 OAMState adminDown 0 OAMAdminState disabled OAMAutoLBState disabled OAMManualLBCmd none OAMManualLBCmdStatus none OAMLBInterval 5 OAMLBTimeOut 15 OAMTxAISCells 0
258. onfigured as mem bers of a WAN group 232 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Cross Connect Netmodel This section assumes you are familiar with the networking con cepts of Copper Mountain s Cross Connect netmodel It pro vides details of how to configure the Cross Connect functions of the CE150 Ethernet interfaces don t support the Cross Connect netmodel WAN VCs do not need to be configured for Cross Connect mode because they assume Cross Connect mode automatically when referenced by DSL ports VC to VC Frame Forwarding In this mode the CE150 treats the physical DSL interface as a Frame Relay interface To configure this mode set the DSL port s NetModel and set Encapsulation Q922 For each VC on the DSL interface configure a cmSublface entry with the DSL VC s PII and set the cmSublface DestPii to the WAN VC to which the DSL VC is Cross Connected For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype q922 CRAFT gt set cmsubiface 1 4 1 40 destpii 1 2 1 61 HDLC to VC Frame Forwarding In this mode the CE150 forwards HDLC frame payloads into WAN VC payloads To configure this mode set the DSL port s NetModel Encapsulation HDLC and DestPii You must speci fy a WAN VC as the DestPii For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype hdlc destpii 1 2 1 61 PPP Frame Conversion In this mode the CE150 converts PPP HDLC f
259. only through the Diagnostic port such as options that facilitate recovery from software lockups may cause undesirable results Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 201 Syslog In certain situations it can be helpful to collect diagnostic in formation from a number of different CopperEdge units CE200 or CE150 such as when multiple units are exhibiting the same or similar kinds of symptoms To facilitate collecting this data at a central location the CopperEdge unit can be configured as a UNIX Syslog client With the Syslog capability diagnostic information from a num ber of CopperEdge units which was previously available only at each unit s control module Diagnostic port can be sent directly to a file on a UNIX based server Solaris or Linux in standard Syslog message format While the Syslog capability requires that you configure the Cop perEdge units and UNIX server as clients the log file should not be considered a user accessible function Since Syslog messages are identical in content and format to those at the CopperEdge Diagnostic ports the same cautions apply Syslog message information cannot be reliably interpret ed by an operator and should only be retrieved with the active participation of Copper Mountain Technical Support Data from the log can then be returned to the factory where the contents can be analyzed by Copper Mountain technical staff N O T E Syslog messages occur as the result of certain normal
260. opperVPN and Cross Connect netmodels are the same as they have always been Since you must set the net model on the port you do not need a VC The system uses a de fault of 528 In contrast the procedures for configuring voice VCs on the DSL ports for the HDIA netmodel are new and re quire some explanation Special configuration of the IADs is necessary Chapter 6 Voice over DSL 137 Dual Pathways on an IAD The CopperRocket IADs CR408 CR508 CR508T like all IADs provide two types of access They permit voice and data VCs on a single SDSL line running at speeds ranging from 128 Kbps to 1 5 Mbps For sending and receiving voice packets the Copper Rocket IADs are compatible with both GR 303 gateways and other types of gateways The front panel of a CR408 for example has connectors for a DSL twisted pair and an Ethernet cable With the 10 100BaseT connector users on a LAN can access the data subnet on the CE150 Front Panel DSL Ethernet cable cable telephony DS LAI m mi ir i eS H link link O O pum puw io OR OR E E E E O O power 12345678 daa data MDIX MDI Power Telephony Hub Computer on off on off Front Panel of the CR408 The rear panel of a CR408 has an RJ 21 connector With the RJ 21 connector users on eight phone lines at a time can ac cess the voice subnet on the CE150 In addition for emergency serv
261. or multiple physical net works subnet mask A 32 bit address mask used in IP to specify a particular subnet System Control Module The CE150 circuit module that controls timing protocol process ing and overall system functionality T TCA Threshold Crossing Alert A condition which generates an alarm on the CE150 Using the cmAlarmTable which itself uses counters that measure conditions like overruns under runs and errors you can tell the CE150 to indicate when the number of errors becomes unacceptable trap An unsolicited messaged generated by an SNMP agent on a network device due to a threshold value being exceeded or the occur rence of a pre defined event TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Inter net Protocol Currently the most widely used layered transmission protocol for connecting dissimilar computers across networks TDR Time Domain Reflectometer A test device that acts on RADAR like principles to determine the location of metallic faults Telco The Incumbent Local Exchange Carrier ILEC or the Competitive Local Exchange Car rier CLEC TFTP Trivial file Transfer Protocol A simpli fied version of FTP used to transfer files based on UDP User Datagram Protocol with no guarantee of delivery TFTP lacks password protection and certain other capabilities of a full featured FTP application U UBR Unspecified Bit Rate Used to describe certain ATM links V VC Virtual Channel An ATM communica
262. over Ethernet is always dis played as bridge regardless of the number of DSL ports served 122 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Proxy ARP For DSL interfaces that are routed over the 10 100BASE T Ethernet interface the CE150 supports proxy ARP functional ity The feature simplifies configuration by allowing the CE150 when queried to use its own Ethernet MAC address as a proxy for LAN destinations on its connected CPE Proxy ARP for Ethernet is actually the reverse of ARP used in the CopperVPN networking model and described in Chapter 4 In CopperVPN the CE150 replies to queries from CPEs on LANs as a proxy for the upstream router In Proxy ARP for Ethernet the CE150 responds to queries from the upstream device as a proxy for CPEs on LANs The diagram below illustrates Proxy ARP for Ethernet But Proxy ARP is valid only if the DSL port is configured with Net Model IP and also if the network or WAN connection is through the 10 100BASE T Ethernet interface on the primary System Control Module For details on configuring DSL ports for Proxy ARP see the cmProxyARPTable in the CopperEdge 150 Copper Craft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Subscriber LAN Wiring Closet ARP broadcast from Router Where is 192 168 1 1 CE150 Va il Upsiream o Router 192 168 1 0 PIl 1 3 1 0 IPAddr 192 168 99 1 00 80 50 70 0d 5c Proxy reply from CE200 192 168 1 1 is at
263. pass through without regard to IP address Normally the subscriber equipment pro cesses only message packets that contain its IP address and ig nores packets with a different address Occasionally data should not even reach a subscriber s equipment A business for example would want to ensure that its message traffic is not accessible to its competition IP filtering allows links to selectively pass or discard inbound IP packets based on parameters set by the operator In general fil tering applies only to packets that are full IP routed The one exception is for packets that are policy routed to the IP address of the same DSL interface through which they entered the CE150 such as a Ping from a device on a LAN at the customer premise to the IP address of its own associated CE150 DSL in terface Otherwise policy routed packets are not filtered Filtering cannot be done on interfaces with a networking model other than IP or HDIA Also filtering works only on inbound packets before they reach the IP stack Note however that packets may be inbound from either a WAN interface or from a DSL interface provided they are destined for an IP address that terminates in the CE150 itself The following flow chart shows the general flow of filtered packets in the CE150 Packets from CPE l Kora lt to this same gt N To WAN VC DSL port lt jf Policy Z Packets from WAN vc DSL Interface
264. phone in terface The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5 This equipment uses Canadian CA11A Jacks CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide vii viii CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introducing the CopperEdge 150 2002eeeees 1 Concept of Operation 0 000s 2 Management Tools 0 0 0 cee eae 3 Third Party Customer Premise Equipment CPE 4 Hardware Features 0 0 0 cee eae 5 Specifications rei eian a E a Ea eee 5 PSL Platone draei a aba aa E n a a E AN n ewes a 5 Physical Dimensions 0 000 eee eee ee 5 INPUT POWOP nits 4 anA aE els ai Beet AE AV aE 5 Operating Environment 000 0c e eee eee 5 System Control Modules 0 0000 cece eee een ees 6 Buffer Control Modules 000 cece eee eee 7 Line Modules 0 00 cece eee 7 WAN ModuleS iuty often theme uted bia peeGlndig a A Na aa La 7 Software Features 0000 c cette ee 8 DSL Link Protocols 0 000 cece eee ee 8 Packet Multiplexing Protocols 00000 eee eee 8 Network Standard Protocols 0000 cee eee eee 8 Network Management 00 00 c cece eae 9 Reliability Serviceability 0 000 cece eee 9 Product Certification in
265. port RFC 1483 multi protocol encapsulation over ATM RFC 1490 multi protocol encapsulation over Frame RFC 2364 point to point protocol over ATM ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits Switched Virtual Circuits not supported at this time ATE functioning as an ATM Host Traffic Shaping with service categories ubr nrtVBR rtVBR and with settings for Peak Cell Rate PCR Sustained Cell Rate SCR Maximum Burst Size MBS and CDV Cell Delay Variation OAM Fault Management with Alarm Indication Signals AISs and Remote Defect Indications RDIs along with functions for automatic and manual diagnostic loopbacks virtual connections no virtual path tunneling IP packet filtering on VCs 114 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide DS1 Frame Relay Module or Quad T1 The ATM WAN VCs currently support RFC 1973 point to point protocol over Frame Relay RFC 1483 encapsulation FUNI RFC 1490 bridged or routed IP encapsulation NNI on WAN Links RFC 1315 DLCMI and link PVC performance error monitoring Traffic Shaping with settings for Committed Information Rate CIR Committed Bursts CB and Excess Bursts EB Link Management Interface LMI with protocols including LMI Rev1 ANSIT1 617 D and Q9 33 Annex A IP packet filtering on VCs identical to that on DSL links Receive timing from a clock recovered from the network line signal transmit timing from a local internal clock or a transmit clock recover
266. ppropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Require ments documents The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connect ed to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some sit uations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are con nected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas C A U T I ON Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Ringer Equivalence Number REN of this device is 0 6 The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indi cation of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a tele
267. privilege level of Provision CRAFT gt set cmoperator mick password stones state create context nonsnmp privilege provision Set Successful 2 Verify the new operator configuration CRAFT gt get cmoperator mick Group cmOperator Instance Mick Name Mick Password KKK KKK State active Context nonSNMP Privilege Provision Passwords are not displayed If a user forgets a password the Security Administrator can change it to another one or else delete the operator and start again 3 Test the new operator by logging out of the Craft session and logging in with the new username and password CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Change the Factory Default Operator Password To ensure continued system security you must change the password for the factory default operator name Otherwise un authorized users could gain access to your system with full privileges to change all settings Passwords are not completely case sensitive the first character of a password may be accepted regardless of case The system is case sensitive to all successive password characters To change the password CRAFT gt set cmoperator admin password b5c312r Set Successful Verify the change CRAFT gt get cmoperator admin Group cmOperator Instance admin Name admin Password KKK KKK State active Context All Privilege Security N O T E If your system will be managed through an extern
268. r Network Models Configuration of DSL links SDSL ADSL and T1 line modules on a CE150 focuses on networking models netmodels and en capsulations You must choose a netmodel for each DSL and WAN link You can configure a CE150 with the following net models depending on what your applications are e IP Routing e Virtual Wide Area Network VWAN e CopperVPN e Cross Connect e High Density IP Access HDIA The IP netmodel can be Full IP or Policy based If Policy based it can run over a WAN or Ethernet link The VWAN netmodel can be set in point to point or bridge aggregate mode over ei ther a WAN or Ethernet link Similarly CopperVPN can be set in point to point or aggregate mode but unlike VWAN it can specify the IP address of the far end router or learn the router s IP address with inverse ARP In contrast to VWAN CopperVPN and HDIA the Cross Con nect netmodel only provides point to point connections but it offers many encapsulation types and forwarding modes Final ly the HDIA model can serve voice streams and data streams on the same port when they are separated into different VCs For more details on the netmodels and their encapsulation types see the cmIfaceTable in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual N O T E Configuring DSL interfaces for Voice over SDSL or for Multilink operation entails special requirements and precautions Read and familiarize yourself with the detai
269. rame Module except that dsx3 table listings for PESs PSESs and PCVs will always be zero as those objects apply only when the LineType is M23 The M23 line type is not supported by the CE150 s DS3 ATM Modules Configuring ATM VCs To configure a WAN link for ATM the appropriate DS3 ATM WAN module must be installed and operating The DS3 link must also be set to use your selected timing source local or loop For example CRAFT gt set dsx3config 1 2 1 transmitclocksource loop Next use cmDS3ATM to configure scrambling and cell map ping For example CRAFT gt set cmds3atm 1 2 1 cellpayloadscrambling enabled cellmapping plcp Configuration of the ATM interface and its circuits can then proceed as follows 1 Configure the physical interface For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 netmodel none encapsulationtype rfc1483 2 Create and configure the ATM VCL For example CRAFT gt set cmatmvcl 1 2 1 66 rowstatus create vpi 0 vei 55 adminstatus up 3 Configure the protocol interface cmIface for the ATM VC For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 66 netmodel ip farendaddr 192 166 100 1 encapsulationtype rfc1483 130 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 4 The above example configures an ATM VC for the IP netmodel N O T E If the DS3 ATM physical port is disabled the port does not go idle but transmits AIS signals For more information about the ATM related objects in these exa
270. rames on the DSL link to PPP RFC1973 format on a WAN VC To configure this mode set the DSL port s NetModel Encapsulation PPP HDLC and DestPii You must specify a WAN VC as the DestPii For ex ample CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype ppp hdlc destpii 1 2 1 61 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 16 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype rfc1973 Appendix B cmlface Configuration 233 CopperVPN Netmodel This section assumes you are familiar with the networking con cepts of Copper Mountain s CopperVPN netmodel It provides details of how to configure the CopperVPN functions of the CE150 DSL interfaces To configure CopperVPN mode specify the NetModel Encapsu lation and DestPii The IpAddr is not meaningful in this mode You must specify a WAN VC as the DestPii For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel coppervpn encapsulationtype rfc1490 destpii 1 2 1 61 Note that DSL ports support either encapsulation mode RFC 1483 or RFC 1490 WAN VC interfaces Specify the NetModel and the farEndAddr The farEndAddr is the IP address of the servicing router at the far end of the WAN VC If you set the farEndAddr to non zero this is the IP address that the CE150 uses on the DSL interfaces For example CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 61 netmodel coppervpn farendaddr 172 16 1 1 If you set the farEndAdadr to zero the CE150 uses Inverse ARP to learn the IP address of the servicin
271. raps and alarms e Loopbacks and Loop Quality Tests Built in performance monitors e Diagnostic port assisted by Copper Mountain Technical Support Front Panel LED Indicators Module Status Indicators Circuit modules for the CE150 are equipped with front panel LEDs that show module functionality at a glance The module status LEDs on the AC and DC power modules DSL line mod ules and Buffer Control Module indicate the general status of the circuit pack whenever power is applied Under normal circumstances the module status indicator LEDs should be on and green The Buffer Control Module sta tus LED provides additional information as discussed below Buffer Control Module Status During normal operation startup sequence completed the Buffer Control Module should be green and flickering to indi cate data flow In case of trouble however Buffer Control Mod ules of Version 2 1 63 and later could also display the following e Alternating Red Amber Abnormal operation At least one invalid descriptor has been received from the System Control Module the affected DSL ports have been deactivated unaffected DSL ports will continue to operate normally e Continuous cycle of Red Amber Off Green The Buffer Control Boot PROM cannot properly initialize the module Not usually indicative of a failure in the Buffer Control Module but more likely in the PCI bus or other PCI device Restarting the System Control Module may clear th
272. remise LAN It sends the same response for both Therefore for non CMCP CPEs configure the CE150 as a Forwarding Agent instead of as a DHCP Server See page 85 To configure the CE150 to act as a DHCP Server for a port or VC In cmDHCPTable set the Function object to DHCPRespond You can leave the CircuitID object at the default the system name and the PII of the port or VC CRAFT gt set cmdhcp 1 4 1 0 function dhcprespond Set Successful CRAFT gt get cmdhcp 1 4 1 0 Group cmDHCPTable Instance 1 4 1 0 PII 1 4 1 0 RowStatus Active IpAddress 10 1 2 3 NetMask 255 255 255 255 DefaultRoute 204 20 20 10 84 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide DNSServer Function ServerIPAddr CircuitID 204 20 20 20 DHCPRespond 0 0 0 0 CMIN 1 4 1 0 A CPE CMCP or non CMCP sends a DHCP request Netmodel Cross Connect VWAN HDIA or CopperVPN N Link to DSL PII s 1 4 1 0 7 7 CopperEdge DSLAM The CE responds with the IP address from the cmDHCPTable sending it back to the CPE The CE150 as a DHCP Server The CE150 as a DHCP Forwarding Agent The CE150 forwards DHCP requests from CPEs both CMCP and non CMCP and hosts on the premise LAN to an upstream WAN VC or router To configure the CE 150 to act as a DHCP Forwarding Agent for a port or VC In cmDHCPtTable set the Function to DHCPForward You can leave the CircuitID object at the
273. rent physical interfaces in a sys tem Link Classes Port SDSLPort EthernetPort V 35Port RS232Port DS3FRPort IDSLPort DS3ATMPort T1Port WAN T1Port G litePort G dmtPort T1Port LC These classes identify a logical data connection that runs over a physical interface CPE Classes Link LCPortLink EthernetLink FrameRelayLink FrameRelayPVC ATMLink InterShelffrunk These classes identify the different CPEs connected to the system CR CR201 10x CR201 30x CR201 SDSL CR201 IDSL CPE SDSL Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 179 Logs e CPE IDSL e Netopia SDSL e CPE T1 Support Classes These classes identify resources that are supporting entities in the system e Support e PowerModule e FanModule All events that occur on the CE150 are captured in three loca tions The Event Log contains all monitored events whether a major alarm or a notification e The Alarm Table contains all alarms e The Audit Log contains a record of attribute changes the exact command entered to effect each change and the IP address and name of the operator originating the command Event Log As events occur the information is logged and can be viewed in real time or captured to a file The CE150 maintains a run ning record of the most recent 1 000 events since the system was last reset To view the Event Log in real time connect to the system either directly or through Telnet and enter the command elog In this
274. ring Upon receiving of the request by CopperEdge the Radius server may respond with an Access_Accept packet with the following data in it Access Accept Packet Data Attribute Value Note Idle Timeout Idle Timeout value in sec If this field is empty the CE uses a predefined ond 0 to 2147483647 system Idle Timeout of 15 minutes Filter Id Context HH Where HH is a Hex number of the login context Note Be sure to enter this for this operator Possible context is a bit map 01 exactly as shown witha CONTEXT_HTTP 02 CONTEXT_SNMP 04 space before and after the CONTEXT_TELNET 08 CONTEXT_SERIAL equal sign 10 CONTEXT_SYSTEM 20 CONTEXT_FTP 40 CONTEXT_SHELL Filter Id Privilege DD Where DD is a decimal number specified level of Note Be sure to enter this Privilege designated to the particular operator A exactly as shown with a number represents level of privilege 1 VIEW 2 space before and after the MONITOR 3 PROVISION 4 SECURITY equal sign Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 105 Configuring Radius Servers for CopperEdge Radius servers and their software are available in a number of different versions and implementations Because setup and configuration procedures may vary consult the documentation for whichever type you are using for full configuration particu lars Similarly while the CopperEdge Radius Client uses all the ap plicable Radius at
275. ro FarEndAddr is normally ignored on DSL links unless configured for policy routing over Ethernet Be sure to config ure the EncapsulationType NetModel and any other mandato ry settings as well For example Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 4 1 0 PEE IfIndex Name GroupName AdditionalInfo NetModel IpAddr NetMask MacAddr BurnedInMacAddr FarEndAddr DestPii CMCPCompatible EncapsulationType FwdMode Pix IAS O IA TO System assigned port name User Group ID String User defined text string IP 192 1683 1 209 20 0102 O60 St 0 WO GO St 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Yes rfcl483 tye ine 88 5 oour Cures I n n n li You can change a policy routed DSL link to full IP at any time by setting destPii to 0 0 0 0 The fwdMode field will display the mode Full IP or IP Policy based on the setting of the destPii object 118 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Configuring Policy Routed DSL Links DSL links may be policy routed to a virtual circuit on a CE150 WAN port or to a specific host device on a LAN over the CE150 Ethernet port IP Policy Over WAN To configure a DSL link for policy routing over a WAN link con figure the DSL link set cmiface to specify its IP address net mask and a DestPii The DestPii includes shelf number slot port and the virtual identifier Frame Relay DLCI or ATM virtual circuit number in the full PII format as shown in the following sa
276. ront panel cables disconnected in step 2 Apply power to the system and wait for boot up to complete Connect to the Craft port and use a terminal emulation program to log in to the CE150 Configure the CE150 to talk to the rest of the network a Set the netmodel IP address and netmask of the CE150 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 3 1 netmodel ip ipaddress xxx xxx xxx xxx netmask 255 255 255 xxx b Set the default route for this CE150 CRAFT gt set iproute 0 0 0 0 mask 255 255 255 xxx nexthop xxx xXxXX XXX XXX c Set the SNMP command strings CRAFT gt set cmoperator public context snmp privilege view CRAFT gt set cmoperator private context snmp privilege provision d Save the new configuration CRAFT gt set cmsystem command save If necessary load the software Restore the saved configuration e Set FTP to Binary mode and copy the Configuration file from the workstation e Or refer to Restoring a Backed Up Configuration on page 111 to reinstate the saved system configuration Restart the system CRAFT gt set cmsystem command restart N O T E If you are upgrading to a Buffer Control Module 2 you must also upgrade to a System Control Module 3 The BCM 2 will not work with a SCM 1 or SCM 2 212 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Buffer Control Modules Replacement of the Buffer Control module is service affecting with consequent interruption of service for all subscribers se
277. rovider ISP or it may be a private company providing data services to its employees or branch offices The CE150 forwards the vast majority of user data between subscribers and their NSPs As part of the for warding process the CE150 often modifies the data in some way but very little user data actually terminates in the CE150 Although the CE150 can forward data between any two inter faces most applications involve the CE150 aggregating up stream traffic from many DSL subscribers into one or a few multiplexed WAN interfaces and demultiplexing downstream traffic from the multiplexed WAN interface to many DSL sub scribers A multiplexed WAN interface is typically a high speed Frame Relay or ATM interface with many independent virtual circuits VCs on it Each virtual circuit is a logical point to point link to an NSP Note that in some configurations the WAN interface can be a CE150 Ethernet port or even another DSL port CopperEdge DSLAM CopperEdge DSLAM Upstream Downstream CE150 with Upstream and Downstream Traffic DSL subscribers are usually connected at subscription time to a single NSP and therefore to a single VC on the WAN inter face Thus you can often think of CE150 configuration as con necting CE150 DSL ports to CE150 WAN VCs 226 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide However the CE150 does much more than just connect ports it also performs many other important networking f
278. rt multiple VCs on their DSL ports The CE150 will allow you to map the VCs on the DSL ports to multiple VCs on its WAN VCs The WAN VCs can be on DS3 ATM boards DS3 Frame Relay boards or DS1 boards The number of VCs available are e On G dmt and G lite ports the CE150 will support as many as eight VCs In addition the VPIs and VCIs on each VC on the ADSL ports must match the VPIs and VCIs on the CPE e On the WAN ports the CE150 will support as many as 976 VCs In addition the VPIs and VCIs on each VC on an ATM board must match the VPIs and VCIs on the upstream router Chapter 7 ADSL G lite and G dmt 159 Planning the G dmt and G lite Network Although the ADSL modules both G dmt and G lite support all netmodels we will discuss only two of them Cross Connect in Point to Point Protocol PPP and Full IP The two netmodels have different capabilities and different requirements for con figuring CE150s and CPEs Cross Connect Netmodel and Point to Point Protocol over ATM If you have a LAN and a series of hosts downstream from your CPE and if you have it configured in bridge mode the Cross Connect netmodel can be set up with either public or private IP addresses for the hosts In bridge mode the CPE treats the hosts on the LAN as extensions of a subnet configured at the other end of the PPP connection But if you have a LAN and hosts downstream from your CPE and if you have it configured in router mode the setup is dif
279. rved by this CE150 Except in cases of emergency system down we recommend that you replace any modules during a scheduled maintenance period at off peak hours N O T E If you are upgrading to a Buffer Control Module 2 you must also upgrade to a System Control Module 3 The BCM 2 will not work with a SCM 1 or SCM 2 To replace a Buffer Control Module l Power down the system and disconnect any front panel cables from the affected module Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the module to be replaced Lift the module extraction levers to gently separate the module from its connector inside the CE150 When the module is free remove it from the CE150 and transfer it to a suitable anti static container Remove the new module from its anti static bag and insert it into the empty slot in the CE150 Gently but firmly seat the module into its connector inside the CE150 If the module does not readily mate to the connector do not force it back the module out and try again When the module is seated in the connector ensure that the extraction levers lay flat module inserted position and use your fingers to screw in the two retainer screws Finger tighten only do not over torque Reconnect the front panel cables disconnected in step 1 Apply power to the system and wait for boot up to complete Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 213 DSL Line Modules Replacement of any DSL line module
280. rver e The final step is to enable the cmRadius authentication object on the CopperEdge unit 104 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Attribute User Name N O T E Once the Radius server is provisioned and cmRadiusAuth is enabled security features are under control of the Radius server You can still configure the CopperCraft cmOperatorTable but its contents will no longer be used Operators configured in cmOperator and not contained in the Radius server database will not be able to log in The Radius protocol requires that operator names and passwords are fully case sensitive To make a request for authentication the CopperEdge sends an Access Request packet with the following data to the server Access Request Packet Data Value Text string input by user Note Maximum of 32 characters User Password Text string input by user Maximum of 32 characters This field is one way hashed using the MD5 algorithm Note The CE does not send passwords for SNMP operators such as Public and Private in authentication requests NAS IP Address CE IP Address This is the IP Address of Ethernet port 1 2 1 or 1 15 1 depending on which SCM is being accessed by the operator This field will contain 0 0 0 0 if there is no IP address configured for that port CE Management Ethernet IP address NAS Identifier CE System Name This attribute is omitted if CE System Name is an empty st
281. s Power Earth Specific instructions for installation of Protective Earth connec tions are contained in the National Electric Code for the United States and Canada The Protective Earth must be installed by a licensed and qualified electrician Connection of the CE150 chassis to the grounding electrode must be made in conformance to the local and national regula tions and may only be performed by trained and licensed ser vice personnel The grounding electrode conductor must be sized equivalent to a stranded 12 AWG wire DC Power Connection Connection of the 48 VDC power system to the CE150 is pro vided by a barrel type connector as shown in the previous il lustration To connect the 48 VDC power to the CE150 follow these steps 1 Loosen the screws in the barrel type terminals named JP1 for both the 48 volt line and the return line 2 Insert a red 12 AWG stranded copper wire for the 48 volt line into the hole in the bottom of the barrel marked 48V 3 Connect the other end of the red 12 AWG stranded copper wire to the 48 VDC power source 4 Insert a black 12 AWG stranded copper wire for the 48 volt return connection into the hole in the bottom of the barrel marked RTN 5 Connect the other end of the black 12 AWG stranded copper wire to the 48 VDC power source Return connection 6 Tighten both screws so the wires cannot slip out C A U T I ON Reversing the polarity of the 48 VDC input connections
282. s a record of user and SNMP access for each CE150 N O T E The CopperEdge does not send passwords for SNMP operators such as Public and Private in authentication requests Putting control at a regional or corporate level reduces chances of unauthorized entry and reduces the complexity of the user management task Up to three different server addresses can be specified for both the authentication server and the accounting server enabling virtually 100 percent reliability N O T E In the CopperEdge implementation of the Radius Accounting Function the Radius Attribute Acct Status Type used in the Radius accounting function always has a value of 7 Accounting On Since the CE system does not utilize a shutdown process the Accounting Off packet Acct Status Type 8 is not supported Instead the server should be configured to treat Accounting On as signifying the beginning of a new session and the ending of the previous one Preparing to Configure CopperEdge for Radius Servers Here is what you need to implement Radius in the CE150 e You must have at least one Radius Authentication server at least one accounting server is also required to implement the accounting functions The IP addresses of your Radius servers must be available through the CopperEdge routing table e The Authentication Servers must be pre configured to translate objects that are specific to the CopperEdge products to object names recognized by the se
283. s and interfaces use different support tables The cmlIface table consists of many rows or instances of cml face entries Each entry configures a single interface and in some cases connects one interface to another Each entry con sists of several objects The exact usage of the objects is highly dependent on what kind of interface is being configured and on which netmodel you choose for user data processing In all cases a single cmIface entry configures a DSL port a DSL voice circuit an Ethernet port or a WAN virtual circuit Permanent Interface Identifier The cmlface table is indexed by a Permanent Interface Identifier PII This means each cmlIface entry is uniquely identified by its PII A single PII can have no more than one cmlface entry Note that PIIs are used for other purposes besides the cmIface table so not all PIIs in the system have a cmlIface entry PIIs are called permanent because they do not change across power cycles of the CE150 and the PII for an interface does not change as a result of any configuration of other interfaces Each DSL port Ethernet port and WAN VC is uniquely identified by a PII In some cases the CE150 may require some enabling configuration to make the PIIs for some VCs valid not all PIIs are necessarily valid with all configurations The CE150 enforc es any requisite configuration by disallowing the use of PIIs that are not currently valid PIIs are unique across all interfaces in a
284. s well as the command context such as Telnet or SNMP and the privilege level of the operator The addition of this informa tion invests the Audit Log with an implicit role in maintaining system security The full audit log information base consists of four files stored in the Logs directory on the CE150 flash system the P IDE drive of the SCM 2 and SCM 3 e qudit txt The audit log that is currently filling contains the most recent AttibuteChange events e audit_count txt This file contains a running count of the events in the audit txt file When this number reaches 500 new audit txt and audit_count txt files are created and the old files are renamed e audit bak tThe previous audit txt file now filled with the 500 AttributeChange events immediately preceding those in the current audit tt file e audit_count bak The previous audit_count txt file now indicating the total number of records 500 in the audit bak file When the next cycle is completed and the current txt files are filled and renamed the current bak files are overwritten The audit log files are accessible only through FTP and only by an operator with Security level privilege Once uploaded the raw files have the format of one record per line with fields de limited by a vertical bar but this can be easily re formatted using a spread sheet program Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 183 Traps Alarms In the CE150 every internal event
285. scription of cmMaintCmd in the CopperEdge 150 Copper Craft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Restoring a Backed Up Configuration Restoring a configuration is very similar to backing it up except that the configuration data is flowing back toward the CE150 rather than toward the file server The ConfigRestore command is also slightly simpler as there is no need to specify a second ary server or recurrence related objects As is the case with the configbackup command you can issue multiple Set commands to set up the appropriate row in the cmMaintCmd table CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configrestore rowstatus notinservice CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configrestore primaryipaddr 206 71 190 4 CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configrestore directory ce200config sys1 Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 111 CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configrestore basefilename config206_71_190_419991101_0000 CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configrestore username anonymous password CRAFT gt set cmmaintcmd configrestore rowstatus active The final command in the string will activate the config restore and the file will be downloaded to the CE150 flash but will not be loaded into the active system To complete the reload you must reset the system CRAFT gt set cmsystem command restart The restored configuration file is always a compressed binary file 112 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Chapter 5 Routi
286. send test packets and then read the results of the tests using the cmLoop group of objects Setting up loopback and then starting interrupting and com pleting loopback tests are trapped events As such all of them are reported to the trap receiver The current CE150 product release does not support multiple simultaneous loopback tests Only one test can be run at any one time Moreover the CE150 loopback test software makes no assumptions and has no prior intelligence about the loop under test If the loop is open even if only temporarily because up or downstream equipment is busy the test will run but the CE150 will report errors 194 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Evaluating SDSL Loops The CE150 also includes a special test capability which exam ines certain analog properties of the SDSL loop The cmSDSLT est group described in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual provides two tests that are useful for evaluating and troubleshooting SDSL loops The SeekMaxRate test can help to establish the fastest data rate that a specified DSL loop will sustain with a connected CPE The Loop Profile test examines the overall condition of the loop between physical ports on the CE150 and their respective CPE The Loop Profile test can also be used to verify the integrity of the SDSL loop between the CE150 and the first 500 feet of the loop typically the portion of the loop within the CO itsel
287. signed to base numbers Comparison of IP Addresses and Net Masks in Binary Format IP 1 Host 32 2Hosts 4 Hosts 30 Base Address 1111 31 1110 1100 30 1000 0000 28 0 0000 1 0001 n n n 2 0010 3 0011 4 0100 5 0101 6 0110 7 0111 8 1000 9 1001 10 1010 11 1011 12 1100 13 1101 14 1110 15 1111 16 0001 0000 17 0001 0001 18 0001 0010 19 0001 0011 20 0001 0100 21 0001 0101 22 0001 0110 23 0001 0111 24 0001 1000 25 0001 1001 26 0001 1010 27 0001 1011 28 0001 1100 29 0001 1101 30 0001 1110 31 0001 1111 32 0010 0000 SS Ss Ss os Ss Ss SS Ss SS Se Ss USS Se SS SS OSS SS OS SS OSS eS SS OSS SS OSS SS OSS SS OS SS Of Of Oh Oh Be Oe Be WH Be Oe KH Bee l a a a a l a l l E I IJ OB gt I ORs gt lI lI Be l l l Bes FF l Be FSF SO Ree PHP FSF SO Ree 5 y 5 ES 3 J3 J J J J J IJ IJI J J IJI J J D I I JI IJI I IEA D I IJI Imam lt lt 9 359 35D 335390935937 73003773 793 73 3 3D DKS 3D a Da a a a a aaa a a an SOD SD OD a a a a a ee os a aa a a sa ee a a Chapter 6 Voice over DSL 145 Configuring HDIA Data and Voice Subnets The procedure for setting up addressing on HDIA data and voice subnets on the CE150 is different from the procedure for planning them In planning it is best to start with the hosts and IADs at customer sites In setting up the addressing it is best to start with t
288. ssword 6 Verify that the new code is running on all System Control Buffer Control WAN and DSL modules CRAFT gt geta cmboard swver SwVersion nstance 2050 5 0 83 nstance Se RAe 5 0 83 nstance 4 0 0 5 0 83 nstance 2 5 2 0 0 5 0 83 nstance 6 0 0 5 0 83 nstance AO RA 5 0 83 nstance lt 8 00 5 0 83 Check that the displayed software version matches the version of your upgrade Appendix D Upgrading System Software 257 258 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Appendix D Upgrading System Software 259 View the Compressed Configuration File There may be occasions when you want to view the Configura tion file config tgz which has been compressed using the gzip utility If you do not have the gzip utility on your PC you can download it from the following web site http www gzip or Follow these steps to view the Configuration file 1 Through FTP manually upload the config tgz file to your PC 2 At the DOS prompt rename the config tgz file to config txt gz 3 Run the gzip utility to unzip the file gzip d config txt gz The file is unzipped and named config txt You can view it in any text editor WARNING W A R N IN G wee Do not ever update your config files with a text editor 260 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Upgrade the CPE Software If an upgrade affects the operation of CopperRocket CPEs at tache
289. stream and Downstream Traffic 226 CE150 with Aggregated and One to One Connections 227 Directory Structure for Software Upgrade 00 250 xviii CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide List of Tables CE150 Module Arrangement 000 cece eee 15 A Typical Rack Mount Installation 00 0 0 c eee eee 20 CE150 with Brackets for Wall Installation 0 00 21 Rear View of the CE150 0 naaa aaa aaae 22 Rear Panel Power and Ground Connections 22 Ethernet Port PinoutS 200000 e eee eee eee 29 Pinouts for the Craft and Diagnostic Ports EIA TIA 232 DB9 29 Ethernet Port PinoutS 000 cece eee eee 33 Straight through Pinouts for the Craft and Diagnostic Ports 33 Cable Pinouts for the Craft and Diagnostic Ports 34 DS3 WAN Module LEDs 00 00 cece eens 35 Quad TA PINGUIS se ea wher San a ee de Ee ee ee ie Ste dese ROSH 36 DS1 WAN Module Quad T1 LEDS 00000 0c eaeee 36 DS3 Frame Module LEDs 0 000 c ccna 40 Slots in the CE200 Chassis 000 cece eee eens 47 Slots in the CE150 Chassis 0 00 c eee eee eee 47 Encapsulations on DSL and WAN VCs for Per VC Forwarding 73 Encapsulations on DSL and WAN VCs for Per Port Forwarding 76 Summary of the CE150 s DHCP Functionality 80 Valid IP Protocol
290. t Action Filter Action pass block chain A full set cmfilter command would take the form shown in the following example CRAFT gt set cmfilter 1 4 7 1 function insert srcadrs n n n n srcmask n n n n dstadrs n n n n dstmask n n n n ipprotocol 0 srcport 5 srcportcompare eq dstport 8 dstportcompare ne action pass The cmFilter table is sorted by PII SNMP first index and then by filter number SNMP second index Sorting in the Filter Table Index filter_number Filter Data 1 4 1 1 see 1 4 1 2 see Ad 3 see 1 4 2 1 see 1 4 2 2 see N O T E After any filter operation that filter list is renumbered 1 through N consecutively with no gaps in the sequence For example if a filter list has five existing entries and you add filter number 99 to the list it will become filter number 6 Use this method to add filters to the end of a list when you don t know exactly how many filters are on the list CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide DSL IMUX For subscriber endpoints equipped with the appropriate CPEs the CE150 supports a technique called Inverse Multiplexing or IMUX in which multiple DSL ports are designated as members of a bundle and treated as a single logical DSL port The IMUX logical port and its DSL Multilink multiple copper pairs originat ing at different physical DSL ports on the CE150 but terminat ing at a common endpoint CPE combine to cumulatively increase bot
291. t 245 Diagnostic 245 FallingThresholdAlert 246 LoginFail 246 LoginSucceed 246 Logout 246 LoopStatusChange 246 RisingThresholdAlert 247 event trapping 9 F failure save configuration 188 FallingThresholdAlert event notification 246 FanFault alarm 239 FanModule class 180 filtering security 8 filters chaining 97 criteria 96 specifying 97 specifying activating deleting 95 viewing 94 Find command 51 flash memory 9 FR Forum UNI FRF 1 network protocol 8 FR NNI per FRF 2 network protocol 8 Frame multiplexing protocol 8 FrameRelayLink class 179 FrameRelayPVC class 179 front panel connectors analog modem port 31 34 Craft serial port 29 33 Index 275 Diagnostic port 29 33 Ethernet port 29 33 Quad T1 ports 36 G GdmtPort class 179 GliteModule 24 class 179 GlitePort class 179 Getall command 51 gzip utility 260 hardware restart 209 HDLC DSL link protocol 8 HDLC PPP DSL link protocol 8 hot swap 9 humidity operating 5 IDSLModule 24 class 178 IDSLPort class 179 IDSLTimingLossAlarm 240 IDSLTimingLossClear notification 243 IEC 320 AC power cable 15 IEC 320 power connector 23 input power specificiations 5 input output impedance 7 InterShelfTrunk class 179 L LCRestart command 49 209 LEDs AC Power module 38 172 Buffer Control Module 38 172 DS1 Quad T1 module 175 DS3 WAN module 175 Quad T1 36 SDSL module 38 176 System Control Mod
292. t del scm 250 Command accepted 6 Upload the new SCM file from the local machine to the CE150 ftp gt put scm 200 Port set okay 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection HERRERA RHEE EE EEE ERE ERE HEE REE EEE ERE EERE SE PERRET RHEE RHE FE HE FE FE HEE ERE EHH EEE HEE ERE ERE EEE ERE REE E HERE FE E FE FE RHE THE EERE EEE FE FE FE FE HEE HE HEE RHE EEE ERE EEE EEE E FE EEE TE E FE AE R HEHE REE EH HEE EEE HEE EEE EEE AE TE AE FE E FE E REEF FE EFE AE E FE E FE FE FE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE FE AE FE AE FE FE FE FE AE FE AE FE FE FE HEE ERE RHE FE E FE HE FE EHE SF FE EHE AE HE FE AE FE FE FE FE E FE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE AE EEE EEE EH FE FE HEE AE E FE FE TE AE REE REE REESE HEEHEEREERHE RHEE 226 Transfer complete 2254784 bytes sent in 50 94 seconds lt 44 26 Kbytes sec gt N O T E When transferring software using FTP a certain amount of delay is normal Do not interrupt the process and try to start over the original file on which the processor is running has been deleted from flash Note also that while upload of the SCM file is in progress the CopperCraft command line interface will not respond to commands Wait until the SCM upload is complete before you enter further commands If upload of the SCM file has not completed after 20 minutes contact Copper Mountain s Technical Assistance Center 7 Upgrade the Code subdirectory a Change to the Code subdirectory on both the CE150 and local machines ftp gt cd code 250
293. t RFC 1490 Q 922 Q 922 1490 1973 2364 HDLC and HDLC PPP as implemented in vari ous third party CPEs Packet Multiplexing Protocols TCP IP RFC 791 Internet Protocol IP RFC 792 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP RFC 768 User Datagram Protocol UDP RFC 826 Ethernet Address Resolution Protocol ARP RFC 1058 Gateway and Hosting Protocol Virtual Wide Area Net VWAN multiplexing and CopperVPN IP multiplexing for Copper Mountain s CopperRocket cus tomer premise equipment Yuu SY Frame multiplexing for third party CPEs Policy based packet multiplexing Security filtering using source or destination address or port Network Standard Protocols ANSI T1 606 Frame Relay Architectural Framework ANSI T1 606 Addendum 1 for Congestion Management CIR BIR BECN FECN support ANSI T1 618 Core Aspects of Frame Protocol for Frame Relay Multiple standards of LMI management protocols including T1 617 Annex D Q 933 Annex A and LMI Rev 1 0a Frame Relay Forum UNI FRF 1 Frame Relay NNI FRF 2 supported on WAN links RFC 1157 SNMP Protocol RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM RFC 1490 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over Frame Relay RFC 1973 PPP over Frame Relay RFC 2364 PPP over ATM Inverse ARP over Frame Relay per RFC 2390 Inverse ARP over ATM per RFC 2225 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Network Management Full SNMP functionality Internet RFC 1213 MIB II RFC 1315 Frame Relay
294. t cmsystem calendartime CalendarTime 2000 06 15 15 05 09 Trap Destination Configure at least one trap destination a managing device to which SNMP traps should be sent CRAFT gt set cmtrapdest n n n n 162 community trapcomm rowstatus active where n n n n is the IP address of the SNMP manager Depending on the SNMP manager you are using it may also be necessary to configure an IP port number or a community string for the receiver For more information see the descrip tion of the cmTrapDestination group in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Configuring the CE150 on the Network To communicate over the network with a remote host or to set up a server to connect to the CE150 through Telnet or FTP you must enable one of the system s network interfaces It may be the Ethernet interface 1 2 1 one of the WAN interfaces in slots 3 or 4 or a DSL port 1 Configure the network interface to be used for control and management of the system with an IP address and mask CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 3 1 netmodel ip ipaddr 204 16 191 254 netmask 255 255 255 0 encapsulationtype none 2 If this interface will use a NetModel ForwardingMode other than Full IP specify those options as necessary 3 Note also that if the network interface is a Frame Relay or ATM virtual circuit you must also specify the DLCI or ATM Virtual Link number in the PII CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 23 farendaddr 202 114
295. t itt she A A BurnedInMacAddr 0 0 0 0 0 0 FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPII 1 2 1 61 ICPCompatible Yes EncapsulationType PPP HDLC FwdMode PPP HDLC 1973 Some objects are operator configurable and others are read only Read only objects display information about the interface you cannot set or change the values A general description of each object follows but typically they may have different signif icance for different interface types DSL DSL VC Ethernet WAN VC and in different netmodels Iflndex The PII of the interface You cannot set this object Read Write but you must specify it to identify the cmlface entry of interest You can create and delete cmiface entries Name An arbitrary string that names the interface Read Write GroupName The name of the interface group if any to which Read Write this interface belongs Additionallnfo An arbitrary string of information for the interface Read Write For example the name and phone number of a person to contact when there is a problem with this interface NetModel The netmodel that the CE150 uses for this Read Write interface A NetModel of None means the interface is not configured for user data Appendix B cmlface Configuration 229 lpAddr In the IP netmodel the standard IP address of this Read Write interface NetMask In the IP netmodel the standard IP subnet mask for Read Write this interface MacAddr In some netmodels the working
296. t points toward the VC on the WAN port All data from the VC on the DSL port will automatically go to the VC on the WAN port and vice versa Use the DestPII setting to accomplish the mapping CRAFT gt set cmsubiface 1 4 1 23 destpii 1 2 1 130 Perform a Get on the VC and you will see this table CRAFT gt get cmsubiface 1 4 1 23 Group cmSubIfaceTable Instance 1 4 1 23 PII 1 4 1 23 DestPII du2812430 Name ww RowStatus Active Priority Low set cmSublface 22 PII PAN 28 ee Stee ese eT gt DestPIl 1 2 1 130 HOST 1 r NAT amp Cross Route DHCP Connect Tables HOST SLA g CPE Telco Router Router VPI 0 VPl 1 VCl 32 VCl 121 Cross Connect Netmodel Destination PII Chapter 7 ADSL G lite and G dmt 165 IP Netmodel In the IP netmodel the end points of the VCs must be manually configured for each of the stages on the link but this time each of the interfaces requires an IP address In the diagram below all addresses are private although they could be public The VC going from the Telco router to the WAN port on the CE150 must have an IP address at each end Its endpoints must be on different subnets The WAN VC and the DSL port also must have IP addresses They also must be on different subnets Finally the DSL port and its downstream hosts must have IP addresses but they must be on the same subnet Since the CPE is in bridge mode it doesn t require an IP ad dress The DSL port not t
297. ted and trained on a port any associ ated configuration and wiring errors will not be immediately ap parent It is only when a CPE is connected and attempts to train that the EndPointID objects are reported and inconsistencies can be detected Without a connected and trained CPE the CE150 simply accepts any assigned ports as part of the IMUX bundle registers their EndPointIDs as 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 and sets the port status to WaitForAdd Later if a CPE is connected and attempts to train the CE150 can determine if the CPE is IMUX capable and if it is it can then compare EndPointIDs to see if they match If the End PointIDs of the ports in a bundle do not match the CE150 sends an event to the TrapEvent log and an alarm to the Trap Alarm log If this occurs the ports remain in their previous WaitForAdd status until the conflict between the physical wir ing and the logical bundles is resolved The TrapAlarm messages resulting from this conflict are listed below To review the configuration of existing bundles and their member ports and isolate the source of the conflict use the cmEndPointPort group See the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual CPE Training Error Messages Description Action A CPE has trained on a bundle that does not have the appropriate IMUX software Typically the CPE has a single port instead of multiple ports EndPoint Conflict IMUX CPE has EndPointID inconsistent w
298. tem Control Module 1 and System Control Module 2 28 Ethernet Port 20 0c eee teens 29 Craft and Diagnostic Serial Ports 0000 00s 29 Analog Modem Port 0 000 eae 31 System Control Module 3 0 00 cece eee 32 Ethernet Potties oe aweGrentd d we thee aan a peated 33 Craft and Diagnostic Serial Ports 0000 eee 33 Analog Modem Port 0 000 cece eae 34 DS3 WAN Module ATM or Frame Relay 2 2 0 5 35 DS1 WAN Module Quad T1 2 2 2 0020 000 e eee eee 36 Pre Power Check 0 00 ccc eee ene ena 37 Power Up LED Sequence 000 cece nena 38 Power Up LED Sequence 20 c cece eee eee 38 Connect the Power 0 ccc eee tenes 42 Check the Fan Tray 60 c cece eee 42 Installing or Replacing Modules 2000e cece eee 42 Chapter 3 Initial Configuration 0 cee eee ees 43 System Configuration Guidelines 0 0000 e eee eee 44 Accessing the CE150 1 2 tenes 44 CopperCraft Login 0 0 ccc teens 44 CopperCraft Logout 0 0 c cee eee 45 Command Line Interface 0 0 ce eee 45 CopperCraft Line Editor 0 0 00 cece eee 46 Permanent Interface Identifier PIl 2 0000 47 SNMP Command Structure 00000 e eee 48 Helpful Shortcuts Getall and Find 0 00 00 ee aae 51 Gora x sretere stata ea a Paced eared Mamta ae h
299. temControlModule class 178 SystemControlModule3 class 179 T T1 617 Annex D LMI protocol 8 T1Port class 179 technical support by e mail 11 by toll free telephone 11 216 through the FTP site 10 through the web site 11 temperature operating 5 terminate an operator session 189 throughput 129 truncate object names 50 twisted pair cables 36 U unzip config tgz 260 v V 35Port class 179 V 35 WAN class 178 view config tgz 260 voltmeter 17 VWAN multiplexing protocol 8 VWAN over Ethernet 122 Ww WAN modules ATM 40 DS1 Quad T1 7 DS3 ATM 7 DS3 Frame Relay 7 EIA 449 CCITT V 36 7 Frame Relay 40 X 21 7 278 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Warning message 185 Write Community login prompt 55 X X 21 WAN module 7 Index 279 280 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide ti Sheet of CAPPER MOUNTAIN DSL Physical Port Configuration Perm Ifc Index Subscriber Account Account Install Status Chassis Slot Port IP Address Number Name Date Notes 1 2 20 21 22 23 24 SA CAPPER MEUNTAIN WAN Port Configuration Worksheet Sheet of Perm lfc Index Shelf Slot Port VC No Port IP Address Subnet Mask FWD Net Mode Model Encaps Type CIR EIR Interface Link Notes
300. teway a On the first diagram draw a default router connected to the right side of the DSLAM b On the second diagram draw a voice gateway connected to the right side of the DSLAM Chapter 6 Voice over DSL 141 3 Two IP Addressing Groups The two diagrams show the data VCs and voice VCs through the same DSLAM a To distinguish the two groups use one set of IP addresses with a range of 10 0 20 1 to 10 0 20 63 26 subnet for the data VCs b Use another set of IP addresses with a range of 10 0 21 1 to 10 0 21 63 26 subnet for the voice VCs 4 Default Router and Voice Gateway a Assign the 10 0 20 1 address to the default router on the data subnet b Assign the 10 0 21 1 address to the voice gateway on the voice subnet 5 IP Addresses and Subnet Masks on WAN Ports a Assign the 10 0 20 0 address with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 192 or 26 to the data VC on the WAN port b Assign the 10 0 21 0 address with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 192 or 26 to the voice VC on the WAN port The two WAN VCs themselves though do not have IP addresses In the data group only the hosts and the default router have IP addresses In the voice group only the IADs and the voice gateway have IP addresses HDIA Data Group 10 0 20 0 IP Addr 10 0 20 2 Net mask 32 g 1 t IP Addr 10 0 20 0 Host fi IAD ee ne Net mask 26 ee Tania PII 1 2 1 20 Default TA EI I
301. the data rate of each DSL port as appropriate connected CPEs will follow the rate of the DSL interface For example CRAFT gt set hdslmodem 1 4 1 datarate 416 AC or DC Power Modules Replacing an AC or DC Power module is service affecting with consequent interruption of service for all subscribers served by this CE150 Except in cases of emergency system down we recommend that you replace the module during a scheduled maintenance period at off peak hours 214 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide To replace the power module 1 Power down the CE150 2 Remove and replace the module using the general technique described in Buffer Control Modules on page 213 3 Power up the CE150 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 215 Copper Mountain Service and Support The Copper Mountain Customer Service Center CSC is your source for assistance in diagnostics and or problem resolution and for information on Copper Mountain products and service Telephone support toll free from any US location is available Monday through Friday from 6 a m to 6 p m Pacific time at 888 611 4CMN 888 611 4266 If you suspect a failure in your CE150 or one of its modules contact the Copper Mountain CSC for help and instructions Should it be necessary to return any of your Copper Mountain equipment for service or repair you will be provided with ship ping instructions and the Repair Authorization numbers These numbers should
302. tic Features 0 0 0 ees 172 Front Panel LED Indicators 0000 000s 172 Module Status Indicators 0 0 ccc eee 172 Buffer Control Module Status 0 0000 c eee ee eee 172 System Control Module Status 0 0 00 cee eee 173 Modem Indicators 0000 eee eee 174 Craft Port Indicators 2 nes 174 DS3 WAN Module Status 20 0 0 c eee ene 175 Quad T1 Frame WAN Module Indicators 0 175 SDSL and ADSL G dmt or Gite Module Port Status 176 T1 DSL Line Module Port Status 0 0 0 0 00 cee eae 176 Events and Alarms ic i re aia ig alee teins Soa Lala S 177 Event Contents cc 32045 sanis Gents wala ch a pada aa 177 Resource Identification 0 000 cee eee 178 Object Classes 0 0 00 a i E i aa a dias 178 System ClasseS 000 cee 178 Shelf Classes esta aed eas oh ete E A Sateen aiead 178 Board GlaSses s ise a ia holed ee ddln ht die aad 178 Pont Classes 2 3 wtih eid nad Se E 179 LINK ClaSSOS 3 ae dreds alaiats teat aera Hata edad end te falas 179 GPE Classese iste F ccs sev aieeitl a E E Siete EE KO agai x 179 Support Classes 00 0 c eee eee eee 180 LOGS iia araa E ds montane at ened montis te eae dd Reece EENE R 180 Event Od eda thao ieee sun tigesesuite aged 180 Alarm LO snc ste i widen atts juices AR a beeen at cad 182 Audits LOG aira enie I GE Ree es ec ae 183 E a fete Sete A os es A ek had ce NN Haas AR
303. tion Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 77 High Density Internet Access HDIA Netmodel With this netmodel the CE150 is able to provide economical IP addressing for hosts It allows the mapping of all data VCs on different DSL ports to a single data VC on a WAN port and map ping of all high priority VCs always VC 22 on different DSL ports to a single VC on a WAN port High priority VCs are for delay sensitive traffic like voice HDIA unlike VWAN or CopperVPN in their aggregate mode permits peer to peer communications for users on voice VCs With HDIA you must set base IP addresses and address ranges or net masks for voice and data subnets when configuring the circuits on WAN ports Also you must specify base IP addresses and address ranges or net masks for IADs and hosts when configuring circuits on DSL ports For more detailed instruc tions see the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Here are examples of configurations for the data and voice VCs on both the DSL and WAN interfaces CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 20 netmodel hdia ipaddr 10 0 20 0 netmask 255 255 255 192 encapsulationtype rfc1483 farendaddr 10 0 20 1 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 2 1 21 netmodel hdia ipaddr 10 0 21 0 netmask 255 255 255 192 encapsulationtype rfc1483 farendaddr 10 0 21 1 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 5 13 netmodel hdia ipaddr 10 0 20 2 netmask 255 255 255 255 destpii 1 2 1 20 encapsulationtype rfc1483 CR
304. tional If you do not want to set the data subnet for peer to peer traffic disable the VC for data on the WAN port The default is enabled CRAFT gt set cmvpngroup 1 2 1 20 peertopeer disabled Unless you have a specific reason for disabling peer to peer traffic we recommend you leave this option enabled 148 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 5 Set the VC for voice on the WAN port with a VPI range O 15 and a VCI range 0 511 But reserve the vpi 0 and vci 511 combination for ATM loopback testing CRAFT gt set cmatmvcl 1 2 1 21 rowstatus create vpi 0 vei 201 adminstatus up When you perform a Get on the VC to check your work you will see this table CRAFT gt get cmatmvcl 1 2 1 21 cmAtmVclTable 2s 221 Group Instance PII Vpi Vei AdminStatus OperStatus LastChange AalType Aal5CpcsTransmitSduS Aal5CpcsReceiveSduSi RowStatus TransmitTrafficDescr TransmitTrafficDescr OAMState OAMAdminState OAMAutoLBState OAMManualLBCmd OAMManualLBCmdStatus OAMLBInterval OAMLBTimeOut OAMTxAISCells OAMRxRDICells OAMRxAISCells OAMTxRDICells OAMTxLBRequestCells OAMRxLBResponseCells OAMRxLBRequestCells OAMTxLBResponseCells OAMRxUnsupportedCell OAMTxDiscards OAMRxDiscards Tizza 0 201 Up Up 0 day 0 hour 0 min 0 0 sec Aal5 1600 1600 Active 1 2 adminDown 0 disabled disabled none none 5 fat ol oOo Oo OO OO Oo 6 Set the VC for voice on the
305. tmvcl 1 4 1 23 Group cmAtmVclTable Instance 1 4 1 23 PLL Vpi Vei AdminStatus OperStatus LastChange AalType Aal5CpcsTransmitSduS Aal5CpcsReceiveSduSi RowStatus TransmitTrafficDescr OAMState OAMAdminState OAMAutoLBState OAMManualLBCmd OAMManualLBCmdStatus OAMLBInterval OAMLBTimeOut OAMTxAISCells OAMRxRDICells OAMRxAISCells OAMTxRDICells OAMTxLBRequestCells OAMRxLBResponseCells OAMRxLBRequestCells OAMTxLBResponseCells OAMRxUnsupportedCell OAMTxDiscards OAMRxDiscards 1243 I2 0 32 Up Up 0 day 0 hour 0 min 0 0 sec 1999 12 23 08 03 37 Aal5 1600 1600 Active 1 adminDown 0 disabled disabled none none 5 H ol OOOO OOO O 4 Set the NetModel and the EncapsulationType for the DSL port Use the same PII 1 4 1 that you used in step 3 The VC number is not necessary Set CMCP to No the default is Yes CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 1 netmodel cross connect encapsulationtype atm cmcpcompatible no Perform a Get on the port and look at the table CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 4 1 Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 4 1 0 PII IfIndex Name GroupName AdditionallInfo NetModel IpAddr NetMask MacAddr BurnedInMacAddr FarEndAddr DestPII CMCPCompatible EncapsulationType FwdMode Pix ServiceClass 1 4 1 0 Leara ww Cross Connect 0 0 0 0 bene ape care cag 164 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 5 Set the VC on the DSL port so that i
306. tributes as documented in RFC 2138 and RFC 2139 certain CopperEdge specific parameters must first be translated so the server can interpret and deal with them ap propriately 1 Radius Attribute NAS Identifier may be omitted in the packet if the CopperEdge SystemName object is empty 2 The value of Radius Attribute Filter Id substitutes for the CopperEdge Context and Privilege attributes objects Filter Id attribute should contain the strings Context HH with HH a hexadecimal value and Privilege DD with DD a decimal value as described below The syntax of the Filter Id string is important because the CopperEdge unit must extract the values of HH and DD to properly complete the login process Two Filter Id strings are expected in an Access_Accept packet The filter ID values for the CopperEdge Context attributes can be found on the previous page N O T E Valid numeric values in the Context string can generally be combined to enable the same operator record to be used in multiple contexts For example decimal 12 Hex Oc enables both Telnet 04 and Serial 08 contexts But to distinguish SNMP sessions from normal operator logins and to prevent an operator from logging in using only the community string SNMP user records must specify a Context of SNMP only If an SNMP user has a login context value indicating anything other than SNMP authentication will be rejected by the CopperEage unit even if accepted by the RADIUS server
307. tterAndSpeed CRAFT gt set cminterfaceoptions 1 4 13 maxvoicechannels 8 jitterspeedtradeoff minjitterandspeed When you perform a get you will see this table CRAFT gt get cminterfaceoptions 1 4 13 Group cmInterfaceOptionsTable Instance 1 4 13 0 PII 1 4 13 0 VoiceGatewayType None VoiceGatewayIpAddr 0 0 0 0 MaxVoiceChannels 8 JitterSpeedTradeoff MinJitterAndSpeed JitterControlStatus Uncontrolled RowStatus Active VoiceGatewayTypeld 1 Set the VC for voice for DHCP You are configuring the CE150 so that it not an upstream DHCP server can dynamically assign an IP address to the IAD on the voice VC CRAFT gt set cmdhcp 1 4 13 22 ipaddress 10 0 21 2 netmask 255 255 255 255 function dhcprespond When you perform a get you will see this table CRAFT gt get cmdhcp 1 4 13 22 Group cmDHCPTable Instance 1 4 13 22 PII 1 4 13 22 RowStatus Active IpAddress 10 0 21 2 NetMask 255 255 255 0 DefaultRouter 0 0 0 0 DNSServer 0 0 0 0 Function DHCPRespond ServerIPAddr 0 0 0 0 CircuitID CRAFT 1 4 13 22 152 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide 12 Perform a Get on the IAD CPE 1 4 13 attached to the first DSL port See if the CurrentIPAddr and SavedIpAddr and the CurrentCAIpAddr and SavedCAIpAddr are zeros or non zeros If they are zeros as shown in the following example go to step 14 CRAFT gt get cmcpeiad cpe 1 4 13 Group cmCpeIADTable Instance CPE 1
308. ule 38 39 174 WAN ATM module 40 Link class 179 link connections DSL 26 LinkDown alarm 240 LMI Rev 1 0a protocol 8 Local Craft Interface cable 16 login CopperCraft 44 electronic Release Notes 10 operator 246 Radius 54 105 106 login prompts Read Community 55 Write Community 55 LoginFail event notification 246 LoginSaturated alarm 240 LoginSucceed event notification 246 LoginSuspended alarm 240 Logout event notification 246 logout from CopperCraft 45 logs Alarm 9 180 182 Audit 180 183 Event 9 180 188 loopbacks DS1 193 DS3 194 EOC 191 LoopStatusChange event notification 246 M MaintFailed alarm 240 management sessions Craft serial port 9 FTP 9 SNMP 9 Telnet 9 messages Notification 185 Warning 185 modem port 174 modem port settings 34 modems 33 600 Kbps analog 6 module status AC Power Module 38 AC Power module 172 Buffer Control Module 38 172 DC power 172 DSL 172 SDSL module 38 176 System Control Module 38 39 module soft restart 208 modules DS1 Quad T1 WAN 7 DS3 ATM WAN 7 DS3 Frame Relay WAN 7 EIA 449 CCITT V 36 WAN 7 X 21 WAN 7 Net 1 connector 33 Net 2 connector 33 Netopia SDSL class 180 network connection cable 17 network connecting to 57 Networking Models 225 notification Alarm Clearing 177 Event 177 Notification message 185 notifications AtmVccUp 242 276 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide null mo
309. unctions as described in the netmodel sections In some netmodels many DSL ports can be aggregated together onto a single WAN VC In other netmodels it is only meaningful to map a single DSL in terface to a single WAN VC In these cases the CE150 enforces this one to one connection requirement at configuration time A third possibility is that the DSL port is a Frame Relay or ATM interface containing VCs within it Then the VCs on the DSL port are connected to VCs on the WAN port CopperEdge DSLAM VC DSL VC VC VC VC VC V VC VC DSL Frame Relay Port CE150 with Aggregated and One to One Connections Because many DSL ports may be connected to a single aggre gated interface you always specify connections at the DSL in terface That is you define connections by configuring the DSL port to connect to a WAN VC The connection is two way data traffic can flow in both directions But you always configure a connection by connecting a DSL port to a WAN VC not by con necting a WAN VC to a DSL port Appendix B cmlface Configuration 227 The cmlfaceTable At the center of all user data processing configuration is a sin gle table the cmIfaceTable often abbreviated cmlface All user data configuration starts with the cmlface table In some cases several other support tables augment the cmlface table But each support table is needed only in some configurations and only for some functions Different application
310. up names are listed alphabetically in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Instance IP address PII etc Enter an instance for a Set or Get command A port either a WAN port or a DSL port can be divided into VCs To identify the VC include the number of the VC after the number for the slot For example the instance 1 2 1 30 refers to the WAN module in slot 3 and the first port The number 30 identifies the VC Always enclose an instance in square brackets If an entry requires more than one index place the indexes in the same order as displayed in the help objects listing Always separate multiple indexes with a comma but always enclose them with a set of brackets index1 index2 Multiple indexes form a single instance Object name NetModel IpAddr NetMask etc Enter an object name when performing a Set command In the three different Get commands object names are unnecessary Separate the object name from the instance by a space Also an object name must be accompanied by an object value Object value possible values or value ranges are specified in each of the object group tables All of the objects and their values or value ranges are listed in the CopperEdge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual In the command string separate an object value from an object name with an equal sign in this way netmodel coppervpn Do not use spaces between object n
311. ured connection between two devices usually over a wide area link The permanent circuit will persist as long as its configuration remains in place Once a PVC is configured between two devices no setup or disconnect process is required to initiate or conclude communication over the channel R RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service a protocol for carrying authentication authorization and configuration information between a device that requires authentication service and a shared server on which the authentication data resides runt frame Term used to describe an invalid or incomplete Ethernet data frame S SDSL Symmetrical DSL DSL service in which data rates are the same in both directions shelf A single CE150 unit consisting of a chassis and all of its circuit modules SNMP Simple Network Management Proto col A protocol used to monitor and provision nodes and devices across a network SNMP agent Device based software used to monitor and report status when queried by an SNMP manager By definition SNMP agents run on managed devices an SNMP manager is required to perform active command and con figuration functions SNMP manager System software used to remotely query and configure network devices A more generic term also used in this docu ment is Element Management System subnet address An extension of the Internet addressing scheme allows a location to use a single IP address f
312. uter 0 0 0 0 DNSServer 0 0 0 0 Function DHCPForward ServerIPAddr 10 0 25 2 CircuitID CRAFT 1 4 13 22 Set the VC for voice on the DSL port 1 4 13 22 You must specify the number 22 for a VC You cannot use any VC for voice except VC 22 You cannot use any netmask for voice other than 255 255 255 255 CRAFT gt set cmiface 1 4 13 22 netmodel hdia ipaddr 10 0 21 2 netmask 255 255 255 255 destpii 1 2 1 21 encapsulationtype ip 1490 When you perform a get you will see this table Once again make sure the object CMCPCompatible shows a setting of Yes If it does not perform another Set command with CMCPCompatible Yes CRAFT gt get cmiface 1 4 13 22 Group cmIfaceTable Instance 1 4 13 22 PIL 1 4 13 22 IfIndex 12421322 Name ww GroupName oun AdditionallInfo nN NetModel HDIA IpAddr 100212 NetMask 255 255 250 295 MacAddr ECEE Pieri ieee BurnedInMacAddr f ff f FarEndAddr 0 0 0 0 DestPII 1 2 1 21 CMCPCompatible Yes EncapsulationType IP 1490 FwdMode HDIA Pix 2590 ServiceClass None Chapter 6 Voice over DSL 151 10 1l Set the DSL port 1 4 13 for the maximum number of voice channels In this case the IAD is capable of a maximum of eight channels You can set JitterSpeedTradeoff on the CE150 for values other than FullSpeedDataOnly which is the default Currently the most appropriate setting for ports with a voice VC on them is MinJi
313. uthentication Disabled configure all of its objects except authentication Example CRAFT gt set cmradius authkey 4cr37ei authprimaryipaddr 10 122 4 4 authprimaryport 1645 acctprimaryipaddr 10 122 4 6 acctprimaryport 1646 Be sure to use whichever port numbers are recognized by your Radius servers Although the officially assigned port numbers for Radius Authentication and Accounting are 1812 and 1813 respectively many current radius servers still use the port numbers of the original RFC 1645 for authentication and 1646 for accounting Be sure that the numbers you assign in the CopperEdge cmRadius configuration match those used by your remote Radius servers 2 When you are sure the rest of the configuration is complete and correct activate the Radius capability CRAFT gt set cmradius authentication enabled For more data about the cmRadius MIB group see the Copper Edge 150 CopperCraft Reference and MIB Definitions manual Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 107 Saving Values Here are the proprietary system values for the following config urable objects CalendarTime Set or display the system real time clock date and time set at initial configuration Redundancy Enables or Disables redundancy func tionality When Enabled the secondary Control and WAN complex can take over as primary This is not available on the CE150 Command The command get cmsystemresponds with the last operator command Use the command s
314. utility to Binary mode and make sure the Prompt mode is turned on If the screen prompt indicates that you have uploaded a file in ASCII mode Binary mode has not been turned on Delete the ASCII transferred file to the CE150 and upload the file in Binary mode By default the FTP Prompt feature is turned on Because of the switching among multiple directories on the local machines and the CE150s complexity is built into the upgrade process Keep the FTP Prompt feature active as a safety measure 7 In the ce200bu directory delete the System Control Module SCM file and then upload FTP put the new SCM file from the local machine to the CE150 8 In each subdirectory in the ce200bu directory delete the files and then upload FTP put the corresponding new files from the local machine to the CE150 9 Restore the system configuration by copying the Config file from the ce200 directory FTP get to the ce200bu directory FTP put 10 Rename the ce200bu directory which now contains your new software to ce200 thus making it the default code base when the CE150 starts up 11 Restart the CE150 to activate the new software 12 If the upgrade applies to the CopperRocket CPE as well as to the CE150 run the upgrade command cmCPEBoard group for each connected CPE unit See Upgrade the CPE Software on page 261 N O T E The compressed configuration file config tgz is not compatible with any version of CE150 software pr
315. vesession 1983 Group cmActiveSessionTable Instance 1983 SessionID 1983 OperatorName admin Context Telnet Privilege Security IpAddress 10 64 20 249 StartTime 18 day 18 hour 36 min 27 0 sec 2000 11 18 09 19 39 IdleTimeout 900 RowStatus Active To terminate the active session delete the row from the table CRAFT gt set cmactivesession 1983 rowstatus destroy Set successful Any application running in the specified active session is halt ed the session is terminated and this event is listed in the Event log as a termination of the session The following mes sage is displayed on the operator s screen 2000 11 18 09 36 30 USER LOGGED OUT Repeat the geta cmactivesession command to check that the terminated session is no longer in the table The cmActiveSession table will not let you accidentally termi nate your own session If you enter your session s instance the following message will be displayed CRAFT gt set cmactivesession 1985 rowstatus destroy Delete failed Group cmActiveSessionTable Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 189 DHCP Problems The proper functioning of the DHCP feature depends on the cor rect configuration of the CE150 as well as of the upstream rout er and DHCP server If the CPE or premise LAN host does not receive the expected response for a DHCP request that it originated follow these di agnostic steps In general 1 Check the cmDHCPTable to see if a
316. voice low for non real time packets The default is Low level For a PVC that has voice packets or video conferencing packets and regular IP data packets on it set the priority level to High For a PVC with only regular IP data packets on it leave the priority level at Low For example CRAFT gt get cmsubiface 1 4 24 16 Group cmSubIface Instance 1 4 24 16 PTI 1 4 24 16 IfIndex 1 4 24 16 Name Priority High RowStatus Active In the example above priority queuing on the 16th PVC on the 24th port on the board occupying the 8th slot has been set to High priority To change the default on any of the other PVCs from the default Low priority you will have to use cmSublface and change the defaults one at a time Priority queuing once a PVC has been configured comes into play whenever real time and non real time packets are sent from the CE150 over the PVCs on the DSL port Real Time pack ets will be processed before non real time packets Chapter 4 Advanced Configuration 103 Radius Authentication Enhanced system security and management of the CopperEdge user base is available through Radius authentication All user and password databases on all CE150s on the network includ ing CopperView SNMP sessions can be consolidated on a sin gle remote Radius server All login requests for CE150s then go to the Radius server for verification A second Radius server supports a Radius accounting function It keep
317. will cause damage to the DC Power Module requiring its return to the factory for repair Never rely on wire color or logic when connecting the supply lines Use an appropriate meter or testing device to verify the polarity before connecting the DC Power Sources 24 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide Connection to Telecommunications Network Voltage Circuits All CE150 Telecommunications Line Cards are compliant for connection to TNV 1 circuits as defined in Section 6 2 1 amp An nex V of UL 1950 3rd Edition and CSA C22 2 No 950 95 If CE150 Telecommunication Line Cards are used to communi cate over TNV 2 or TNV 3 circuits a protective device such as a POTS Splitter which provides isolation from TNV 2 TNV 3 voltages is required For the United States and Canada the Protective Device must be approved to UL 1950 3rd Edition and CSA C22 2 No 950 95 NRTL Marked and a Declaration provided stating that this protection is provided Chapter 2 Installation 25 DSL Link Connections The illustrations in this section show rear chassis cable con nectors and pinouts for wiring the DSL ports Each connector RJ 21X services a single DSL module as indicated by the slot numbers Use standard 25 pair cables of a length to connect the CE150 to your 66 blocks or other terminal point N O T E The CE150 is designed for installation in facilities that provide over voltage protection on the subscriber loops Th
318. y Manually Trap cmPortMisprovisioned PowerSupplyFault Major Sent by the System Control Module when a Power Supply fault is detected Information included in the event None Cleared by PowerSupplyClear Trap cmPowerSupplyFailure RateFallbackAlarm Minor Sent by the DSL line module when the link trains at rate lower than the configured data rate Information included in the event Port PII Current data rate Cleared by RateFallbackClear Trap cmRateFallback RedundancyChanged Minor Sent by the System Control Module when a change in the redundancy state Enable disable is detected Information included in the event SCM board PIl Redundancy is enabled or disabled Cleared by Manually Trap cmRedundancyChange RedundancyConflict Minor Sent by the Secondary System Control Module when a sec ondary module thinks it should be locked as primary but the other side is already locked Both modules are trying to assume the Primary role Information included in the event Index Cleared by Manually Trap cmRedundancyConflict RoleChanged Major Sent by the System Control Module when its redundancy role Primary Secondary changes Information included in the event SCM board PIl New primary SCM board PII Failover was automatic or manual Cleared by Manually Trap cmRoleChange Appendix C Event and Alarm Reference 241 Alarm Clearing Notifications
319. y this CE150 by configuring the following objects in the System group Name A unique identifier for this CE150 Location Site information CO city state Contact Point of contact for this CE150 name title phone Example CRAFT gt set system name newname location e st collo contact network administrator 800 555 4141 Set Successful Use quotes for character strings that include spaces 2 Character strings cannot contain backslash angle brackets lt and gt or apostrophe or pound sign characters C A U T ON Using a pound sign when configuring ports and VCs may cause the CE150 to not read its config file correctly on reboot 3 The Craft command line prompt automatically changes to display the system name It also displays the slot number of the active System Control Module For example NEWNAME 1 3 gt N O T E In this manual examples of the Craft command line prompt do not show the slot number 56 CopperEdge 150 Installation and Operating Guide System Clock Check the system clock and observe the date and time dis played in the format shown time in 24 hour format in the ex ample CRAFT gt get cmsystem calendartime CalendarTime 2000 06 15 12 04 17 If necessary set the clock to the correct date and time CRAFT gt set cmsystem calendartime 2000 06 15 15 05 00 Set Successful Verify that the clock displays the correct date and time CRAFT gt ge

PDF user manual for CopperEdge 150

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents